9999 9999 215 en-GB

HANDBOOK
Access to the Handbook

The Handbook is available on the CITROËN website, in
the "MyCitroën" section or at the following address:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
From the appropriate Store, download the Scan Select:

MyCitroën application for smartphone. - the language,
- the vehicle, its body style,
- the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of 1st
registration of your vehicle.
Then select:
- the vehicle,
- the print edition appropriate for the date of 1st registration of your
vehicle. Access to the Handbook.
Download the content of the vehicle's Handbook.
This symbol indicates the latest

information available.
In this document, you will find all of the
Welcome instructions and recommendations on use
Key
Thank you for choosing a Citroën that will allow you to enjoy your vehicle to This key will enable you to identify the special
C4 SpaceTourer. the fullest. It is strongly recommended that features of your vehicle:
you familiarise yourself with it as well as the
This document presents the information and C4 SpaceTourer
Maintenance and Warranty Guide which will
recommendations required for you to be able to
provide you with information about warranties,
explore your vehicle in complete safety.
servicing and roadside assistance associated
Grand C4 SpaceTourer
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of with your vehicle.
the equipment described in this document,
depending on its trim level, version and the Grand C4 SpaceTourer
specification for the country in which it was Key
5-seat
sold. Safety warning
The descriptions and illustrations are given as Additional information Grand C4 SpaceTourer
indications only. 7-seat
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to Contributes to the protection of the
modify the technical specifications, equipment environment
and accessories without having to update this Left-hand drive vehicle
edition of the guide.
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, Right-hand drive vehicle

please ensure this Handbook is passed on to
the new owner.
Location of the equipment/button
described with a black zone
Contents
Overview . Access Lighting and visibility

Instruments and controls 4 Electronic key – Remote control 40 Lighting control stalk 90
Keyless Entry and Starting 41 Automatic headlamp dipping 94
Central locking 43 Headlamp adjustment 96
.
Back-up procedures 45 Cornering lighting 96
Doors 47 Directional lighting 97
Eco-driving
Boot 47 Wiper control stalk 98
Motorised tailgate 48 Automatic wiping 99
Hands-free tailgate 51 Screen wash 100
Alarm 53
Electric windows 55
Instruments
Instrument panels 8
Warning and indicator lamps 11
Indicators 26
Touch screen 31
Trip computer 36 Ease of use and comfort Safety
Setting the date and time 39 Front seats 57 General safety recommendations 101
Rear seats 62 Hazard warning lamps 101
Seat modular design and configuration 67 Horn 102
Steering wheel adjustment 68 Emergency or assistance call 102
Mirrors 68 Electronic stability control (ESC) 103
Ventilation 70 Seat belts 106
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning 71 Airbags 109
Heating 72 Child seats 112
Dual-zone temperature-regulated manual air conditioning 72 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 113
Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 74 ISOFIX mountings/child seats 119
Recirculation of interior air 76 Child lock 124
Front demist – defrost 77
Rear screen demist – defrost 77
Fragrance diffuser 77
Front fittings 79
Rear fittings 84
Boot fittings 85
Courtesy lamps 87
Interior ambient lighting 88
Footwell lighting 88
2 Panoramic glass sunroof 89
Contents .
Driving Practical information Technical data
Driving advice 126 Compatibility of fuels 189 Engine technical data and towed loads 237
Starting/switching off the engine Fuel 190 Engines and towed loads – PETROL 238
using the electronic key 127 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 191 Engines and towed loads – DIESEL 240
Starting/switching off the engine Snow chains 191 Dimensions 243
with K eyless Entry and Starting 129 Towing device 192 Identification markings 244
Switching the ignition on (without starting) 131 Towing system with quickly detachable towball 193
Electric parking brake 131 Load reduction mode 195
Hill start assist 134 Energy economy mode 195
5-speed manual gearbox 135 Changing a wiper blade 195
6-speed manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Gear efficiency indicator
135
136
139
Roof bars
Very cold climate screen(s)
196
197 Audio and telematics .
Bonnet 198 CITROËN Connect Radio
Stop & Start 140 Engine compartment 199
Tyre under-inflation detection 142 Checking levels 199
CITROËN Connect Nav
Memorising speeds 144 Checks 202
Speed Limit recognition and AdBlue ® (BlueHDi engines) 204
.
recommendation 144
Speed limiter 147
Alphabetical index
Cruise control 148
Adaptive cruise control 151
Adaptive cruise control until vehicle is
stopped/until 19 mph (30 km/h) 157
Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert
and Intelligent emergency braking Access to additional videos
assistance 165
Lane Departure Warning System 169
Blind Spot Detection 173 In the event of a breakdown
Fatigue detection system 175 Warning triangle 208
Parking sensors 176 Temporary puncture repair kit 208
Reversing camera 178 Spare wheel 211
Vision 360 179 Changing a bulb 220
Park Assist 181 Changing a fuse 226
12 V battery 231
bit.ly/helpPSA
Towing 234
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 236
3
Overview
Instruments and controls 1 7

Door mirrors Touch screen
Electric windows, deactivating Equipment configuration
Date and time adjustment
2 Ventilation
Bonnet release Heating
Dual-zone manual air conditioning
3 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning
Demisting/Defrosting
Dashboard fuses
8
4
Electric parking brake
Automatic gearbox
9
5
5/6-speed manual gearbox
Courtesy lamps
Rear view mirror
Child-monitoring mirror
Instruments and controls
Panoramic glass sunroof (continued)
Emergency or assistance call
6
Instrument panels
Gear efficiency indicator
Lighting dimmer
Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
- service indicator
- engine oil level indicator
- AdBlue ® fluid range indicator
4
Overview .
6 9
Hazard warning lamps Audio and telematic system controls
1
Headlamp adjustment
2
Lighting control stalk 7
Direction indicators Memorising speeds
Choice of instrument panel display Speed Limit recognition and
mode (depending on version) recommendation
Speed limiter
3 Cruise control
Steering wheel adjustment Adaptive cruise control
Horn Adaptive cruise control with Stop function
4 8
Wiper and screenwash control stalk Inter-vehicle distance
Trip computer Black panel
Choice of instrument panel display
5 mode (depending on version)
START/STOP button
5
Eco-driving
Drive smoothly Switch off the demisting and defrosting

Eco-driving controls when not required, if they are not
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, automatically controlled.
that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel use engine braking rather than the Switch off the heated seat as soon as
consumption and CO2 emissions. brake pedal, and press the accelerator possible.
progressively. These practices contribute
towards a reduction in fuel consumption and Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps
Optimise the use of your
CO2 emissions and also help reduce the when the ambient light level does not require
gearbox
background traffic noise. their use.
With a manual gearbox, move off gently
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of Avoid running the engine before moving off,
and change up without waiting. When
the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up
accelerating, change up early.
when the traffic is flowing well. much faster while driving.
With an automatic gearbox, give preference
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your
to automatic mode and avoid pressing the
Control the use of your electrical multimedia devices (film, music, video game
accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
equipment etc.), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of
The gear efficiency indicator invites you to Before moving off, if the passenger
fuel.
engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the compartment is too warm, ventilate it by
Disconnect your portable devices before
indication is displayed in the instrument panel, opening the windows and air vents before
leaving the vehicle.
follow it straight away. using the air conditioning.
For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, Above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the windows
this indicator appears only in manual mode. and leave the air vents open.
Consider using equipment that can help
Limit the causes of excess
keep the temperature in the passenger
consumption
compartment down (sunroof blind and window Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place
blinds, etc.). the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot,
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has as close as possible to the rear seats.
automatic regulation, as soon as the desired
temperature is attained.
6
Eco-driving .
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine
reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, oil, oil filter, air filter, cabin filter, etc.) and
bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a observe the schedule of operations in the
roof box. manufacturer's service schedule.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and system is faulty, your vehicle becomes
refit your summer tyres. polluting. Visit a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop as soon as possible to
bring your vehicle's nitrogen oxide emissions
Observe the recommendations back in line with the regulations.
on maintenance
When filling the tank, do not continue after the
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, 3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid overflow.
referring to the label in the door aperture,
driver's side. At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only
Carry out this check in particular: after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres)
- before a long journey, that you will see the fuel consumption settle
- at each change of season, down to a consistent average.
- after a long period out of use.
Do not forget the spare wheel and the tyres on
any trailer or caravan.
7
Instruments
Control buttons 1. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm), ("Dials" mode).

Digital monochrome 2. Gear efficiency indicator, selector position
instrument panel A. Instrument panel and touch screen lighting and the gear with an automatic gearbox.
dimmer buttons. 3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
Dials and display screens B. Reminder of the service information. 4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.
Resetting of the selected function (service 5. Fuel gauge.
indicator or trip distance recorder).
6. Total distance recorder (miles or km).
Reminder of the remaining range with the
7. Trip distance recorder (miles or km).
SCR system and the AdBlue ®.
Alert log (current alerts). 8. Reminder of current media or telephone
information.
9. Reminder of trip computer information.
1. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm), graduation
10. Exterior temperature (blue warning lamp
depends on the engine (petrol or Diesel).
2. Gear efficiency indicator, selector position
12-inch HD colour comes on if there is a risk of ice).
and the gear with an automatic gearbox. instrument panel

3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h). This instrument panel can be customised.
4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings. Depending on the selected display mode, some Control button
5. Fuel gauge. information may be hidden.
6. Service indicator, then total distance A. Reminder of the service information.
recorder (miles or km). Reminder of the remaining range with the
These functions are displayed
Dials and display screens SCR system and the AdBlue ®.
successively on switching on the ignition. Resetting of the selected function (service
indicator or trip distance recorder).
7. Trip distance recorder (miles or km).
8. Reminder of heating and air conditioning
settings.
8
Instruments
Display areas Customisation of the 12-inch

colour instrument panel
You can modify the appearance of the
Choice of display mode
1
instrument panel, by choosing:
- a coloured ambience,
- a display mode.
As a safety measure, these adjustments should

be carried out with the vehicle stationary. Each mode corresponds to the type of
information displayed in the configuration zone.
F Turn the knob located to the left of the
Choice of language steering wheel to display and scroll through
It depends on the configuration of the touch the different modes on the right hand-side
screen. of the instrument panel,
Whatever the display mode or coloured F once the desired display mode appears,
Certain languages are not available for this
ambience selected, the instrument panel press on the knob to validate.
instrument panel, English is selected by default.
includes:
- a fixed display area A with:
• the speedometer, Choice of coloured ambience
• the warning and indicator lamps, Perform changes when the vehicle is stationary: or
• the fuel gauge,
• the various information reminders and F Press this button in the
warning messages, "Settings" menu of the touch
- a configurable display area B. screen.
Most warning and indicator lamps do not have
The system restarts to take the modifications
a fixed position.
on the touch screen and instrument panel into
The warning and indicator lamps are displayed
account.
from right to left in order of priority.
For certain functions that have indicator lamps F Press the end of the lighting control stalk
for both operation and for deactivation, there is to display and scroll through the different
only one dedicated location. modes on the right hand-side of the
instrument panel,
9
Instruments
F once the selected display mode appears, - "Driving": display of the rev counter and
it is automatically applied after a few driving information (inter-vehicle time, etc.)
moments with no action on the control stalk.
- "Personal": choice of information to be

displayed in each of the 2 display zones
(1/3 central and 1/3 right) among:
• trip computer,
- "Navigation": display of current navigation • media,
information (map and instructions). • navigation,
- "Dials": permanent display of the trip - "Minimal": no information displayed. • driving aids,
computer and the rev counter. • rev counter,
• engine coolant temperature gauge,
• no information (blank).
Lighting dimmer
Allows manual adjustment of the brightness
of the instrument panel and touch screen
according to the exterior brightness.
10
Instruments
Only works when the vehicle lamps are on,

except daytime running lamps.
F In the Settings menu, select "Brightness".
F Adjust the brightness by pressing the
arrows or moving the slider.
Black panel (touch screen)
F In the Settings menu, select "Dark". The
screen goes off.
1
Two buttons F Press the screen again (anywhere on its
Black panel (comfortable surface) to switch it on again.
night driving display)
When driving at night, this function allows Warning and indicator
certain instrument panel displays to be
switched off so as to reduce visual fatigue for
lamps
the driver. Displayed as symbols, the warning and
The essential driving information, such as the indicator lamps inform the driver of the
vehicle speed, warning and indicator lamps, occurrence of a malfunction (warning lamps) or
the cruise control or speed limiter, remains of the operating status of a system (operation
displayed in the instrument panel. or deactivation indicator lamps). Certain lamps
With the exterior lighting on, press button A to light up in two ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in
increase the brightness of the instruments and Using the steering mounted several colours.
controls and the ambience of the vehicle or control
button B to reduce it. Associated warnings
As soon as the lighting reaches the required
level of brightness, release the button. The illumination of a lamp can be accompanied
by an audible signal and/or a message
displayed in a screen.
Touch screen
Relating the type of alert to the operating status
of the vehicle allows you to determine whether
the situation is normal or a fault has occurred:
refer to the description of each lamp for further
information.
F With the exterior lighting on, press this

button to activate the black panel.
F Press the button once again to deactivate it.
11
Instruments
When the ignition is switched on

Certain red or orange warning lamps come on
for a few seconds when the ignition is switched
on. These warning lamps should go off as soon
as the engine is started.
Persistent warning lamp

When the engine is running or the vehicle is
being driven, the illumination of a red or orange
warning lamp indicates a fault that needs
further investigation, using any associated
message and the description of the warning
lamp in the documentation.
Where a warning lamp remains lit

The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning
and indicator lamp description indicate whether
you should contact a qualified professional
in addition to the immediate recommended
actions.
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do

so and switch off the ignition.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop.
12
Instruments
List of warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
1
Red warning/indicator lamps
STOP Fixed, associated Indicates a serious fault with the Carry out (1) and then (2).
with another warning engine, braking system, power
lamp, accompanied steering or a major electrical fault.
by the display of
a message and an
audible signal.
Engine oil Fixed. There is a fault with the engine Carry out (1) and then (2).
pressure lubrication system.
Brakes Fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped Carry out (1), then top up with brake fluid that
significantly. complies with the manufacturer's recommendations.
If the problem persists, carry out (2).
Fixed. The electronic brake force Carry out (1) and then (2).
distribution (EBFD) system is faulty.
+
13
Instruments
Electric parking Fixed. The electric parking brake is applied.

brake
Flashing. The electric parking brake is not Carry out (1): park on flat level ground (horizontally).
applied automatically. With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
The application/release is faulty. With an automatic gearbox, select mode P.
Switch off the ignition and carry out (2).
Operating fault Fixed, accompanied The parking brake is not operating Make your vehicle safe:
(with electric by the message at maximum efficiency and cannot F Park on a level surface.
+ parking brake) "Parking brake fault". ensure parking the vehicle in F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
complete safety in all situations. F With an automatic gearbox, with P selected, place
the chocks supplied against one of the wheels.
Then carry out (2).
+
Maximum Fixed. The temperature of the cooling Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has cooled
coolant system is too high. down before topping up to the required level if
temperature necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2).
Battery charge Fixed. The battery charging circuit has Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning lamp
a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack does not go off when the engine is started, carry out (2).
or cut alternator belt, etc.).
14
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp
Door open*
State
Fixed, associated with

Cause
A door, the boot, the tailgate or

Actions/Observations
Close the access.

1
a message identifying the tailgate screen is still open
the access. (depending on version).
An audible signal
supplements the alert
if the speed is higher
than 6 mph (10 km/h).
Seat belt not Fixed or flashing, A seat belt has not been fastened or
fastened/ accompanied by an has been unfastened.
unfastened audible signal.
Orange warning/indicator lamps

Operating fault Fixed. The electric parking brake has Carry out (3) quickly.
(with electric a fault.
parking brake)
Fixed, accompanied You can no longer immobilise the If manual application and release are not working, the
by the message vehicle with the engine running. electric parking brake control lever is faulty.
"Parking brake fault". The automatic functions must be used at all times and
+
are automatically reactivated in the event of failure of
the control lever.
Carry out (2).
* Only with digital monochrome instrument panel.
15
Instruments
Operating fault Fixed, accompanied The parking brake is faulty: manual When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle:
(with electric by the message and automatic functions may not be F Pull and hold the control lever for approximately
+ parking brake) "Parking brake fault". working. 7 to 15 seconds, until the warning lamp comes on
in the instrument panel.
If this procedure does not work, make your vehicle
safe:
+ F Park on a level surface.
F If you have a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
F With an automatic gearbox, select P, then put the
supplied chocks against one of the wheels.
Then carry out (2).
Deactivation of Fixed. The "automatic application" (on Carry out (3) if automatic application/release is no
the automatic switching off the engine) and longer possible.
functions (with "automatic release" (on acceleration) The brake can be applied or released manually.
electric parking functions are deactivated.
brake) In the event of a fault, illumination of
this warning lamp is accompanied by
a message.
Automatic Fixed, accompanied The automatic application is not Use the electric parking brake control lever.
application by the message available, the parking brake can only If automatic release is also not available, use manual
(with electric "Parking brake fault". be used manually. release.
+
parking brake)
Anti-lock Braking Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has The vehicle retains conventional braking.
System (ABS) a fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed, then carry out (3).
16
Instruments
Service
State
Temporarily on,
Cause
One or more minor faults have

Identify the cause of the fault using the message

1
accompanied by the been detected for which there is no displayed in the instrument panel.
display of a message. specific warning lamp. You can deal with certain anomalies yourself, for
example an open door or the start of saturation of the
particle filter.
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under-inflation detection system, carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied One or more major faults have Identify the cause of the fault using the message
by the display of been detected for which there is no displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out (3).
a message. specific warning lamp.
Fixed, accompanied Automatic release of the electric Use manual release.

by the message parking brake is unavailable.
'Parking brake fault'.
Service warning lamp The servicing interval has been Only with BlueHDi Diesel versions.
fixed and service exceeded. Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
+ spanner flashing then
fixed.
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.
17
Instruments
AdBlue ® Fixed, on switching The remaining driving range is Top up the AdBlue ® as soon as possible, or carry out (3).
(access via the on the ignition, between 1,500 and 375 miles
boot) accompanied by an (2,400 and 600 km).
audible signal and
a message indicating the
remaining driving range.
AdBlue ® warning lamp The driving range is less than You must top up the AdBlue ® to avoid a breakdown,
flashing and Service 375 miles (600 km). or carry out (3).
+ warning lamp fixed,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
AdBlue ® warning lamp The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue ® or carry out (2).
flashing and Service starting inhibition system required It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue ® to its
warning lamp fixed, by legislation prevents starting of the tank.
accompanied by an engine.
audible signal and
that starting is
prevented.
18
Instruments
AdBlue ®
State
On for around
Cause
The remaining driving range is

Top up the AdBlue ®.

1
(access via the 30 seconds when between 1,500 and 500 miles
fuel filler flap) starting the vehicle, (2,400 and 800 km).
accompanied by
range.
Fixed, on switching on The remaining driving range is Top up the AdBlue ® as soon as possible, or carry
the ignition, accompanied between 500 and 62 miles (800 and out (3).
by an audible signal and 100 km).
a message indicating the
remaining driving range.
Flashing, The driving range is less than You must top up the AdBlue ® to avoid starting
accompanied by an 62 miles (100 km). being prevented, or carry out (3).
audible signal and
range.
Flashing, The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue ® or carry out (2).
accompanied by an starting prevention system required It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue ® to its
audible signal and by legislation prevents starting of the tank.
a message indicating engine.
that starting is
prevented.
19
Instruments
SCR emissions Fixed on switching on the A fault with the SCR emissions This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
control system ignition, associated with control system has been detected. return to normal levels.
+ (BlueHDi Diesel) the Service and engine
diagnostic warning
+ lamps, accompanied by
an audible signal and
a message.
Flashing on switching Depending on the message Carry out (3) as soon as possible to avoid
on the ignition, displayed, you can continue driving a breakdown.
associated with the for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) before
Service and engine the engine starting prevention
diagnostic warning system is triggered.
lamps, accompanied by
an audible signal and
range.
Flashing on switching An engine immobiliser prevents To start the engine, carry out (2).
on the ignition, the engine from restarting (over
associated with the the authorised driving limit after
Service and engine confirmation of a fault with the
diagnostic warning emissions control system).
lamps, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
20
Instruments
Engine
State
Flashing.
Cause
The engine management system has

There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be destroyed.

1
diagnostic a fault. Carry out (2) without fail.
system
Fixed. The emissions control system has The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
a fault. Carry out (3) quickly.
Collision Risk Fixed, accompanied The system has been deactivated,

Alert/Active by the display of via the vehicle configuration menu.
Safety Brake a message.
Flashing. The system is operating. The vehicle brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed
of collision with the vehicle ahead.
Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3).

by a message and an
audible signal.
Dynamic Flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is activated

stability control if there is a loss of grip or trajectory.
(DSC)/Anti-slip
regulation (ASR)
Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Emergency Fixed, accompanied Emergency braking does not have If automatic release is not available, use manual
brake anomaly by the message full power. release.
(with electric "Parking brake fault".
+
parking brake)
21
Instruments
Under-inflation Fixed, accompanied The pressure in one or more tyres is Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
by an audible signal too low. Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting the
and a message. pressure.
Under-inflation Under-inflation The system is faulty: tyre pressures Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored.
warning lamp flashing are no longer monitored. As soon as possible, check the pressure of the tyres
+ then fixed and Service and carry out (3).
warning lamp fixed.
Diesel engine Temporarily on. When switching on the ignition, if the Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting.
pre-heating weather conditions and the engine When the warning lamp goes off, starting is
temperature make it necessary. immediate if you press and hold:
- the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox.
- the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox.
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again,
then start the engine.
Airbags Fixed. One of the airbags or seat belt Carry out (3).
pretensioners is faulty.
Front passenger Fixed. The front passenger airbag is In this case, do NOT install a "rearward facing"
airbag (ON) activated. child seat on the front passenger seat – Risk of
The control is in the "ON" position. serious injury!
22
Instruments
Passenger
State
Flashing.
Cause
The passenger airbag system is

Carry out (3).

1
airbag system defective.
Fixed. The front passenger airbag is You can install a "rearward facing" child seat, unless
deactivated. there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags warning lamp
The control is in the "OFF" position. on).
Low fuel level Fixed, accompanied When it first comes on, there Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel.
by an audible signal remains approximately 6 litres of Never drive until completely empty, this could
and a message. fuel in the tank (reserve). damage the emissions and injection systems.
Lane Departure Fixed. The system has been automatically

Warning System deactivated or placed on standby.
Flashing. You are about to cross a broken The system is activated, then corrects the trajectory
lane marking without operating the on the side of the lane marking detected.
direction indicators.
Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3).

by the display of
+ a message and an
audible signal.
Stop & Start Fixed, accompanied The Stop & Start system is The engine will not switch off at the next traffic stop.
by the display of deactivated. Reactivate the function via the touch screen
a message. configuration menu.
23
Instruments
Foot on the Fixed. Omission or insufficient pressure on With an automatic gearbox, with the engine running,
brake* the brake pedal. before releasing the parking brake, to move out of
position P.
Foot on the Fixed. Stop & Start: the change to START Fully depress the clutch pedal.
clutch* mode is rejected because the clutch
pedal is not fully depressed.
Rear foglamp Fixed. The lamp is on.
Green warning/indicator lamps

Stop & Start Fixed. When the vehicle stops, the Stop &
Start puts the engine into STOP mode.
Flashing temporarily. STOP mode is momentarily

unavailable or START mode is
automatically triggered.
Park Assist Fixed. The function is active.
Blind spot Fixed. The function has been activated.

monitoring
* Only with digital monochrome instrument panel.
24
Instruments
Left-hand
State
Flashing with audible

Cause
The direction indicators are on.

1
direction signal.
indicator
Right-hand Flashing with audible The direction indicators are on.

direction indicator signal.
Sidelamps Fixed. The lamps are on.
Dipped beam Fixed. The lamps are on.

headlamps
Directional Flashing. The directional headlamps system Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
headlamps has a fault. workshop.
Front foglamps Fixed. The front foglamps are on.
Automatic Fixed. Automatic windscreen wiping is

wiping activated.
Automatic Fixed. The function has been activated in

headlamp the touch screen (Driving menu).
+ dipping The lighting control stalk is in the
"AUTO" position.
or
Blue warning/indicator lamps

Main beam Fixed. The main beams are on.
headlamps
25
Instruments
Indicators The distance indicated (in miles or

Resetting the service indicator
kilometres) is calculated according to the
Service indicator The service indicator must be reset after each
distance covered and the time elapsed
service.
since the last service.
The service indicator is displayed in the If you have carried out the service on your
The alert may be triggered close to a due
instrument panel. Depending on the vehicle vehicle yourself:
date.
version: F switch off the ignition,
- the distance recorder display line indicates
the distance remaining before the next
service is due, or the distance travelled
since it was due preceded by the sign "-".
- an alert message indicates the distance
remaining, as well as the period before the
next service is due or how long it is overdue.
Warning/indicator Actions/
State Cause
lamp Observations
Service Lights up temporarily Between 620 and
spanner when the ignition is 1,860 miles (1,000 and
switched on. 3,000 km) remain before
F press and hold the trip distance recorder
the next service is due.
reset button,
Fixed, when the The service is due in Have your vehicle F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
ignition is switched on. less than 620 miles serviced very soon. display begins a countdown,
(1,000 km). F release the button when "=0" is displayed;
the spanner disappears.
Service Flashing then fixed, The servicing interval Have your vehicle
spanner when the ignition is has been exceeded. serviced as soon as
flashing switched on. possible. If you have to disconnect the battery
+
(For BlueHDi Diesel following this operation, lock the vehicle
versions, associated and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to
with the Service be registered.
warning lamp).
26
Instruments
Retrieving the service

information
You can access the service information at any
You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off the
engine.
The level read will only be correct if the
vehicle is on level ground and the engine
has been off for more than 30 minutes.
1
time. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
F Press the trip distance recorder reset workshop.
button. Oil level correct
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature
The service information is displayed for
and pressure in the cooling system increase.
a few seconds, then disappears.
To top up the level:
F wait for the engine to cool,

F unscrew the cap slightly to allow the
Engine coolant temperature pressure to drop, Oil level incorrect
gauge F when the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap,
(Only with the 12" colour instrument panel.) F top up the level to the "MAX" mark.
This is indicated by the display of the message

"Oil level incorrect" in the instrument panel
Be aware of the risk of scalding when screen, accompanied by the Service warning
topping up the coolant. Do not fill above lamp and an audible signal.
the maximum level (indicated on the If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
reservoir). the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
avoid damage to the engine.
For more information on Checking levels,
Engine oil level indicator refer to the corresponding section.
With the engine running, when the needle is: (Depending on version.)
- in zone A, the temperature is correct, On versions fitted with an electric oil level
- in zone B, the temperature is too high; indicator, the state of the engine oil level is Oil level indicator fault
the maximum temperature and the displayed in the instrument panel for a few
central STOP warning lamps come on, seconds, after the servicing information.
accompanied by an audible signal and
a warning message.
27
Instruments
This is signalled by the display of the message "Oil In the event of the risk of non- When driving, the message is displayed every
level measurement invalid" in the instrument panel. starting related to a lack of 185 miles (300 km) until the level is topped up.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified AdBlue® The reserve level has been reached; it is
workshop. recommended that you top up as soon as
The engine starting prevention system possible.
In the event of a fault with the electric required by regulations is activated
indicator, the engine oil level is no longer automatically once the AdBlue ® tank is
monitored. empty. Remaining range less than 375 miles (600 km)
If the system is faulty, you must check the
engine oil level using the manual dipstick Range greater than 1,500 miles (2,400 km)
located under the bonnet. When switching on the ignition, there is no
For more information on Checking levels, automatic display of range in the instrument When switching on the ignition, this warning
refer to the corresponding section. panel. lamp flashes, accompanied by the permanent
lighting of the Service warning lamp, an audible
signal and the display of a message ("Top
up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles")
indicating the remaining range in miles or
AdBlue® range indicators With the 12" colour instrument panel, pressing kilometres.
this button temporarily displays the driving When driving, this message is displayed every
These range indicators are present only on range. 30 seconds until the AdBlue level has been
BlueHDi Diesel versions. topped up.
Once the AdBlue ® tank is on reserve or after With access via the boot It is essential to top up as soon as possible and
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions before the tank is completely empty; otherwise
control system, when the ignition is switched Remaining range between 1,500 and it will not be possible to restart the engine after
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the 375 miles (2,400 and 600 km) the next stop.
distance that can be covered, the range, before
engine starting is prevented. Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue ®
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message ("Top
up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles") When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp
indicating the remaining range expressed in flashes, and the Service warning lamp comes on,
miles or kilometres. accompanied by an audible signal and the display of
the message "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible".
28
Instruments
The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the starting

inhibition system required by legislation
prevents starting of the engine.
Range between 500 and 62 miles (800 and 100 km) Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue ®
1
When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible When switching on the ignition, this warning
To be able to restart the engine, it is
signal (1 beep) and the display of a message lamp flashes, accompanied by the display
essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue ®
("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in of the message "Top up AdBlue: Starting
to its tank.
x miles") indicating the remaining range impossible".
expressed in miles or kilometres. The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the starting
For more information on AdBlue ® When driving, the audible signal and the inhibition system required by legislation
(BlueHDi engines), and, in particular, message display are triggered every 62 miles prevents starting of the engine.
on topping up, refer to the corresponding (100 km) until the fluid is topped up.
section. It is essential to top up as soon as possible and
before the tank is completely empty; otherwise To be able to restart the engine, it is
it will not be possible to restart the engine after essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue ®
With access via the fuel filler flap the next stop. to its tank.
Range between 1,500 and 500 miles

Range less than 62 miles (100 km) For more information on AdBlue ®
(2,400 and 800 km)
(BlueHDi engines), and, in particular,
on topping up, refer to the corresponding
section.
Each time the vehicle is started, this warning When switching on the ignition, this warning
lamp comes on for about 30 seconds, lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible
accompanied by the display of a message signal (1 beep) and the display of a message
("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x ("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x
miles") indicating the remaining range in miles miles") indicating the remaining range in miles
or kilometres. or kilometres.
The reserve level has been reached; it is When driving, the audible signal and the
recommended that you top up as soon as message display are triggered every 6 miles
possible. (10 km) until the AdBlue tank is topped up.
These messages are accompanied by the It is essential to top up as soon as possible and
recommendation to not top up with more than before the tank is completely empty; otherwise
10 litres of AdBlue. it will not be possible to restart the engine after
the next stop.
29
Instruments
In the event of a fault with the During the permitted driving phase
You have exceeded the authorised driving
SCR emissions control system (between 685 and 0 miles (1,100 and 0 km))
limit: the starting prevention system does
not allow the engine to be started.
A system that prevents engine starting is

If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed To be able to start the engine, you must call on
activated automatically from 685 miles
(after 31 miles (50 km) covered with the a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
(1,100 km) after confirmation of a fault with
permanent display of the message signalling
the SCR emissions control system.
a fault), these warning lamps come on and the
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
AdBlue warning lamp flashes, accompanied by
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
an audible signal and the display of a message Distance recorders
possible.
(e.g. "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in The total and trip distances are displayed for
185 miles") indicating the remaining range in thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
miles or kilometres. when the driver's door is opened and when the
In the event of the detection of a fault
While driving, the message is displayed every vehicle is locked or unlocked.
30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system
persists.
The alert is repeated when switching on the
When travelling abroad, you may need
These warning lamps come on, accompanied ignition.
to change the unit of distance: the speed
by an audible signal and the display of the You should go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
display must be expressed in the official
message "Emissions fault". workshop as soon as possible.
units of the country (km or miles). The
The alert is triggered when driving when the Otherwise you will not be able to restart the vehicle.
change of units is done via the screen
fault is detected for the first time, then when
configuration menu, with the vehicle
switching on the ignition for subsequent Starting prevented
stationary.
journeys, while the fault persists.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert Each time the ignition is switched on, these
disappears during the next journey, after warning lamps come on and the AdBlue
self-diagnosis of the SCR system. warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an
audible signal and the display of the message
"Emissions fault: Starting prevented".
30
Instruments
Total distance recorder Touch screen

The touch screen gives access to:
- the heating/air conditioning controls,
Do not use pointed objects on the touch
screen.
Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
Use a soft clean cloth to clean the touch
1
- menus for adjusting settings for vehicle screen.
functions and systems,
- audio system and telephone controls and Principles
the display of associated information,
and, depending on equipment, allows: Use the buttons on each side of the touch
- the display of alert messages and the visual screen to access the menus, then use the
parking sensors information, buttons that appear on the touch screen.
- the permanent display of the time and the Certain functions may be displayed over 1 or
exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp 2 pages.
It measures the total distance travelled by the appears when there is a risk of ice), To deactivate/activate a function, press OFF/
vehicle since its first registration. - access to the internet services and ON.
navigation system controls and the display To modify a setting (lighting duration, etc.) or
of associated information. find additional information, press the symbol for
Trip recorder the function.
As a safety measure, the driver should

only carry out operations that require
close attention with the vehicle After a few moments with no action on
stationary. the secondary page, the primary page is
Some functions are not accessible when displayed automatically.
driving.
Use this button to confirm.
General operation Use this button to return to the

It measures the distance travelled since it was previous page.
Recommendations
reset by the driver.
F With the ignition on, press the button until Use is possible in all temperatures.
zeros appear.
31
Instruments
Menus Telephone. Access to Configuration.

See the "Audio and telematics" section.
Applications.
Enables the trip computer to
be displayed with the digital
monochrome instrument panel.
Driving.
Allows the activation, deactivation
and adjustment of settings for
certain functions.
The functions accessible from this menu are
arranged under two tabs: "Vehicle settings"
and "Driving functions".
Volume control/mute.
See the "Audio and telematics"
Air conditioning. section.
Allows adjustment of the various
settings for temperature, air flow,
etc. Upper bar
For more information on Heating, Manual Certain information is always present in the
air conditioning and Automatic air upper bar of the touch screen:
conditioning, refer to the corresponding - Summary of air conditioning information and
sections. access to the simplified menu (temperature
and air flow adjustment only).
Connected navigation.
- Summary of information from the Radio
Media, Telephone menus and navigation
Radio Media. instructions*.
See the "Audio and telematics" section. - Notifications zone (texts and email)*.
* Depending on equipment
32
Instruments
Driving menu
Vehicle settings tab
1
The functions are grouped into 4 families.
Families Functions with CITROËN Connect Radio Functions with CITROËN Connect Nav
Driving lighting - "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of - "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of the

automatic guide-me-home lighting. cornering lighting/directional headlamps.
- "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior - "Daytime running lamps" (LED daytime running lamps)
welcome lighting. depending on country of sale.
- "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of the
cornering lighting/directional headlamps.
- "Daytime running lamps" (LED daytime running lamps)
depending on country of sale.
Vehicle access - "Unlock driver's door only": activation/deactivation of - "Unlock driver's door only": activation/deactivation of
selective unlocking of the driver's door. selective unlocking of the driver's door.
- "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of unlocking - "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of unlocking
at the tailgate. at the tailgate.
- "Motorised tailgate": activation/deactivation of - "Motorised tailgate": activation/deactivation of
motorised operation of the tailgate. motorised operation of the tailgate.
- "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation - "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation
of the hands-free tailgate function. of the hands-free tailgate function.
33
Instruments
Families Functions with CITROËN Connect Radio Functions with CITROËN Connect Nav
Comfort - "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the - "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the
rear wiper on with reverse gear. rear wiper on with reverse gear.
- "Mood lighting": activation/deactivation of the interior - "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of
ambient lighting. automatic guide-me-home lighting.
- "Mirror adaptation in reverse": activation/deactivation - "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior
of the automatic mirror tilt when engaging reverse welcome lighting.
gear. - "Mood lighting": activation/deactivation of the interior
ambient lighting.
- "Mirror adaptation in reverse": activation/deactivation
of the automatic mirror tilt when engaging reverse
gear.
Security - "Collision risk alert": activation/deactivation of the - "Collision risk alert": activation/deactivation of the
collision risk alert. collision risk alert.
- "Recommended speed display": activation/ - "Recommended speed display": activation/
deactivation of speed limit recognition. deactivation of speed limit recognition.
- "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of - "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of
the driver fatigue detection system. the driver fatigue detection system.
For more information on one of these

functions, refer to the corresponding
section.
34
Instruments
Driving functions tab
Function Comment
1
Adjusting Speeds Memorisation of speed settings for the speed limiter, cruise control and adaptive cruise control.
Under-inflation initialisation Reinitialisation of the under-inflation system.
Diagnostic List of current alerts.
Lane assist Activation/deactivation of the "active lane departure warning" system.
Parking sensors Activation/deactivation of the function.
Automatic headlamp dipping Activation/deactivation of the "automatic headlamp dipping" function.
Stop & Start Activation/deactivation of the function.
Blind spot sensors Activation/deactivation of the function.
Panoramic visual aid Activation/deactivation of the function and then choice of options.
Active cruise control Choice of the standard cruise control or adaptive cruise control function.
Traction control Activation/deactivation of the function.
For more information on one of these

functions, refer to the corresponding
section.
35
Instruments
Configuration Digital monochrome

Button Comments
The functions available through the instrument panel
upper menu bar are detailed in the Adjustment of the display
parameters (text scrolling, The data is accessible in the
table below. Certain settings can be
animations, etc.) and "Driving" menu.
accessed on the second page.
brightness.
Choose an ambience for the 12-

inch colour instrument panel.
Button Comments
Switch off the screen.

Choice of the type of
information displayed in the 12-
inch colour instrument panel.
Brightness adjustment.
Choice of units:
- temperature (°Celsius or
°Fahrenheit)
Choice and configuration of - distances and fuel consumption
three personalised profiles and (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
a common profile.
Choice of language for the
Touch screen and instrument touch screen and 12-inch colour
panel settings, etc. instrument panel. Permanent display:
F Select the "Applications" menu, then "Trip
Setting the date and time.
computer".
Activation and adjustment of the
Wi-Fi settings. The information of the trip computer is
displayed in tabs.
F Press one of the buttons to display the
Trip computer desired tab.
System that gives you information on

the current journey (range, current fuel
consumption, average fuel consumption, etc.).
36
Instruments
Temporary display in a specific window:

F Press the end of the wiper control stalk for
access to the information and to display the
different tabs.
Trip reset 12" colour instrument panel
Display of data on the instrument
1
panel
The current information tab with: Trip computer data is displayed permanently
- Range. when you select the "Dials" or "Personal"
- Current fuel consumption. display mode.
- Stop & Start time counter.
The trip "1" tab with:

- Average speed for the first trip.
- Average fuel consumption.
- Distance travelled.
The trip "2" tab with:

- Average speed for the second trip.
- Average fuel consumption.
- Distance travelled.
F When the desired trip is displayed, press In all other display modes, pressing the end of
the reset button or on the end of the wiper the wiper control stalk will cause this data to
control stalk. appear temporarily in a specific window.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used
identically. F Press the button on the end of the wiper
For example, trip 1 can be used for daily control stalk to display the various tabs in
calculations, and trip 2 for monthly calculations. succession.
37
Instruments
Resetting the trip recorder This value may vary following a change in
the style of driving or the terrain, resulting
in a significant change in the current fuel
consumption.
When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km),

dashes are displayed. After filling with at least
5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is
displayed if it exceeds 62 miles (100 km).
If dashes are displayed continuously

F When the desired trip is displayed, press while driving in place of the digits, contact
the button at the end of the wiper control a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
stalk for more than two seconds.
Trips 1 and 2 are independent and are used
- The current information tab with: identically. Current fuel consumption
• range, For example, trip 1 can be used for daily
• current fuel consumption, calculations, and trip 2 for monthly calculations. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
• Stop & Start time counter. Calculated during the last few
seconds.
- Trip 1 with:
• the average speed, A few definitions
• the average fuel consumption, This function is only displayed from
• the distance travelled, Range
19 mph (30 km/h).
for the first trip. (miles or km)
- Trip 2 with: The distance which can still be
• the average speed, travelled with the fuel remaining in Average fuel consumption
• the average fuel consumption, the tank (related to the average fuel
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
• the distance travelled, consumption over the last few miles
Calculated since the last time the
for the second trip. (kilometres) travelled).
trip was reset.
38
Instruments
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last time the
F Select "Date" or "Time".
F Choose the display formats.
F Change the date and/or time using the
numeric keypad.
Additional adjustments
You can choose:
- To change the display format of the date
1
trip was reset. and time (12h/24h).
F Press this button to confirm. - To change the time zone.
- To activate or deactivate synchronisation
Distance travelled with the GPS (UTC).
(miles or km)
Calculated since the last time the With CITROËN Connect Nav The system does not automatically
trip was reset. manage the change between winter and
Adjustment of the time and date is only summer time (depending on country).
Stop & Start time counter available if synchronisation with GPS is The change between winter and summer
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes) deactivated. time is done by changing the time zone.
F Select the Settings menu.

A time counter calculates the total of the
periods in STOP mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is F Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
switched on. secondary page.
F Select "Setting the time-date".

Setting the date and time
With CITROËN Connect
Radio F Select the "Date" or "Time" tab.
F Adjust the date and/or time using the
F Select the Settings menu. numeric keypad.
F Press this button to confirm.
F Select "System configuration". F Press this button to confirm.
F Select "Date and time".
39
Access
Electronic key – Remote Complete unlocking The direction indicators flash for
control F Press the button. a few seconds. The spotlamps in the
door mirrors come on. Depending on
System that enables the activation of the version, the door mirrors unfold, the
unlocking and locking of the vehicle, the Selective unlocking welcome lighting comes on, the alarm is
opening of the boot and, depending on the It is set via the Driving menu. deactivated.
version, the alarm from a distance.
It also locates and starts the vehicle, as well as Complete unlocking is activated by default.
protecting against theft. Locking the vehicle
F To unlock the driver's door only, press the
unlocking button once.
F To unlock the other doors and the boot,
press the button again.
Normal locking
F Press the button.
Unlocking the vehicle and Maintaining pressure allows the windows to be
raised to the desired position.
opening the boot
F Press and hold this button
A. Unlocking the vehicle. Ensure that nothing could prevent the
to unlock the vehicle and,
B. Central locking system of the vehicle. correct operation of the windows.
depending on version, release
C. Locking the vehicle, and depending on the Be aware of children when operating the
the tailgate or open the
version, releasing the tailgate or opening windows.
motorised tailgate.
the motorised tailgate.
The setting for the motorised tailgate
The electronic key includes an integral back-up is in the Driving menu. The direction indicators come on for a few
key. seconds.
By default, motorised operation is activated. Depending on your version, the door
mirrors fold, the alarm is activated.
Unlocking the vehicle
40
Access
F Within five seconds, press the button again This system allows the unlocking, locking
If one of the openings (doors or boot) is
to deadlock the vehicle. and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the
still open, the locking does not take place.
electronic key in the recognition zone "A".
2
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully
activated after about 45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and Locating your vehicle
with no action on the doors or boot, the The electronic key is also used as
This function allows you to identify your vehicle
vehicle will lock itself again automatically a remote control. For more information
from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your
after about 30 seconds. on the Remote Control, refer to the
vehicle must be locked.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also corresponding section.
be reactivated automatically. F Press this button.
For reasons of safety and theft protection,
do not leave your electronic key in the
vehicle, even when you are close to it.
The direction indicators will flash for around It is recommended that you keep it on your
The automatic folding and unfolding
10 seconds and the courtesy lamps will switch on. person.
of the door mirrors can be deactivated
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Keyless Entry and Unlocking the vehicle
Deadlocking Starting
Deadlocking deactivates the interior door
controls and it also deactivates the manual
central control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside the
vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Complete unlocking
F With the electronic key on your person and in
recognition zone A, pass your hand behind
F With the vehicle unlocked, press the locking the door handle of one of the front doors
button. to unlock the vehicle or press the tailgate
opening control (situated in the centre).
41
Access
Selective unlocking Locking the vehicle Deadlocking

Activation or deactivation of selective
locking of the tailgate is done in the
Normal locking Deadlocking deactivates the interior door
controls and it also deactivates the manual
Driving menu.
central control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside the
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
vehicle when it is deadlocked.
F To unlock only the driver's door, with the
electronic key on your person, pass your
hand behind the driver's door handle. F With the key in recognition zone A, press
F To unlock the complete vehicle, pass your on one of the front door handles (at the
hand behind the front passenger door markings) to lock the vehicle or on the
handle with the electronic key close to locking control located on the tailgate (on
the passenger door, or press the tailgate the right) for versions that are not equipped
opening control with the electronic key close with the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
to the rear of the vehicle. function.
Maintaining pressure allows the windows to be By the doors or tailgate:
raised to the desired position. F With the electronic key in recognition zone
It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the A, press the door handle of one of the
keys is left inside the vehicle. front doors (at the markings), or the locking
control located on the tailgate (on the right)
The direction indicators flash for a few for versions that are not equipped with the
seconds. Ensure that nothing could prevent the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" function, to
Depending on your version, the door proper closure of the windows. lock the vehicle.
mirrors fold, the alarm is deactivated and Be aware of children when operating the F Within 5 seconds, press the door handle
the welcome lighting comes on. windows. again, or the locking control on the tailgate
(on the right) for versions that are not
The direction indicators come on for a few equipped with the "Hands-Free Tailgate
seconds. Access" function, to deadlock the vehicle.
Depending on version, the door mirrors
fold and the alarm is activated.
42
Access
If one of the doors or the boot is still open As a safety measure (children on board), Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt,
or if the electronic key for the Keyless never leave the vehicle without taking the etc.) on the inner surface of the door
2
Entry and Starting system has been left electronic key for the K
eyless Entry and handle may affect detection.
inside the vehicle, the central locking does Starting system with you, even for a short If cleaning the inner surface of the door
not take place. period. handle using a cloth does not restore
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully Be aware of the risk of theft when the detection, contact a CITROËN dealer or
activated after about 45 seconds. electronic key for the K
eyless Entry and a qualified workshop.
Starting system is in one of the defined A sudden splash of water (stream of water,
zones with the vehicle unlocked. high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be
identified by the system as the desire to
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and open the vehicle.
no action is taken at the doors or boot, the
vehicle will automatically lock itself again In order to preserve the battery in the
after about 30 seconds. electronic key and the vehicle's battery,
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also the "hands-free" functions are put into
be reactivated automatically. long-term standby after 21 days without
use. To restore these functions, press
Central locking
one of the remote control buttons or start Manual
the engine with the electronic key in the
The automatic folding and unfolding reader.
of the door mirrors can be deactivated For more information on starting with
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to the
workshop. corresponding section.
F Press this button to operate the central

locking of the vehicle (doors and boot) from
inside the vehicle. The indicator lamp in the
button comes on.
F Pressing the button again unlocks the
vehicle completely. The indicator lamp in
the button goes off.
43
Access
The indicator lamp also goes off when Transporting long or voluminous Advice
unlocking one or more doors. objects
Press the central locking control to Remote control
drive with the boot open and the doors The high frequency remote control is
The central locking does not work if one of unlocked. a sensitive system; do not operate it while
the doors is open. it is in your pocket as there is a possibility
that it may unlock the vehicle, without you
being aware of it.
If the vehicle is locked from the outside or Do not press the buttons of your remote
deadlocked, this button does not work. To control out of range and out of sight of
unlock the vehicle from the inside: your vehicle. The remote control may stop
F After normal locking, pull one of the working and would have to be reinitialised.
interior door controls. The remote control cannot operate when
F After deadlocking, use the remote the key is in the reader, even when the
control, the Keyless Entry and Starting ignition is switched on.
system or the integral key. Electrical interference
The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic
key may not operate if close to certain
electronic devices: telephone, laptop
computer, strong magnetic fields, etc.
Anti-theft protection
Automatic (anti-intrusion Do not make any modifications to the
electronic engine immobiliser system; this
security) could cause malfunctions.
The doors and boot lock automatically when Do not forget to turn the steering wheel to
driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). engage the steering lock.
To deactivate or reactivate this function
(activated by default):
F Press the button until a message appears in
the instrument panel.
44
Access
Locking the vehicle Back-up opening/closing

Driving with the doors locked may render with the integral key
2
access by the emergency services to the
interior difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on F Insert the key in the door lock.
board), take the electronic key with you when F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle
you leave the vehicle, even for a short time. to unlock it, or towards the rear to lock it.
F Turn the key rearwards again within
5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Flashing of the direction indicators for a few
Have the key codes memorised by
seconds confirms that the procedure has
a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the The integral key is used to lock and unlock
completed correctly.
keys in your possession are the only ones the vehicle when there is a malfunction of
which can start the vehicle. the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and
Starting" system caused in particular by:
- key battery flat, vehicle battery discharged
or disconnected, etc. If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm, this
- vehicle located in an area with strong
Back-up procedures electromagnetic signals.
function will not be activated when locking
with the key.
F To extract the back-up key, pull and hold
Lost keys, remote control, button 1 while extracting key 2.
If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds
electronic key on opening the door; switch on the ignition
The integral key also enables: to stop it.
- deactivation/reactivation of the front
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's
passenger airbag,
registration certificate, your personal
- back-up locking of the passenger doors,
identification documents and if possible, the
label bearing the key code.
- locking of the vehicle without the alarm Central locking not
The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the
being activated. functioning
key code and the transponder code required to Use these procedures in the following cases:
order a new key. - central locking fault,
- battery disconnected or discharged.
45
Access
In the event of a malfunction with the

Passenger doors Remote control problem –
central locking system, the battery must reinitialisation
be disconnected to lock the boot and thus
ensure that the vehicle is locked fully.
Driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock.
F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle
to unlock it, or towards the rear to lock it.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is not Following disconnection of the vehicle battery,
activated/deactivated when the vehicle is replacement of the remote control battery or
locked/unlocked. F Open the doors. in the event of a remote control malfunction,
Opening a door will trigger the alarm, F For the rear doors, check that the child lock you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your
which can be stopped by switching the is not on. vehicle.
ignition on. F Insert the key into the latch on the edge of
F Place the mechanical key (integral with the
the door and turn it an eighth of a turn to
remote control) in the lock to unlock your
the right, for the right-hand side, and to the
vehicle.
left, for the left-hand side. The locking is
F Place the electronic key in the reader.
effective when the slot is horizontal.
F Switch on the ignition by pressing "START/
F Close the doors and check from the outside
STOP".
that the vehicle is locked.
The electronic key is fully operational again.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
possible.
46
Access
Changing the battery Doors Boot

Opening Opening the tailgate
From outside
F After unlocking the vehicle or with the
electronic key of the Keyless Entry and
Using the electronic key/remote
control
F Press and hold this button to
2
Starting system in the recognition zone, pull release the tailgate. If the vehicle
the door handle. was locked, this action unlocks
the vehicle beforehand.
From inside F Raise the tailgate.
F Pull the interior opening control of a front

Battery ref.: CR2032/3 volts.
door; this unlocks the vehicle completely.
Battery replacement is signalled by the display When selective unlocking is activated, the
of a message. electronic key must be close to the rear of
F Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver
at the cutout.
Closing the vehicle.
F Remove the cover. When a door is not closed correctly:

F Remove the discharged battery from its - engine running, this warning
housing. lamp and a message appear
With the tailgate opening control
F Place the new battery into its location in the instrument panel (digital
observing the original direction. monochrome) for a few seconds,
F Clip the cover onto the casing. - vehicle moving (speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
Do not throw the remote control
lamp and a message appear
batteries away, they contain metals
in the instrument panel (digital
which are harmful to the environment.
monochrome and 12 inch colour)
Take them to an approved collection
for a few seconds, accompanied
point.
by an audible signal.
47
Access
F With the vehicle unlocked or with the The motorised tailgate must only be operated
In the event of a fault or difficulties felt in
electronic key of the "Keyless Entry and with the vehicle stationary.
manoeuvring the tailgate when opening
Starting" system in the coverage zone, Check that there is enough space to allow for
or closing it, have it quickly checked
press control A on the tailgate. the movement of the motorised tailgate.
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
F Raise the tailgate.
workshop to stop this issue getting worse
and so as to not cause the tailgate to drop,
and serious injuries.
The tailgate is not designed to support
a bicycle carrier.
Closing the tailgate Motorised tailgate

F Lower the tailgate using the interior grips. General points
F Release the grips and press down on the
The motorised operation of the tailgate can
outside of the tailgate to close it.
be activated or deactivated by selecting
If the tailgate is not properly closed:
"Motorised tailgate" in the Driving menu of Never introduce a finger in the locking
the touch screen. system of the motorised tailgate – Risk of
- engine running, this warning a serious injury!
lamp and a message appear
in the instrument panel (digital
monochrome) for a few seconds,
Safety anti-pinch
- vehicle moving (speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning The motorised tailgate has an obstacle
lamp and a message appear detection system that automatically interrupts
in the instrument panel (digital and reverses its movement by a few degrees to
monochrome and 12 inch colour) allow the obstacle to be cleared.
for a few seconds, accompanied Please note that this anti-pinch system is not
by an audible signal. active at the end of the closing travel (around
1 cm from completely closed).
48
Access
To avoid the risk of injury through pinching Motorised opening

or trapping, before and during operation of
Tailgate opening using the
2
the motorised tailgate:
- ensure that there is no person close to
electronic key/remote control (A)
the rear of the vehicle, F Hold the remote control button
- monitor the activity of your rear down for several seconds.
passengers, particularly any children.
or
Tailgate opening using the

Bicycle carrier/Towing device "Keyless Entry and Starting"
The motorised tailgate is not designed to system (B)
support a bicycle carrier. F Press control B on the tailgate with the
When installing a bicycle carrier on a towing electronic key within the coverage zone.
device with connection of a cable to the towing
socket, the motorised operation of the tailgate
- using the electronic key of the Keyless Entry
will be automatically deactivated.
and Starting system (A), When selective locking is activated, the
If using a towing device or bicycle carrier
- using the exterior tailgate control (B), electronic key must be close to the rear of
not approved by CITROËN, it is essential
- using the interior tailgate control (C), the vehicle.
to deactivate the motorised operation of the
- with a kicking movement, if your vehicle has
tailgate.
the hands-free function.
For more information on the Hands-free Opening the tailgate
Operation tailgate, refer to the corresponding section.
F After the vehicle is fully unlocked, press
There are several ways of operating the control B on the tailgate.
motorised tailgate: The command is confirmed by an audible beep.
By default, the tailgate opens fully or to the

stored position.
49
Access
Motorised closing To cancel the memorised position:

Repeated opening and closing of the
- stop the tailgate in an intermediate position,
motorised tailgate can cause overheating
There are two options: - press button C or the exterior control B for
of its electric motor, after which opening
F Press and release the exterior control B. more than 3 seconds.
and closing will not be possible.
or Cancellation of the memorised position is
Allow the motor to cool down for ten
confirmed by an audible signal.
minutes before operating the tailgate
F Press button C and release it. again.
If you are unable to wait, operate it Manual operation
manually.
The motorised tailgate can be opened and
closed manually, even if motorised operation is
The motorised tailgate has a safety anti- Detection of obstacles activated.
pinch feature which interrupts the closing However, any manual operation must be done
If an obstacle (person or object) is
movement if there is something in the way. with the tailgate first stopped.
encountered, the anti-pinch system stops the
During manual operations to open or close
closing movement and raises the tailgate by
the motorised tailgate, you will no longer be
a few centimetres to clear the obstacle.
At any point, it is possible to interrupt the assisted by the struts. Resistance to opening
operation of the tailgate: and closing is therefore entirely normal.
- by pressing one of these Memorising an opening
two buttons,
or
position
Reinitialising the motorised
- by pressing the exterior
control B.
Where height is restricted (garage with a low tailgate
ceiling, etc.) it is possible to limit the opening
angle of the motorised tailgate. This operation is necessary where there is no
After a movement is interrupted, pressing This memorisation is done as follows: movement – after detection of an obstacle,
one of the controls again restarts the - open the tailgate to the desired position, reconnecting or recharging the battery, etc.
movement, unless you press the remote - press button C or the exterior control B for F Open the tailgate manually, if necessary.
control button, which only controls more than 3 seconds. F Fully close the tailgate manually.
opening. Memorisation of the maximum opening position If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN
of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal. dealer or qualified workshop.
50
Access
Precautions in use Unlocking "Hands-free" opening
2
In wintry conditions
In the event of an accumulation of snow
on the tailgate, clear the snow before
commanding a motorised opening of the
tailgate.
The formation of ice can block the tailgate
and prevent its opening: wait until the ice
melts with the heating of the passenger
compartment. F Fold the rear seats to gain access to the
lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
When washing
lock to unlock the boot. F If your hands are full, with the remote
When washing the vehicle in an automatic control on you in the recognition zone A,
F Move the latch to the left.
car wash, lock your vehicle to avoid the make a kicking movement with your foot
risk of unexpected opening. below the rear bumper.
Locking after closing Flashing of the direction indicator lamps and
a beeping sound confirm the request.
If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
The tailgate opens to the stored position.
will remain locked.
Back-up control
To manually unlock the boot in the event of
a battery or central locking failure.
Hands-free tailgate Making another kicking movement with your
To enable you to open or close the tailgate foot below the bumper while the tailgate is
while your hands are full, the motorised tailgate opening interrupts the movement. A third kicking
may be fitted with the hands-free function. movement reverses the direction of movement.
For more information on the Motorised
tailgate, refer to the corresponding section.
If the vehicle is locked, it unlocks before
the tailgate opens.
51
Access
Automatic locking - you are washing your vehicle,

Ensure that you are steady on your feet
- your vehicle is being serviced,
before making the kicking movement
To lock the vehicle when the tailgate closes - you are accessing the spare wheel
below the rear bumper.
using a kicking movement, activate "Hands- (depending on version).
Take care not to touch the exhaust
free tailgate access self-locking" in the To avoid such operating problems, keep the
system, which may be hot – Risk of burns!
Driving menu of the touch screen. electronic key away from the recognition zone
or deactivate the Hands-Free Tailgate Access
function.
Recommendations related
"Hands-free" closing to the Hands-Free Tailgate
After installing a towing device, it is
F If your hands are full, with the remote
Access function essential to contact a CITROËN dealer
control on you in the recognition zone A, If several kicking movements to operate the or a qualified workshop so that it is taken
make a kicking movement with your foot tailgate have no effect, wait a few seconds into account by the detection system.
below the rear bumper. before trying again. Otherwise, there is a risk of malfunction of
Flashing of the direction indicator lamps and If it does not work, check that the electronic key the Hands-Free Tailgate Access function.
a beeping sound confirm the request. is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic
interference (e.g. smartphone).
Making another kicking movement with your
The function may be deactivated or affected if Ensure that no object or person might
foot below the bumper while the tailgate is
there is rain or snow. prevent the correct opening or closing of
closing interrupts the movement. A third kicking
The function may not work correctly with the tailgate.
movement reverses the direction of movement.
a prosthetic leg. Be particularly aware of children when
operating the tailgate.
In some circumstances, the tailgate may open
Deactivation or close by itself, particularly if:
- you hitch or unhitch a trailer,
By default, hands-free access is activated. - you fit or remove a bicycle carrier,
This function can be activated or deactivated - you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle
by selecting "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" in carrier,
the Driving menu of the touch screen. - you place or lift something behind the
vehicle,
- an animal approaches the rear bumper,
52
Access
Alarm For all work on the alarm system,

Deactivation
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified F Press one of the remote control unlocking
2
workshop. buttons.
Short press
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system
Long press
Activation
System which protects and provides a deterrent F Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.
against theft and break-ins. It provides the F Lock the vehicle using the or
following types of monitoring: remote control. F Unlock the vehicle with the "Keyless Entry
- Exterior perimeter:
and Starting" system.
The system checks whether the vehicle is
The monitoring system is deactivated: the
opened. The alarm is triggered if anyone or
indicator lamp for the button goes off and the
tries to open a door, the boot or the bonnet. F Lock the vehicle using the "Keyless Entry
direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
- Interior volumetric: and Starting" system.
The system checks for any variation in the
The monitoring system is active: the indicator
volume in the passenger compartment.
lamp for the button flashes once per second When the vehicle automatically locks itself
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks
and the direction indicators come on for about again (as happens if a door or boot is not
a window, enters the passenger
2 seconds. opened within 30 seconds of unlocking),
compartment or moves inside the vehicle.
After an instruction to lock the vehicle using the monitoring system is automatically
the remote control or the "Keyless Entry reactivated.
and Starting" system, the exterior perimeter
Self-protection function: the system monitoring is activated after 5 seconds, the
checks for the putting out of service of its interior volumetric monitoring after 45 seconds. Locking the vehicle
own components. The alarm is triggered
if the siren's battery, button or wiring is If an opening (door, boot, bonnet, etc.) is
with exterior perimeter
disconnected or damaged. incorrectly closed, the vehicle is not locked monitoring only
but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring
activated after 45 seconds at the same time as to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in
the interior volumetric monitoring. certain cases such as:
- leaving a pet in the vehicle,
53
Access
- leaving a window partially open, The indicator lamp for the button goes off. Locking the vehicle without
- washing your vehicle, F Reactivate the full alarm system by locking
- changing a wheel, the vehicle using the remote control or the
activating the alarm
- having your vehicle towed, "Keyless Entry and Starting" system. F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
- transport by ship. The indicator lamp for the button flashes once (integral to the remote control) in the driver's
per second again. door lock.
Deactivating the interior
volumetric monitoring Triggering of the alarm Operating fault
F Switch off the ignition and within ten This results in sounding the siren and flashing When the ignition is switched on, fixed
seconds, press the alarm button until the the direction indicators for thirty seconds. illumination of the indicator lamp for the button
indicator lamp is on continuously. The monitoring functions remain active until indicates a fault with the system.
F Get out of the vehicle. the alarm has been triggered eleven times in Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
F Immediately lock the vehicle using the succession. a qualified workshop.
remote control or the "Keyless Entry and When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
Starting" system. control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting"
The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp Automatic activation
activated: the indicator lamp for the button for the button informs you that the alarm was
flashes once per second. (Depending on the country where the product
triggered during your absence. When the
To take effect, this deactivation must be carried is sold.)
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
out each time the ignition is switched off. immediately. The system is activated automatically 2 minutes
after the last door or the boot is closed.
Reactivating the interior F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering
volumetric monitoring Failure of the remote the vehicle, first press the unlocking button
control on the remote control or unlock the vehicle
F Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring using the "Keyless Entry and Starting"
by unlocking the vehicle using the remote To deactivate the monitoring functions: system.
control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" F Unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to
system. the remote control) in the driver's door lock,
F Open the door; this sets off the alarm.
F Upon switching on the ignition the alarm
stops. The indicator lamp for the button
goes off.
54
Access
The electric window switches remain The indicator lamp in the button comes on,
Electric windows operational for approximately 45 seconds after accompanied by a message confirming
switching off the ignition. activation. It remains on, as long as the
2
Once this time has elapsed, the electric deactivation is in place.
windows will not operate. To reactivate them, Use of the rear electric windows from the
switch the ignition on again. driver's controls remains possible.
Safety anti-pinch Reinitialisation of the

1. Left-hand front.
When the window rises and meets an obstacle, electric windows
2. Right-hand front. it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
3. Right-hand rear. Following reconnection of the battery, the anti-
In the event of unwanted opening of the
4. Left-hand rear. pinch safety function must be reinitialised.
window on closing, press the switch until the
The anti-pinch safety function is not active
5. Deactivate the electric window switches window opens completely, then pull the switch
during these operations:
located at the rear seats. immediately until the window closes. Continue
For each window:
to hold the switch for approximately one second
- Lower the window fully, then raise it, it will
after the window has closed.
rise in steps of a few centimetres each time
The anti-pinch safety function is not active
Manual operation during this system activation operation.
the control is pressed. Repeat the operation
until the window closes completely,
To open or close the window, press or pull the - Continue to pull the switch for at least one
switch gently. The window stops as soon as the second after reaching the window closed
control is released. position.
Automatic operation Deactivating the rear

controls for the rear
To open or close the window, press or pull windows
switch fully: the window opens or closes
completely when the switch is released. For the safety of your children, press
Pressing the switch again stops the movement switch 5 to prevent operation of the
of the window. rear windows irrespective of their
positions.
55
Access
In the event of contact (pinching) during

operation of the windows, you must
reverse the movement of the window. To
do this, press the switch concerned.
When operating the passenger electric
window switches, the driver must ensure
that nothing is preventing correct closing
of the windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows.
Be aware of passengers or other persons
present when closing the windows using
the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry
and Starting" system.
56
Ease of use and comfort
Front seats Before moving the seat backwards,

Seat cushion height
ensure that there is nothing that might
Correct driving position prevent the full travel of the seat.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
passengers if present in the rear seats
For safety reasons, seat adjustments or jamming the seat if large objects are
3
must only be made when the vehicle is placed on the floor behind the seat.
stationary.
Before taking to the road and to make the most of the

ergonomic layout of the instruments and controls,
Manual adjustments
carry out these adjustments in the following order: F Pull the control upwards to raise or push
Longitudinal
- the height of the head restraint, it downwards to lower, as many times as
- the seat backrest angle, necessary to obtain the position required.
- the seat cushion height,
- the longitudinal position of the seat,
- the height and reach of the steering wheel,
- the rear view mirror and door mirrors.
Driver seat backrest angle
F Raise the control and slide the seat

forwards or backwards.
When your seat is at the correct distance, move
it forwards and backwards slightly without
using the control bar to ensure the seat is
properly locked.
F Turn the knob to adjust the backrest.
Once these adjustments have been made,
check that the instrument panel can be
viewed correctly from your driving position.
57
Passenger seat backrest angle Table position for the front Electric adjustments
passenger seat backrest
To avoid discharging the battery, carry out
these adjustments with the engine running.
Longitudinal (driver seat)
F Pull the control upwards or turn the knob to

adjust the backrest.
When the backrest is correctly inclined, release Check that no object, either on or
the control. underneath the seat, could hinder its
movement.
F Push the control forwards or backwards to
To prevent the backrest from suddenly slide the seat.
F Place the head restraint in the low position,
folding forwards and hitting you, hold the
raise the armrest and fold the tray on the
backrest with your back or hand while you
back of the seat. Backrest angle
move the control.
F Pull the control fully up and tip the backrest
forwards.
To return to the normal position, guide the
backrest backwards until it locks into place.
This position, together with that of the rear
seats, allows you to transport long objects
inside the vehicle.
In this position, the backrest can support

a maximum load of 30 kg. F Tilt the control forwards or backwards to
adjust the angle of the seat backrest.
58
Cushion height and angle Two positions can be stored and recalled, using Additional adjustments
the buttons on the side of the driver's seat.
Head restraint height
Storing a position using buttons
M/1/2
F Switch on the ignition.
3
F Adjust your seat.
F Press button M, then press button 1 or
2 within four seconds.
An audible signal indicates that the position has
been stored. F To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
F Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or
Storing a new position overwrites the previous F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A
downwards to obtain the required height.
position. and push down on the head restraint at the
F Tilt the front part of the control upwards or
same time.
downwards to obtain the desired angle.
Recalling a stored position The head restraint has a frame with notches
which prevents it from lowering; this is a safety
F With the ignition on or the engine device in case of impact.
running, press button 1 or 2 to recall the
Storing driving positions corresponding position. The adjustment is correct when the
An audible signal indicates the completion of upper edge of the head restraint is
the adjustment. level with the top of the head.
You can interrupt the current movement by
pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the
seat controls. Removing a head restraint
A stored position cannot be recalled while
driving. F To remove the head restraint, press the lug
Recalling stored positions is deactivated A and pull the head restraint upwards.
45 seconds after switching off the ignition. F To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in the
openings, keeping them in line with the seat
backrest and press the lug A at the same
System which registers the electrical settings time.
of the driver's seat.
59
Relax head restraints Massage function Electric leg rest

Activation/Deactivation Passenger seat with manual adjustments
Depending on the version, you can fold the

sides for greater comfort.
F Press this button.
Never drive with the head restraints Its indicator lamp comes on and the F Press the front or rear part of the control to
removed; they must be fitted and correctly massage function is activated for unfold or fold the leg rest.
adjusted. a period of 1 hour. The movement stops when your release the
During this time, massage is performed in control.
Electric lumbar adjustment 6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage
followed by 4 minutes of break).
After one hour the function is deactivated, the Electric passenger seat
indicator lamp goes off.
Deactivate the massage function by pressing
this button, its indicator lamp goes off.
This function provides a lumbar massage to the
occupants in front; it only operates when the
engine is running as well as in STOP mode of
the Stop & Start system.
Adjustment of intensity
F Press the control to obtain the desired Press this button to choose one of
lumbar support. the two available levels of massage
intensity.
60
F Push the control forwards or rearwards to

Do not use the function when the seat Prolonged use at the highest setting is
unfold or fold the leg rest.
is not occupied. not recommended for those with sensitive
The movement stops when your release the
Reduce the intensity of the heating as skin.
control.
soon as possible. There is a risk of burns for people whose
When the seat and passenger perception of heat is impaired (illness,
compartment have reached an taking medication, for example).
3
Prior to handling the leg rest, make sure adequate temperature, you can stop There is a risk of overheating the system if
that nothing obstructs the movement. the function; reducing the consumption material with insulating properties is used,
of electrical current reduces fuel such as cushions or seat covers.
consumption. Do not use the function:
- if wearing damp clothing,
Heated seats - if child seats are fitted.
To avoid breaking the heating element in
the seat:
- do not place heavy objects on the seat,
- do not kneel or stand on the seat,
- do not place sharp objects on the seat,
- do not spill liquids onto the seat.
To avoid the risk of short-circuit:
- do not use liquid products for cleaning
the seat,
- never use the heating function when
the seat is damp.
F Use the adjustment wheel to switch on and
select the level of heating required:
0: Off.
1: Low.
2: Medium.
3: High.
With the engine running, the front seats can be

heated separately.
61
Front armrest A. Longitudinal adjustment: lift the lever.

B. Tilt angle adjustment: pull the strap and
Height adjustment push the seat back.
C. Folding the seat: give a firm upward pull
on the strap to unlock the seat.
D. Folding the seat from the back: pull the
strap then push the backrest forward.
Longitudinal adjustment
F Lower the armrest completely.

F Lift it again to the desired position (low,
intermediate or high).
F Once it is in the high position, lift it to unlock
it and bring it to the low position.
Second row seats

The 3 seats of the 2nd row are independent
and are the same width. Their backrests are F Lift lever A, at the front of the seat cushion
adjustable to adapt the boot load space. and adjust the seat as required.
62
"Comfort" position Rear head restraints Relax head restraints
3
The rear head restraints are removable and
Depending on the version, you can fold the
have two positions:
sides to obtain a better comfortable position.
F Pull strap B and push the seat back. - high, the position for use,
The backrest tilts and the cushion rotates - low, the position for storage.
slightly. To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards. Never drive with the head restraints
To lower it, press the lug A then push the head removed; they must be fitted and correctly
Returning the seat to its initial restraint downwards. adjusted.
position To remove it:
F Pull strap B and push the seat forward. - move the head restraint to the high position, Flat floor
- press the lug A while pulling the head
restraint upwards.
To replace it:
- engage the head restraint rods in the
Do not allow children to operate the apertures, keeping the head restraint in line
Each seat folds down to the floor to adapt the
seats unsupervised. with the seat backrest.
boot volume as required.
Folding the seat

F Place the seats in the maximum rearwards
longitudinal position.
63
From outside the vehicle You can fold the second row seat(s) directly
Before performing any operations on the
from the boot, after having first folded the third
rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat
row seats.
belts, make sure that the side belts are
F Pull strap D to unlock the desired seat and
properly tensioned. The central seat belt
give the backrest a slight push forward. To
must be put away. Secure the buckles
prevent any damage to the mechanism,
of the three seat belts to their anchoring
strap D will unclip if excessive force is
points.
applied. It is just a matter of clipping it back
into place to make the system operational
again.
Continuity panels
F Give a firm upward pull on strap C, as Replacing the seat

shown by the arrow, to unlock the seat;
keep pulling the strap until the seat is
completely folded. Push the backrest
slightly forward so that the backrest tilts
and folds over the cushion. The seat and
cushion fold down to the floor.
From the boot, for example when loading Each seat has a continuity panel at the bottom
of the backrest, which, once unfolded:
- allows for a continuous loading surface in
the boot, whatever the position of the seats,
F If necessary, straighten the continuity - prevents objects from sliding beneath the
panels of the 2nd row of seats and lock 2nd row seats.
them.
F Raise the backrest and push it back until it
latches into place.
These continuity panels are not designed

to support a weight greater than 30 kg.
64
Unlocking/Locking the continuity panels Replacing the seat from

Before moving the seats, make sure that
F Before unfolding the continuity panels,
check that the 2nd row seats are moved
the trays behind the front row seats are outside the vehicle, with
back as far as possible.
properly stowed. door open
F Slide the latch of the continuity panel If passengers are seated in the third row seats:
upwards to unlock it. F Pull lever E. The seat unlocks and the
F Straighten out the continuity panel, then cushion comes up against the backrest.
3
F manually push the seat and cushion back as
slide the latch downwards to lock it. F Keep lever E up by pushing it forwards. The
far as it can go; the seat does not return to
seat and cushion slide towards the front
the maximum back position, leaving space
seat.
free for the third row passengers' legs,
This frees space behind the seat, allowing
F fold the cushion until it locks.
the third row seat passengers to get into their
seats.
Make sure there is nothing on or under the
Access to third row seats
cushion of the seat you want to move.
Getting out of the vehicle

from third row seats If this system fails (lever E), the third row
passengers can also get out after having
Third row seats are accessed via the second
folded the backrest of the second row
row lateral seats.
seats using strap D.
Do not let children operate the seats
unsupervised.
Third row seats

Concertina boards
The two rigid concertina boards, which are built
F Lift lever E. The seat unlocks and the
in to the vehicle, cover the two third row seats,
cushion moves up to the backrest.
when these are in the folded away position.
F Push the backrest holding lever E upwards.
65
Each of the two boards can support Installing the seats Seat storage
a maximum load of 100 kg.
Folding the concertina

boards
F Remove the load space cover. F Straighten the continuity panels of the
For more information on the Interior second row of seats and lock them in place.
fittings and particularly on the load space F Lower the head restraints.
Pull the strap, the 3 parts of the board fold into cover, refer to the corresponding section. F Correctly position the concertina board
concertina form. F Straighten the continuity panels of the vertically behind the seat.
When the third row seats are straightened, second row of seats and lock them in place. F Make sure that the seat belts of the 3rd row
these folded concertina boards can be left: F Fold the concertina board and straighten it of seats are correctly fastened to the loops
- either flat behind the seats, vertically. and that they do not have any creases.
- or in the vertical position, F Pull strap F, located behind the backrest F Pull strap G, located at the bottom of the
thus clearing the inside of the seat as a storage of the seat. The backrest tilts backwards backrest of the seat. The seat is unlocked.
space. bringing the cushion. The seat locks in the F Then, push the backrest slightly forwards.
open position. The backrest tilts and folds on the cushion.
The folded seat is arranged at the back of
its storage area provided for this purpose.
F Put the concertina boards back above the
folded down seats.
66
Before working on the seats of the third

row, straighten the rigid boards of the
seats of the second row and lock them in
place.
Do not try to fold a seat in the third row
without having opened it until the backrest 4 seats 6 seats
3
is fully locked.
Do not leave objects on the cushion or
below the cushion of the seats of the third
row, when you fold them.
Do not guide strap G when storing the
seat, your may jam your fingers.
Do not let children manipulate the seats 3 seats Transporting items
unsupervised.
Seat modular design and

configuration Transporting items 5 seats
Configuration examples
Configuration examples
4 seats
5 seats
7 seats
67
In order to easily adapt your interior Mirrors Adjustment

space, you can fold all of the rear seats
individually and fold them onto the second Door mirrors
row floor, and beneath the floor on the
third row. This gives you a continuous load
floor up to the back of the front seats.
Folding or unfolding the seats must only
be done with the vehicle stationary. F Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror.
F Move control B in any of the four directions
to adjust.
F Return control A to the central position.
Steering wheel adjustment
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
for overtaking or parking.
be adjusted to reduce the blind spots.
They can also be folded for parking in narrow
Objects seen in the mirror are in reality
spaces.
closer than they appear.
Take this into account when assessing
the distance of vehicles approaching from
Demisting – Defrosting behind.
Demisting-defrosting of the door
F When stationary, pull the control lever mirrors operates with the engine
to release the steering wheel adjustment running, by switching on the heated Folding
mechanism. rear screen.
F Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving F From outside: lock the vehicle using the
position. electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and
F Push the control lever to lock the steering wheel. Starting" system.
For more information on Rear screen
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull
As a safety measure, these adjustments demist - defrost, refer to the associated
the control A from the central position
should only be carried out with the vehicle section.
rearwards.
stationary.
68
They return to their initial position: F Push the lever to change to the normal
If the mirrors are folded using control A,
- a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear, "day" position.
they will not unfold when the vehicle is
- once the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph
unlocked. Pull again on control A.
(10 km/h),
Automatic "electrochrome" model
- on switching off the engine.
This function can be activated/deactivated in
3
Unfolding the Driving menu of the touch screen.
F Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then
F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the "Comfort" and "Mirror adaptation in
electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and reverse".
Starting" system.
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull
the control A from the central position
Rear view mirror
rearwards. Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the This system automatically and progressively
The folding and unfolding of the door nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, changes between day and night use by means
mirrors using the remote control can be headlamps from other vehicles, etc. of a sensor measuring the light coming from the
deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or rear of the vehicle.
a qualified workshop.
Manual model
In order to ensure optimum visibility during
your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens
If necessary, the mirrors can be folded automatically when reverse gear is
manually. engaged.
Child surveillance mirror

Automatic tilting in reverse gear
System which provides a view of the ground
during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear. Adjustment
With the engine running, on engaging reverse F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards. directed correctly in the "day" position.
Day/night position
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position.
69
A child surveillance mirror is installed above the Control panel 2. Front quarter window demisting/defrosting
interior mirror. This allows you to keep watch vents.
over the passengers in the back of the vehicle The controls of this system are accessible in the 3. Front side window demisting/defrosting
and facilitates discussion between passengers Air conditioning menu of the touch screen A. vents.
in the front and the back without needing to The demisting/defrosting controls for the Adjustable and closable side air vents.
adjust the mirror and without turning around. It windscreen and rear screen are located to the 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents.
can be easily folded to avoid dazzle. left of the touch screen. 5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
6. Side vents of the 2nd row.
Ventilation 7. Air outlets to the rear footwells of the
second row.
Air distribution
Air intake 8. Sunshine sensor.
The air circulating in the passenger

compartment is filtered and originates either
from the outside via the grille located at the
base of the windscreen, or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.
Air treatment
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by the
driver:
- direct arrival in the passenger compartment
(air intake),
- passage through a heating circuit (heating),
- passage through a cooling circuit (air
conditioning).
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.
70
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning If after an extended stop in sunshine,
the interior temperature is very high,
In order for these systems to be fully F To ensure correct operation of the first air the passenger compartment for
effective, follow the operation and air conditioning system, you are also a few moments.
maintenance guidelines below: advised to have it checked regularly as Put the air flow control at a setting high
F To ensure that the air is distributed recommended in the Maintenance and enough to quickly change the air in the
3
evenly, keep the external air intake Warranty Guide. passenger compartment.
grilles at the base of the windscreen, the F If the system does not produce cold air,
nozzles, the vents, the air outlets and switch it off and contact a CITROËN
the air extractor in the boot free from dealer or a qualified workshop. The condensation created by the air
obstructions. When towing the maximum load on a steep conditioning results in a discharge of water
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, gradient in high temperatures, switching off under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.
located on the dashboard; this is used the air conditioning increases the available
for regulation of the automatic air engine power and so improves the towing
conditioning system. ability. Stop & Start
F Operate the air conditioning system for To avoid the windows misting up and The heating and air conditioning systems
at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice deterioration in the quality of the air: only work when the engine is running.
a month to keep it in perfect working - do not drive for too long with the To maintain a comfortable temperature
order. ventilation switched off. in the passenger compartment, you may
F Ensure that the passenger compartment - do not keep air recirculation set for an temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start
filter is in good condition and have the extended period. system.
filter elements replaced regularly. We For more information on Stop & Start,
recommend the use of a combined refer to the corresponding section.
passenger compartment filter. Thanks to
its special active additive, it contributes
to the purification of the air breathed by
the occupants and the cleanliness of
the passenger compartment (reduction
of allergic symptoms, bad odours and
greasy deposits).
71
Air flow adjustment Illumination of the button indicates the

Heating presence of pulsed air in the specified
The heating only operates when the engine is F Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to direction.
running. decrease or increase the speed of the air For a uniform distribution of air in the
Press the Air conditioning menu button to booster fan. passenger compartment, the three buttons can
display the system controls page. be activated simultaneously.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
progressively as the speed of the fan is
increased. Air intake/Air recirculation
By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are
For more information on Recirculation of
stopping ventilation.
interior air, refer to the corresponding section.
Avoid driving for too long without

ventilation – risk of misting and Dual-zone temperature-
deterioration of air quality! regulated manual air
conditioning
The manual air conditioning operates with the
1. Temperature adjustment.
Air distribution adjustment engine running.
2. Air flow adjustment. The temperature at the nozzles and vents
3. Air distribution adjustment. You can vary the air distribution in the is regulated by the system according to the
4. Air intake/Air recirculation. passenger compartment using the buttons 3. temperature in the passenger compartment
and the temperature setting.
Windscreen. Press the Air conditioning menu button to
Temperature adjustment display the system controls page.
F Press one of the arrows 1, or move the

Footwells.
slider from blue (cold) to red (hot) to adjust
the temperature to your liking.
Central and side vents.
72
Air flow adjustment For a uniform distribution of air in the

passenger compartment, the three buttons can
F Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to be activated simultaneously.
decrease or increase the speed of the air
booster fan.
Air intake/Air recirculation
3
progressively as the speed of the fan is For more information on Recirculation of
increased. interior air, refer to the corresponding section.
By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are
stopping ventilation.
1. Temperature adjustment on driver/ Air conditioning on/off
passenger side. Avoid driving for too long without
ventilation – risk of misting and The air conditioning is designed to operate
2. Air flow adjustment.
deterioration of air quality! effectively in all seasons, with the windows
3. Air distribution adjustment. closed.
4. Air intake/Air recirculation. It enables you to:
5. Air conditioning on/off. - lower the temperature, in summer,
Air distribution adjustment - increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3°C.
Temperature adjustment You can vary the air distribution in the
F Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air
passenger compartment using the buttons 3.
The driver and front passenger can each set conditioning system.
the temperature independently of one another. Windscreen. When the indicator lamp is on, the air
conditioning function is activated.
F Press one of the arrows 1 to decrease (blue)
or increase (red) the value. Footwells.
The air conditioning does not operate when
The value indicated corresponds to a level of
the air flow adjustment is inhibited.
comfort and not to a precise temperature. Central and side vents. To obtain cool air more quickly, you can
It is recommended that you avoid a difference
use recirculation of the interior air for a few
of more than 3 in the settings for left and right.
moments. Then return to the intake of
Illumination of the button indicates the presence exterior air.
of pulsed air in the specified direction. Switching off the air conditioning may result
in some discomfort (humidity, condensation).
73
Dual-zone automatic air Temperature adjustment Air distribution adjustment

conditioning The driver and front passenger can each set You can vary the air distribution in the
the temperature independently of one another. passenger compartment using the buttons 3.
The air conditioning operates with the engine
running, but the ventilation and its controls are F Press one of the arrows 1 to decrease (blue)
available with the ignition on. or increase (red) the value. Windscreen.
Operation of the air conditioning and regulation
of temperature, air flow and air distribution in The value indicated corresponds to a level of
the passenger compartment are automatic. comfort and not to a precise temperature. Footwells.
It is recommended that you avoid a difference
Press the button for the Air Conditioning
of more than 3 in the settings for left and right.
menu to display the page of controls for the air
conditioning system. Central and side vents.
Air flow adjustment Illumination of the button indicates the

F Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to presence of pulsed air in the specified
decrease or increase the speed of the fan. direction.
In AUTO mode, the three buttons are off.
progressively as the speed of the fan is
increased.
Air intake/Air recirculation
By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are For more information on Recirculation of
stopping ventilation. interior air, refer to the corresponding section.
1. Temperature adjustment on driver/ "- - -" is displayed.
passenger side.
2. Air flow adjustment.
Air conditioning on/off
Avoid driving too long without ventilation
3. Air distribution adjustment. – risk of misting and deterioration of air The air conditioning is designed to operate
4. Air intake/Air recirculation. quality! effectively in all seasons, with the windows
5. Air conditioning on/off. closed.
6. Automatic mode. It enables you to:
7. Mono function. - lower the temperature, in summer,
8. Access to the secondary page.
74
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting F To change the current setting, You can always choose to change a setting
in winter, above 3°C. press the button several times manually. In this case, the automatic comfort
Mode AUTO
in succession to access the programme is deactivated.
F Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air
desired mode: F Press the "AUTO" button 6 to activate the
conditioning system.
"Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by automatic comfort programme again.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
limiting air flow.
3
conditioning function is activated.
"Normal": offers the best compromise between "Mono" function

The air conditioning does not operate when a comfortable temperature and quiet operation The comfort setting for the passenger's side
the air flow adjustment is inhibited. (default setting). can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. (mono-zone).
use recirculation of the interior air for a few
moments. Then return to the intake of This setting is associated with AUTO mode F Press the button 7 to activate/deactivate the
exterior air. only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode, "Mono" function.
Switching off the air conditioning may result the last selected setting remains. The function is deactivated automatically when
in some discomfort (humidity, condensation). Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO the passenger uses their temperature setting
mode if deactivated. buttons.
Automatic comfort "Rear" function

In cold weather with the engine cold, the
programme
air flow is increased gradually until the This function gives rear passengers access to
F Press the "AUTO" button 6 to activate or comfort setting has been reached, in order the adjustment controls and enables:
deactivate the automatic mode of the air to limit the delivery of cold air into the - air conditioned air to be circulated by the 2nd
conditioning system. passenger compartment. row outlets,
The air conditioning system operates On entering the vehicle, if the interior - recirculated interior air to be circulated by
automatically: the system manages the temperature is much colder or warmer the 3rd row outlets,
temperature, air flow and air distribution in the than the comfort setting requested, there
passenger compartment in an optimum way is no need to alter the value displayed in From the secondary page of the Air
according to the comfort level you have selected. order to reach more quickly the required conditioning menu:
level of comfort. The system automatically
F Go to the secondary page by pressing F Press this button to activate/
corrects the temperature difference as
button 8 "OPTIONS" to adjust the automatic deactivate the "Rear" function.
quickly as possible.
comfort programme by choosing one of the
available settings.
75
Settings for passengers in the Settings for passengers in the This function does not activate the air
2nd row third row conditioning.
You can make use of the residual heat in the
engine to warm the passenger compartment
using the temperature setting buttons.
Recirculation of interior air

The intake of exterior air helps avoid and
eliminate misting of the windscreen and side
windows.
Recirculation of the interior air isolates the
passenger compartment from exterior odours
and fumes.
F Press on the vent's shutter. When required, this function can also be
F Adjust the air flow of both vents using the used to speed up the heating or cooling of
dial with four positions (off, low, medium, the passenger compartment.
F Turn the top dial to open or close the rear
vent. high).
F Direct the vent by turning the shutter. F Press button 4 to recirculate the interior air
F Turn the lower dial to decrease (to the left)
or to permit the intake of outside air.
or increase (to the right) the air flow.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
Ventilation with ignition on recirculation function is activated, the intake of
function exterior air is inhibited.
With the ignition on, you can use the ventilation
system and access the Air conditioning menu
Avoid the prolonged use of interior
to control the air flow and air distribution in the
air recirculation – Risk of misting and
passenger compartment.
deterioration of air quality!
This function is available for a few minutes,
depending on the state of charge of the battery
of your vehicle.
76
Front demist – defrost Rear screen demist – Rear screen demisting/defrosting can only
defrost be operated when the engine is running.
Fragrance diffuser
Diffuses a fragrance in the passenger
compartment from the central air vents. 3
Your diffuser is fitted with an empty
On/Off On/Off cartridge when your vehicle is delivered.
You therefore need to install a cartridge
F Press this button to demist or defrost the F Press this button to demist/defrost the rear before use.
windscreen and side windows as quickly as screen and, depending on version, the door
possible. The indicator lamp in the button mirrors. The indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
The system automatically manages the air
comes on. Flow adjustment
Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically
conditioning (depending on version), air
to prevent excessive electrical consumption.
flow and air intake, and provides optimum
distribution towards the windscreen and side F It is possible to stop the demisting/
windows. defrosting operation before it is switched off
automatically by pressing this button again.
F To switch off demisting/defrosting, press
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
this button again. The indicator lamp in the
button goes off.
Switch off the demisting/defrosting of
With Stop & Start, when demisting/ the rear screen and door mirrors as
defrosting has been activated, STOP soon as appropriate, as lower current
mode is not available. consumption results in reduced fuel F Turn button A to adjust (left to decrease,
consumption. right to increase) or stop (completely to the
left) the fragranced air flow.
The central vents must be open.
77
After installing or replacing the cartridge: Diffuser button

The average use per cartridge is 3 months
F put the diffuser back in its housing,
at the rate of one hour per day.
F turn it a quarter of a turn to the right.
Removing the diffuser
Replacing a cartridge
The diffuser button A is independent of the

cartridge. The cartridges are delivered without
the button A.
The diffuser button A can only be fixed into the
F Push button A by turning it a quarter turn central control panel with a cartridge.
completely to the end. Therefore always keep the button A and
F Remove the diffuser from the dashboard a cartridge.
F Replace your cartridge (see "Replacing Depending on the country, replacement
a cartridge"). cartridges are available online or from
The diffuser refill includes a cartridge B and its CITROËN dealers, as well as any qualified
sealed cover C. workshop.
Inserting the diffuser F Remove the protective film D. Storage is provided for the cartridges and
F Place the head of cartridge B on the diffuser covers in the glove box.
button A.
F Turn it a quarter turn to lock it on the button
and remove the cover.
F Insert the diffuser in its housing.
You can replace cartridges at any time and
keep the cartridges already started in their
original cover.
78
For safety reasons, only use the Front fittings 1.

2.
Sun visor.
Ticket holder.
cartridges designed for the system.
Retain the cartridge sealed covers which 3. Glove box.
serve as packaging if the cartridge is not 4. Central storage.
used. It includes the electric and audio sockets.
Never refill or disassemble the cartridges. 5. High console with closed storage box, low
3
Keep cartridges out of the reach of console or removable console.
children or pets. 6. Cup holder.
Avoid contact with the skin or eyes. 7. Door pockets.
In the event of ingestion, consult a doctor, 8. Storage compartment below the steering
showing them the product packaging or wheel.
label. (Vehicle documentation.)
Never install or remove a cartridge while
driving.
Sliding sun visors

Sliding window blinds
The sliding window blinds can protect you from

brightness and sunlight. They can be adjusted
manually.
F Slide the window blind to the required
position by pushing zone A.
79
Sun visor supports Glove box Portable console

The portable console is a removable storage
space fixed to the low centre console.
It includes a sliding flap, an open storage
compartment and two cup holders.
Taking out the portable console
The window blinds are extended via the sun

visor supports.
Fold the support downwards to avoid glare from
ahead.
In case of glare through the door windows,
release the support from its central fixing and
turn it to the side.
The supports are fitted with a locking system Depending on the equipment, it may include
on their central fixing when rolling up the a CD player.
window blind. To remove or replace the F To open the glove box, raise the handle.
F Pull the unlocking control located at the
support, it must be positioned vertically. It is illuminated when the lid is opened.
front of the console.
It is cooled by a ventilation nozzle that can be
F With one hand, lift the front part of the
closed manually.
console.
It is directly linked to your vehicle's air
Do not attach or hang heavy objects on F With the other hand, take the rear part to
conditioning system and is supplied with
the slide rail of the sun visor blinds. free the portable console.
fresh air whatever the setting required in the
passenger compartment.
The cooling of your glove box only functions If it is not fixed to its support, the portable
when the engine is running and the air console must be stored in the boot. It
conditioning is on. could turn into a projectile in the event of
sudden braking or serious impact.
80
Putting the portable console Deactivate the lighting by pressing the button
Connect only one device at a time to
back in place at the top.
the socket (no extension or multi-way
Depending on equipment, this may include:
connector).
- 1 x 230 V socket,
Connect only devices with class II
- 1 x 12 V socket,
insulation (shown on the device).
- 1 x USB port,
Do not use a device with a metal case
3
- 1 x JACK socket.
(electric shaver,etc.).
As a safety measure, when electrical
230 V/50 Hz socket consumption is high and when required by
the vehicle's electrical system (particular
weather conditions, electrical overload,
etc.), the current supply to the socket will be
F Perform the steps in reversed order. Check cut off; the green indicator lamp goes off.
AC 230V
that the console is properly locked. 50Hz 120W
12 V socket
Central storage
A 230 V/50 Hz socket (max. power: 120 W) is
fitted in the central storage.
To use the socket:
F open the central storage,
F check that the indicator lamp is on green,
F connect your multimedia or other electrical
device (telephone charger, laptop computer,
CD-DVD player, baby food warmer, etc.). F To connect a 12 V accessory (max. power:
This socket works with the engine running, as 120 W), lift the cover and connect a suitable
well as in STOP mode with Stop & Start. adaptor.
In the event of a fault with the socket, the green
indicator lamp flashes.
Do not exceed the maximum power rating
F Pull the handle and lower the lid to open the Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
of the socket (otherwise this could cause
central storage. a qualified workshop.
damage to your portable device).
It is illuminated when opened.
81
The connection of an electrical device USB port Mats

not approved by CITROËN, such as
a USB charger, may adversely affect the
Fitting
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio
reception or interference with displays in
the screens.
The USB port is located in the central storage.

It allows the connection of a portable device or
JACK socket
a USB memory stick.
It reads the audio files which are sent to your
audio system and played via the vehicle's
speakers.
You can manage these files using the steering
mounted or touch screen controls.
To connect a portable device so that you When the USB port is used, the portable
can listen to your music files via the vehicle's device charges automatically.
speakers. A message is displayed if the power drawn
The management of the files is done using your by the portable device exceeds the current
portable device. supplied by the vehicle. When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the
wallet attached.
For more information on Audio and
The other mats are simply placed on the
telematics and in particular the use of
carpet.
this equipment, refer to the corresponding
section.
82
Removing Storage boxes Storage compartment

below the steering wheel
To remove the mat on the driver's side: Depending on equipment, there are storage
F move the seat as far back as possible, boxes located under the front seats.
F unclip the fixings,
F remove the mat.
Opening
3
Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
F position the mat correctly,
F put on the fixings again by pressing,
F check that the mat is secured correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

- only use mats which are suited to the
fixings already present in the vehicle;
these fixings must be used,
- never fit one mat on top of another. F Lift the handle and lower the storage box
The use of mats not approved by cover.
CITROËN may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of the
cruise control/speed limiter. Do not place heavy objects in the storage
This storage below the steering wheel is used
The mats approved by CITROËN have two boxes.
to store the vehicle's on-board documentation.
fixings located below the seat.
83
Rear fittings For security reasons, these trays retract

downwards if excessive pressure is exerted.
Side blinds
Aircraft trays
Closed tray
Individual reading lamp
Fitted to the windows in row 2, they protect the

passenger compartment from the sun's rays.
F Pull the tab A and anchor the blind on the
Open tray hook B.
The reading lamps C may be integrated into Storage boxes

the backrests of the front seats, behind the
trays. They illuminate the top of the tray without
disturbing the other passengers.
They are only accessible when the tray is
lowered.
F Press the "On/Off" button to switch the
reading lamp on or off.
These trays, fixed to the back of the front

seats, includes a recessed cup holder A and
a retaining strap B.
There are two storage boxes located beneath
F Pull the tray to lower it. the rear passenger footwells.
F To fold the tray away, pull it up to the locking To open them, lift the cover by the notch.
latch.
84
12 V accessory socket Boot fittings Rear shelf
3
To remove the shelf:
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power: F release the two cords,
120 Watts), lift the cover and connect F gently lift the shelf, then remove it.
a suitable adaptor. There are several ways of storing it:
1. Rear shelf - either upright behind the front seats,
(see details opposite) - or flat on the bottom of the boot.
Do not exceed the maximum power rating
2. Hooks
of the socket (risk of damage to your
(see details opposite)
device).
3. Strap Hooks
4. Stowing rings
The connection of an electrical device 5. 12 V socket (max power: 120 Watts)
not approved by CITROËN, such as
a USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio
reception or interference with displays in
the screens.
These can be used to secure shopping bags.
85
Boot fittings Load space cover The mobile flap avoids interference with
the second row passengers when the
seats are in the "comfort" position.
In 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind

the second row seats, with the third row seats Removal
stored folded away.
In 7-seat configuration, it is stored behind the
third row seats.
Installation
1. Load space cover

2. Concertina boards
3. 12 V socket (max power: 120 Watts)
4. Armrest with cup holder and storage F Remove the guides of the roller from the
compartment rails in pillars B.
5. Storage area of the load space cover F Guide the roller as it reels in.
F Unlock the roller by pressing one of the
6. Open storage compartment
handles located at the ends of the roller
7. Low stowing rings
bracket.
F Position the left and right ends of the roller
in cut-outs A, with the mobile flap at the
front.
F Pull out the roller until it reaches the boot
pillars.
F Insert the guides of the roller into the rails in
pillars B.
86
Storage behind the 3rd row seats When sharp deceleration occurs, objects
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Front map reading lamps
placed on the load space cover can turn
into projectiles. 3. Rear courtesy lamp
4. Rear map reading lamps
3
Front – rear courtesy lamps
Courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy lamp
comes on gradually:
- when you unlock the vehicle,

- when the electronic key is removed from the
reader,
- when opening a door,
F Make sure that the 3rd row seats are folded. - when the remote control locking button is
F Fold the first two concertina boards. activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
F Position the roller in the space located It will only be possible to switch on the door
above the armrest, side by side, tilting it mirror spotlamps if the courtesy lamp is in this
slightly. position.
F Slide the roller to the stop position, until it It switches off gradually:
reaches the notches arranged at the back of - when the vehicle is locked,
the boot, with the two hinges facing down. - when the ignition is switched on,
F Unfold the third row seats. - 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
The folded concertina boards can be placed in
the horizontal or upright position.
Permanently off.
To fold the 3rd row seats with the roller stored at
the back, it is necessary to raise the concertina
boards in order to give access to the seat Permanent lighting.
unlocking controls (red straps).
87
Front – rear map reading Switching on Footwell lighting

lamps
F With the ignition on, operate the
corresponding switch.
Take care not to put anything in contact

with the courtesy lamps.
In "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting

time varies according to the circumstances:
- when the ignition is off, approximately
ten minutes, At night, the dashboard, centre console and
- in energy economy mode, courtesy lamps come on automatically once
approximately thirty seconds, the sidelamps are lit.
- with the engine running, unlimited. The interior ambient lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are switched
off.
The interior ambient lighting can be activated or
Interior ambient lighting deactivated in the Driving menu by selecting
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting the "Vehicle settings" tab, then "Comfort"
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light and "Mood lighting".
is poor.
The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
Switching on
Its operation is the same as the courtesy
lamps. The lamps come on when one of the
doors is opened.
88
Panoramic glass sunroof The driver must ensure that passengers

use the blind correctly.
It has an electrically-controlled blind.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the blind.
Opening/closing the roof
3
blind
Reinitalisation
F Turn control A to begin sliding the roof blind

to the desired position (positions 1 to 4). In the event of a failure or battery disconnection
while the blind is moving or soon after it
F To close the roof blind, turn control A to stops, the safety anti-pinch function must be
position 0. reinitialised:
F put the blind in the closed position,
F press the button B for about two seconds.
Safety anti-pinch
This blind has an anti-pinch function. At the end
of its travel, if the blind meets an obstacle while
closing, it stops and moves back slightly.
If the blind encounters an obstacle, you should
reverse the movement by using the control.
89
Lighting and visibility
Main lighting Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Lighting control stalk Daytime running lamps/Dipped
beam/Main beam.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence Sidelamps.
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is Dipped or main beam headlamps.
normal; it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes. Without AUTO lighting
Headlamp dipping
If one or more lamps fails, a message
Pull the stalk towards you to switch between
asks you to check the lamp or lamps
dipped and main beam headlamps or to
concerned.
activate automatic headlamp dipping.
In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
Driving abroad With AUTO lighting
temporarily ("headlamp flash"), for as long as
Halogen headlamps
the stalk is kept pulled.
If planning to use your vehicle in a country
that drives on the other side of the road,
the dipped beam headlamps must be Displays
adjusted to avoid dazzling on-coming
drivers. Contact a CITROËN dealer or Illumination of the corresponding indicator
qualified workshop. lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
Xenon headlamps lighting selected is switched on.
The design of the dipped beam headlamps
allows, without modification, driving in Selection of main lighting mode
a country that drives on the other side
of the road to the country in which your Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with
vehicle was sold. the marking.
Lighting off (ignition off)/Daytime

running lamps (engine running).
90
Rear foglamps F once backwards to switch off the rear

foglamps,
F backwards a second time to switch off the
front foglamps.
F Turn the sensor ring forwards to switch on
the foglamps. If the lights are switched off automatically or
F Turn the sensor ring backwards to switch off the dipped beam headlamps are switched off
the foglamps. manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain
on.
If the dipped beam headlamps are F Turn the ring backwards to switch off the
4
switched off manually, the rear foglamps foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.
The sidelamps and the rear direction also switch off.
indicators are situated on the tailgate.
During lighting, the opening of the tailgate
Opening the tailgate prevents the
provokes the automatic switching of these
foglamps lighting up.
lamps towards the fitted lamps in the rear
With front and rear foglamps Opening the tailgate when the lamps are
bumpers to maintain the safety of the
on switches them off automatically along
vehicle.
with the indicator lamp in the instrument
panel. On closing the tailgate, they do not
light up automatically: it will be necessary
Foglamps to use the control.
They operate with the dipped and main beam
headlamps.
Front and rear foglamps
With rear foglamps only
Turn and release the ring:

F once forwards to switch on the front
foglamps,
F forwards a second time to switch on the rear
foglamps.
91
In good or rainy weather, by both day Switching on the lighting after the
Three flashes
and night, the front foglamps and the ignition is switched off F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
rear foglamps are prohibited. In these To reactivate the lighting control stalk, without going beyond the point of
situations, the power of their beams may rotate ring A to the 0 position – lamps off, resistance; the direction indicators will flash
dazzle other drivers. They should only be then to the desired position. 3 times.
used in fog or falling snow. On opening the driver's door a temporary
In these weather conditions, it is your audible signal warns the driver that the
responsibility to switch on the foglamps lighting is on.
Parking lamps
and dipped headlamps manually as the It will go off automatically after a period of Vehicle side marking by illumination of the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient time that depends on the state of charge sidelamps on the traffic side only.
light. in battery (entering energy economy
Switch off the front and rear foglamps mode).
when they are no longer necessary.
Direction indicators (flashers)

Switching off of the lighting when the
ignition is switched off
On switching off the ignition, all of the
lighting turns off immediately, except for
dipped beam headlamps if automatic
guide-me-home lighting is activated.
F Depending on version, within one minute
of switching off the ignition, operate the
lighting control stalk up or down depending
on the traffic side (for example, when
F Left: lower the lighting control stalk passing parking on the right, push the lighting
the point of resistance. control stalk downwards; the left-hand
F Right: raise the lighting control stalk passing sidelamps come on).
the point of resistance. This is confirmed by an audible signal and
illumination of the corresponding direction
indicator lamp in the instrument panel.
92
To switch off the parking lamps, return the Automatic Operating fault
lighting control stalk to the central position.
With the "Automatic headlamp illumination" In the event of a malfunction of the
function activated (lighting control stalk sunshine sensor, the lighting comes
in the AUTO position), under low ambient on, this warning lamp is displayed in
light, the dipped beam headlamps come on the instrument panel accompanied
Guide-me-home headlamps automatically when the ignition is switched off. by an audible signal and/or
Activation, deactivation and the duration of the a message.
guide-me-home lighting are set in the touch Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
screen's Driving menu. workshop.
4
Select "Guide-me-home lighting" to activate
or deactivate the function. In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may
To set the duration, select the icon of the detect sufficient light. In this case, the
"Guide-me-home lighting" function. lighting will not come on automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
integrated with the rain sensor and located
Automatic illumination of at the top of the windscreen behind the
headlamps rear view mirror; the associated functions
would no longer be controlled.
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam When the ring is at the "AUTO" position and
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been a low level of ambient light is detected by the
switched off makes the driver's exit easier sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps,
when the light is poor. sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are Front daytime running
switched on automatically, without any action
Manual on the part of the driver. They can also come
lamps (LEDs)
on if rain is detected, at the same time as
Activation
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
As soon as the brightness returns to
using the lighting control stalk.
a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
F Another "headlamp flash" switches the
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
function off.
automatically.
Deactivation
Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off
automatically at the end of a given period of time.
93
They come on automatically when the engine - when you use the remote control to locate Programming
is started, when the lighting control stalk is in the vehicle.
position "0" or "AUTO". The activation, deactivation and choice of
welcome lighting duration are done in the
Switching off Driving menu of the touch screen.
Door mirror spotlamps Select "Welcome lighting" on the "Vehicle
They go off automatically after 30 seconds.
settings" tab.
Use the arrows or the slider to adjust the
lighting duration.
Exterior welcome lighting
The remote switching on of the lighting makes
your approach to the vehicle easier in poor
light. It is activated when the lighting control Automatic headlamp
stalk is in the "AUTO" position and the level of dipping
light detected by the sunshine sensor is low.
System which automatically changes between
dipped and main beam according to the
exterior light level and the traffic conditions,
Switching on using a camera located at the top of the
To make your approach to the vehicle easier,
windscreen.
these illuminate: F Press the open padlock on
- the zones facing the driver's and the remote control or one of
passenger's doors, the front door handles with the This system is a driving aid.
- the zones forward of the door mirrors and "Keyless Entry and Starting" The driver remains responsible for the
rearward of the front doors. system. vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the
prevailing conditions of light, visibility,
The dipped beam headlamps and the
Switching on traffic and observation of driving and
sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also
vehicle regulations.
When the courtesy lamp is in this unlocked.
position, the spotlamps come on
automatically: Switching off The system will be operational as soon as
The exterior welcome lighting switches off you have exceeded 16 mph (25 km/h).
- when you unlock the vehicle,
automatically after a set time, when the ignition If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h),
- when removing the electronic key from the reader,
is switched on or on locking the vehicle. the system no longer operates.
- when opening a door,
94
If the ambient light level is very low and the

traffic conditions permit:
- main beam comes on

automatically: these indicator
lamps come on in the instrument
panel.
The system is deactivated when you switch on

the foglamps or when the system detects thick
fog.
4
When you switch off the foglamps or as soon
as the vehicle leaves the area of thick fog, the
Activation/Deactivation function reactivates automatically.
F Turn the lighting control stalk

ring to the "AUTO" position. This indicator lamp goes off while
the function is deactivated.
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
functions" tab then "Automatic headlamp
dip". Pause
If the situation requires a change of headlamp
Operation beam, the driver can take over at any time.
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if

F Flashing the headlamps pauses the function
the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of
and the system changes to "automatic
the main beam headlamps:
illumination of headlamps" mode:
- dipped beam is kept on, these - if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam"
indicator lamps come on in the indicator lamps were on, the system
instrument panel. changes to main beam,
- if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator
lamps were on, the system changes to
dipped beam.
95
To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps 1. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
Clean the windscreen regularly,
again. -. Intermediate setting.
particularly the area in front of the camera.
The internal surface of the windscreen can 2. Driver + maximum authorised load.
also become misted around the camera. -. Intermediate setting.
The system may suffer interference or not
work correctly: In humid and cold weather, demist the 3. 5 people + maximum authorised load in
- under poor visibility conditions (snow, windscreen regularly. the boot.
heavy rain, etc.), Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
- if the windscreen is dirty, misted or bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
obscured (by a sticker, etc.) in front of conceal the detection camera.
the camera, Clean the front bumper, especially around The initial setting is position 0.
- if the vehicle is facing highly reflective the radar, removing mud, snow, etc.
signs.
When the system detects thick fog, it
temporarily deactivates the function. Cornering lighting
The system is not able to detect:
- road users that do not have their own
lighting, such as pedestrians,
- vehicles whose lighting is obscured Headlamp adjustment
(for example: vehicles running behind
a safety barrier on a motorway),
- vehicles at the top or bottom of
a steep slope, on winding roads, on
crossroads.
If your vehicle is equipped with it, this system

makes use of the beam from a front foglamp
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the
users, the headlamp beams should be adjusted main or dipped beam headlamps are on and
for height according to the vehicle's load. the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h)
(urban driving, winding road, junctions, parking
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
manoeuvres, etc.).
-. Intermediate setting.
96
Switching off
The system does not operate:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel,
- above 25 mph (40 km/h),
- when reverse gear is engaged.
The cornering lighting can be activated or

deactivated in the Driving menu.
F Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then
4
"Driving lighting" and "Directional
with cornering lighting headlamps". with directional lighting
Directional lighting
When the dipped or main beams are on, this
function allows the light beam to better follow
the road.
Associated with xenon lamps, this function
improves the quality of your lighting while
cornering.
The system does not operate:

without cornering lighting - when stationary or at very low speeds, without directional lighting
- when reverse gear is engaged.
Switching on
Operating fault
This system starts:
- when the corresponding direction indicator If a fault occurs, these warning
is switched on, lamps are displayed on the
or instrument panel, accompanied by
- from a certain angle of rotation of the an audible signal and a message.
steering wheel.
97
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Windscreen wipers

Do not operate the wipers on a dry
workshop.
windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold
conditions, ensure that the wiper blades The front windscreen wiper system is
The directional lighting can be activated or
are not stuck to the windscreen before fitted with a safety device that inhibits its
deactivated in the touch screen.
operating the wipers. function when detecting an obstacle such
In the Driving menu, select the "Vehicle
as ice or snow.
settings" tab, then "Driving lighting" and
"Directional headlamps".
Manual controls Wiping speed selection control: raise or lower

the stalk to the desired position.
Wiper control stalk
Fast wiping (heavy rain).
Programming
Your vehicle may also include some functions Normal wiping (moderate rain).
The windscreen wipers are controlled directly
that can be configured:
by the driver.
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear. Intermittent wiping (proportional to
Without AUTO wiping the speed of the vehicle).
Off.
In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or Single wipe (press downwards or

frost present on the windscreen, around pull the stalk briefly towards you,
the wiper arms and blades and the then release).
windscreen seal, before operating the
wipers. With AUTO wiping or
Automatic wiping (press down,
then release).
Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly
towards you).
98
Automatic windscreen The automatic rain sensitive windscreen In case of snow or hard frost, deactivate
wipers wipers must be reactivated by pushing the the automatic rear wiper.
control stalk downwards, if the ignition has
The windscreen wipers operate automatically
been off for more than one minute.
once rain is detected (sensor behind the
rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the Rear wiper selection ring:
intensity of the rain without any action on the
Off.
part of the driver.
Operating fault
Switching on If a fault occurs with the automatic rain Intermittent wipe.
4
sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in
intermittent mode.
Wash-wipe (set duration).
Have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or
Do not cover the rain sensor, combined Reverse gear

with the sunshine sensor and located at
Give a short downwards push to the When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
the top centre of the windscreen, behind
control stalk. will come into operation if the windscreen wiper
the rear view mirror.
A wiping cycle confirms that the is operating.
Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
instruction has been accepted.
wipers when using an automatic car wash. This function can be activated or deactivated in
This indicator lamp comes on in the
In winter, it is advisable to wait until the Driving menu.
instrument panel and a message is
the windscreen is completely clear of Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then
displayed.
ice before activating the automatic rain "Comfort" and "Rear wiper in reverse".
Switching off sensitive wipers.
Give the control stalk another brief
push downwards or place the control Rear wiper In the event of snow or hard frost or
stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2). if a bicycle carrier is fitted to a towing
device, deactivate the automatic rear
wiper via the vehicle parameters menu.
This indicator lamp goes off in the instrument
panel and a message is displayed.
99
Front screenwash and Headlamp wash

headlamp wash
Screenwash and washer jets
F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you. The
screenwash and then the wiper operate for F In the minute following ignition switch-off,
a fixed duration. any operation of the wiper control stalk will
A few moments after releasing the screenwash position the wiper blades vertically.
control, there is one last wipe of the screen to When the system is no longer powered, at least
wipe away any excess. one minute after the ignition is switched off, it is
possible to move the arms manually.
F To park the wiper blades again, gently fold
Washer jet adjustment the arms onto the windscreen, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
The headlamp washers operate while the
vehicle is moving and the dipped beams are
on. However, to reduce the consumption of
the screenwash fluid, the headlamp washers
only operate with every seventh use of the To maintain the effectiveness of the wiper
screenwash or every 25 miles (40 km) during blades, it is advisable to:
a given journey. - handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
Special position of the - avoid using them to retain cardboard
on the windscreen,
The front screenwash includes a washer jet windscreen wipers - replace them at the first signs of wear.
height adjustment device.
If you wish to change the factory setting, turn This maintenance position allows you to
the screw of each washer jet anticlockwise, release the front windscreen wiper blades in
towards the "+" to raise the jet or clockwise, order to clean their rubber inserts or to replace
towards the "-", to lower it. the blades. It can also be useful in winter to
The arms must only be replaced by
release the wiper blades from the windscreen.
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
100
Safety
General safety We draw your attention to the following Installation of accessory radio
recommendations points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment
communication transmitters
Before installing a radio communication
or accessories not approved by transmitter, you must contact a CITROËN
CITROËN may cause excessive dealer for the specifications of compatible
Labels are affixed in different locations on current consumption and faults and transmitters (frequency, maximum power,
your vehicle. They include safety warnings failures with the electrical system of aerial position, specific installation
and vehicle identification information. Do your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN requirements), in line with the Vehicle
not remove them: they are an integral part dealer for information on the range of Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
of your vehicle. recommended accessories. (2004/104/EC).
- As a safety measure, access to
the diagnostic socket, used for the
vehicle's electronic systems, is
5
reserved strictly for CITROËN dealers
For any work on your vehicle, use
or qualified workshops, equipped
a qualified workshop that has the technical
with the special tools required (risk
information, skills and equipment required,
all of which a CITROËN dealer is able to
of malfunctions of the vehicle's
electronic systems that could cause
Hazard warning lamps
provide.
breakdowns or serious accidents).
The manufacturer cannot be held
responsible if this advice is not
followed.
Depending on country regulations, some
- Any modification or adaptation not
safety equipment may be compulsory:
intended or authorised by CITROËN
high visibility safety vests, warning
or carried out without meeting the
triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs,
technical requirements defined by
spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, F When you press this red button, all four
the manufacturer will result in the
mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. direction indicators flash.
suspension of the legal and contractual
They can operate with the ignition off.
warranties.
101
Safety
Automatic operation of "Localised Emergency Call" immediately

Emergency or assistance locates your vehicle and contacts you in
hazard warning lamps call your own language**, and – if necessary –
When braking in an emergency, depending on requests that relevant emergency services be
the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps dispatched**. In countries where the service is
come on automatically. not available, or when the locating service has
They switch off automatically when you next been expressly declined, the call is sent directly
accelerate. to the emergency services (112) without the
F You can also switch them off by pressing vehicle location.
the button.
If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, an emergency call is made
Horn automatically and independently of the
deployment of any airbags.
Localised Emergency Call * In accordance with the general conditions

of use for the service available from dealers
In an emergency, press and subject to technological and technical
this button for more than limitations.
2 seconds.
** According to the geographic coverage of
The flashing LED and the
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
voice message confirm that
Assistance Call" and the official national
the call has been made to the
language chosen by the owner of the
F Press the central part of the steering wheel. "Localised Emergency Call"
vehicle.
call centre*.
The list of countries covered and Telematic
Pressing this button again immediately cancels services is available from dealers or on the
the request; the LED goes off. website for your country.
The LED remains on (without flashing) when

communication is established. Operation of the system
It goes off at the end of the call. When the ignition is switched on, the indicator
lamp comes on for 3 seconds indicating that
the system is operating correctly.
102
Safety
If the indicator lamp lights up continuously red: The list of countries covered and of Telematic
For technical reasons and, in particular, to
there is a system fault. services is available from dealers or on the
improve the quality of Telematic services
If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the website for your country.
to customers, the manufacturer reserves
back-up battery.
the right to carry out updates to the
In either case, emergency and assistance calls
may not function. Geolocation vehicle's on-board telematic system.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible.
If you benefit from the Citroën Connect
Box offer with the SOS and assistance
The system's fault does not prevent the pack included, there are additional
vehicle from being driven. services available to you in your personal
You can deactivate geolocation by
space, via the website for your country.
simultaneously pressing the "Localised
5
Emergency Call" and "Localised Assistance
Localised Assistance Call Call" buttons, followed by pressing "Localised
Assistance Call" to confirm.
Press this button for more Electronic stability control
than 2 seconds to request To reactivate geolocation, simultaneously press
assistance if the vehicle breaks the "Localised Emergency Call" and "Localised (ESC)
down. Assistance Call" buttons again, followed by Electronic stability control integrating the
a press on "Localised Assistance Call" to following systems:
A voice message confirms that the call has confirm. - anti-lock braking system (ABS) and
been made**. electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
If you purchased your vehicle outside the - emergency braking assistance (EBA),
Immediately pressing this button again cancels
CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to - wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction
the request.
have a dealer check the configuration of control,
The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
these services and, if desired, modify it to - dynamic stability control (DSC).
message.
suit your wishes. In a multilingual country,
** According to the geographic coverage of
configuration is possible in the official
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
national language of your choice.
Assistance Call" and the official national
language chosen by the owner of the
vehicle.
103
Safety
Definitions Dynamic stability control (DSC) Anti-lock braking system

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) If there is a difference between the path (ABS) and electronic brake
and electronic brake force followed by the vehicle and that required by force distribution (EBFD)
distribution (EBFD) the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and
automatically acts on the brake of one or more
These systems improve the stability and wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle When lit up continuously, this
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking to the required path, within the limits of the laws warning lamp indicates a fault with
and contribute towards improved control in of physics. the ABS.
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road
surfaces. The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of Intelligent traction control carefully at moderate speed.
emergency braking. ("Snow motion") If this warning lamp comes on, in
The EBFD system manages the braking
Depending on version, your vehicle has conjunction with the STOP and ABS
pressure wheel by wheel.
a system to help driving on snow: intelligent warning lamps, an audible signal
traction control. and a message, it means that the
Emergency braking assistance This system detects situations of poor surface electronic brake force distribution
(EBA) grip that could make it difficult to move off (EBFD) is defective.
In an emergency, this system enables you to or make progress on deep fresh snow or
You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is
reach the optimum braking pressure more compacted snow.
safe to do so.
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping In these situations, the intelligent traction
In both cases, have the system checked by
distance. control limits the amount of wheel spin to
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as
It is triggered in relation to the speed at which provide the best traction and trajectory control
soon as possible.
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by for your vehicle.
a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
an increase in the effectiveness of the braking. ensure that these are approved for your
vehicle.
The use of snow tyres is strongly
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) recommended on surfaces offering low
levels of grip. When operating under normal conditions,
This system (also known as Traction Control)
the ABS may cause the brake pedal to
optimises traction in order to limit wheel slip by
vibrate slightly.
acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and
on the engine. It also improves the directional
stability of the vehicle on acceleration.
104
Safety
Reactivate the system when grip conditions

In emergency braking, press the brake ASR/DSC
allow.
pedal hard and maintain this pressure. These systems offer increased safety
F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving in normal driving, but they should not
functions" tab, then "Traction control". encourage the driver to take extra risks or
drive at high speed.
After an impact, have these systems Deactivation is confirmed by the display of
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain,
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a message.
snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip
a qualified workshop. The ASR system no longer acts on the
increases. It is therefore important for your
operation of the engine or the brakes in the
safety to keep these systems activated in
event of an involuntary change of trajectory.
all conditions, and particularly in difficult
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)/ conditions.
Dynamic stability control Reactivation of the ASR The correct operation of these systems
(DSC) The system is reactivated automatically every
depends on observation of the
5
manufacturer's recommendations, not
Operation time the ignition is switched back on or from
only about the wheels (tyres and rims),
31 mph (50 km/h).
These systems are activated automatically braking and electronic components but
Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it
every time the vehicle is started. also the assembly and repair procedures
manually:
They come into operation in the event of used by CITROËN dealers.
a problem with grip or trajectory. To benefit in full from the effectiveness
functions" tab, then "Traction control".
of these systems in wintry conditions,
the vehicle must be fitted with four snow
This is indicated by flashing of this tyres, allowing the vehicle to retain neutral
warning lamp in the instrument behaviour on the road.
panel. Operating fault
The illumination of this warning
Deactivation of the ASR lamp, accompanied by an audible
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle signal and a message, indicates that
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft there is a fault with these systems.
ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
the ASR system, so that the wheels can turn
workshop to have the systems checked.
freely and regain grip.
105
Safety
Seat belts Fastening 2nd row rear seat belts

Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic
pretensioning and force limiting system.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
belts against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the Each of the rear seats is fitted with a three-
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus
buckle. point seat belt with inertia reel and force limiter
improving their protection.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened (except for the centre rear seat).
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening 2nd row rear lateral seat belts

Adjusting the height of the front (storage)
F Press the red button on the buckle.
belt return F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
F To adjust the height of the anchorage point,

squeeze the control and slide it up or down Guide the strap as it reels in and take the tongue
to the notch desired. to the magnet at the lateral anchoring point.
106
Safety
2nd row rear central seat belt Before performing any operations on
Removal and storage
The seat belt for the rear central position is the rear seats, to avoid damage to the F Press the red button on the buckle.
integrated into the roof. seat belts check that the lateral belts are F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
properly tensioned and fasten the tongues F Fasten the strap, flat, to the retention loop.
to their anchoring point. The central seat
belt must be completely reeled in.
To install
Ensure seat belts are always fastened
when not in use.
3rd row rear seat belts

To install Seat belt not fastened/
5
unfastened alerts
F Pull the strap and insert tongue A into the The instrument panel includes the seat belts not
right buckle. fastened warning lamp A as well as the seat belts
F Insert tongue B into the left buckle. not unfastened identification warning lamp B.
F Check that each buckle is fastened correctly When the system detects that a seat belt is
by pulling the strap. unfastened or fastened, warning lamp A lights
up as well as the corresponding dot(s) in warning
lamp B.
Removal and storage F Detach the seat belt strap from its retention
loop located in the boot side trim. Front seat belts not fastened
F Press the red button on buckle B, then the alert
F Pull the strap and insert the tongue into the
button on buckle A.
buckle. When the ignition is switched on, warning lamp
F Guide the strap as it reels in and take
F Check that the seat belt is fastened A and the corresponding dots in warning lamp
tongue B, then A to the magnet at the
correctly by pulling the strap. B come on if the driver and/or front passenger
anchoring point on the roof.
have not fastened their seat belts.
107
Safety
At a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h), these Advice Installation

warning lamps flash, associated with an
The lower part of the strap must be
audible signal, for two minutes. Beyond this
The driver must ensure that passengers positioned as low as possible on the
period of time, the warning lamps stay on
use the seat belts correctly and that they pelvis.
continuously until the seat belts are fastened.
are all fastened before setting off. The upper part must be positioned in the
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, hollow of the shoulder.
Rear seat belts not fastened alert always fasten your seat belt, even for In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
short journeys. - be tightened as close to the body as
When the ignition is switched on, with the
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles possible,
engine running or the vehicle moving above
as they will not fulfil their role fully. - be pulled in front of you with a smooth
6 mph (10 km/h), warning lamp A and the
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia movement, checking that it does not
corresponding dots in warning lamp B come on
reel permitting automatic adjustment of twist,
for around thirty seconds, if one or more rear
the length of the strap to your size. The - be used to restrain only one person,
passengers have not fastened their seat belts.
seat belt is stowed automatically when not - not show any signs of cuts or fraying,
in use. - not be converted or modified to avoid
Seat belts unfastened alert The inertia reels have an automatic affecting its performance.
After the ignition is switched on, warning lamp locking device at the time of a collision,
A and the corresponding dots in warning lamp during sudden braking or if the vehicle
B come on if the driver and/or one or more turns over. You can release the device by
passengers unfasten their seat belts. pulling the strap firmly and then releasing
These warning lamps flash for 30 seconds, it so that it reels in slightly.
Recommendations for children
accompanied by an audible signal. Beyond Before and after use, ensure that the seat
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger
this period of time, the warning lamps stay on belt is reeled in correctly.
is less than 12 years old or shorter than
continuously until the seat belts are fastened. After folding or moving a seat or rear
one and a half metres.
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is
Never use the same seat belt to secure
positioned and reeled in correctly.
more than one child.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
For more information on Child seats,
refer to the corresponding section.
108
Safety
Maintenance Airbags Impact detection zones

In accordance with current safety
regulations, for all repairs on your General information
vehicle's seat belts, go to a qualified This system contributes towards improving the
workshop with the skills and equipment safety of passengers (with the exception of the
needed, which a CITROËN dealer is able rear centre passenger) in the event of violent
to provide. collisions. The airbags supplement the action
Have your seat belts checked regularly of the seat belts fitted with force limiters (all
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified except the centre rear passenger belt).
workshop, particularly if the straps show If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
signs of damage. record and analyse the front and side impacts
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy sustained in the impact detection zones: A. Front impact zone.
water or a textile cleaning product, sold by
B. Side impact zone.
5
CITROËN dealers. - in the event of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards better protection of the passengers The deployment of one or more airbags
(with the exception of the rear centre is accompanied by a slight emission of
passenger); immediately after the impact, smoke and a noise, due to the detonation
In the event of an impact
the airbags deflate rapidly so that they of the pyrotechnic charge incorporated in
Depending on the nature and
do not hinder visibility or the exit of the the system.
seriousness of the impact, the
passengers, This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
pyrotechnic pretensioner may be deployed
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or individuals may experience slight irritation.
before and independently of the airbags.
in certain rollover conditions, the airbags The detonation noise associated with the
Deployment of the pretensioners is
may not be deployed; the seat belt deployment of an airbag may result in
accompanied by a slight discharge of
alone contributes towards ensuring your a slight loss of hearing for a short time.
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
protection in these situations.
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp The airbags do not operate when the
comes on. ignition is switched off.
Following an impact, have the seat This equipment will only deploy once. If
belts system checked and, if necessary, a second impact occurs (during the same
replaced, by a CITROËN dealer or or a subsequent accident), the airbag will
a qualified workshop. not be deployed again.
109
Safety
Front airbags The front airbag inflates between the thorax The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
and head of the front occupant of the vehicle shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the and the corresponding door trim panel.
dashboard, passenger's side, to cushion their
forward movement.
Curtain airbags
System contributing towards greater protection
Lateral airbags for the driver and passengers (with the
exception of the rear centre passenger) in the
event of a serious side impact in order to limit
the risk of injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious front Deployment
impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
head and thorax. time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the event of a serious side impact applied to all or
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. System which protects the driver and front to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle
passenger in the event of a serious side impact on a horizontal plane and directed from the
Deployment in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, outside towards the inside of the vehicle.
The airbags are deployed, except the front between the hip and the shoulder. The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
passenger airbag if it is deactivated*, in the Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
event of a serious front impact to all or part frame, door side.
of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane Deployment
and directed from the front to the rear of the It is deployed unilaterally in the event of Malfunction
vehicle. a severe side impact covering all or part of side
If this warning lamp comes on in the
* For more information on Deactivating impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal
instrument panel, you must contact
the front passenger airbag, refer to the centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
corresponding section. and directed from the outside towards the
workshop to have the system
inside of the vehicle.
checked.
110
Safety
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the Advice Front airbags

event of a serious impact.
Do not drive holding the steering wheel
For the airbags to be fully effective,
by its spokes or resting your hands on the
observe the safety recommendations
In the event of a minor impact or bump on centre part of the wheel.
below.
the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls Passengers must not place their feet on
Adopt a normal and upright sitting
over, the airbags may not be deployed. the dashboard.
position.
In the event of a rear or front collision, Do not smoke as deployment of the
Fasten your seat belt, ensuring it is
none of the lateral airbags are deployed. airbags can cause burns or the risk of
positioned correctly.
injury from a cigarette or pipe.
Do not leave anything between the
Never remove or pierce the steering
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
wheel or hit it violently.
object, etc.), nor fix or attach anything
Do not fix or attach anything to the
close to or in the way of the airbag release
steering wheel or dashboard, this could
trajectory; this could cause injuries during
5
cause injuries with deployment of the
their deployment.
airbags.
Never modify the original definition of your
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
around the airbags.
After an accident or if the vehicle has Curtain airbags
been stolen or broken into, have the Do not fix or attach anything to the roof,
airbag systems checked. as this could cause head injuries when
All work on the airbag systems must the curtain airbag is deployed.
be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or If fitted to your vehicle, do not remove the
a qualified workshop. grab handles installed on the roof, they
Even if all of the precautions mentioned play a part in securing the curtain airbags.
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out.
The airbag inflates almost instantly (within
a few milliseconds) then deflates within
the same time discharging the hot gas via
openings provided for this purpose.
111
Safety
Lateral airbags General points relating to Ensure that the seat belt is positioned and
Use only approved covers on the seats,
compatible with the deployment of the
child seats tightened correctly.
For child seats with a support leg, ensure
lateral airbags. For information on the that the support leg is in firm and steady
The regulations on carrying children are
product range of seat covers suitable for contact with the floor.
specific to each country. Refer to the
your vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer. At the front: if necessary, adjust the
legislation in force in your country.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat passenger seat.
backrests (clothes, etc.) as this could At the rear: if necessary, adjust the
cause injuries to the thorax or arm when For maximum safety, please observe the relevant front seat.
the lateral airbag is deployed. following recommendations:
Do not sit with the upper part of the body - In accordance with European regulations,
any nearer to the door than necessary. all children under the age of 12 or less
The vehicle's front door panels include Remove and stow the head restraint
than one and a half metres tall must before installing a child seat with backrest
side impact sensors. travel in approved child seats suited to
A damaged door or any unauthorised or on a passenger seat.
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt Refit the head restraint once the child seat
incorrectly executed work (modification or or ISOFIX mountings.
repair) on the front doors or their interior has been removed.
- Statistically, the safest seats in your
trim could compromise the operation of vehicle for carrying children are the rear
these sensors – risk of malfunction of the seats.
lateral airbags! - A child weighing less than 9 kg must Child seat at the rear
Such work must only be done by travel in the rearward facing position
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified "Rearward facing"
both in the front and in the rear.
workshop.
It is recommended that children travel on When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed
the rear seats of your vehicle: on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
- "rearward facing" up to the age of 3, front seat forward and straighten the backrest
- "forward facing" over the age of 3. so that the "rearward facing" child seat does
not touch the vehicle's front seat.
112
Safety
"Forward facing" Child seat at the front

"Rearward facing"
When a "forward facing" child seat is installed

on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed
so that the legs of the child in the "forward on the front passenger seat, adjust the
facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's vehicle's seat to the intermediate longitudinal
Passenger seat adjusted into the intermediate
front seat. and lowest position, with the backrest
longitudinal and lowest position, then the
straightened. Then pull the booster/height
booster/height adjuster control pulled 11 times.
3rd row seats
5
adjuster control 11 times.
The front passenger airbag must be

deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks Deactivating the front
being seriously injured or killed in case
When a child seat is installed on a rear of airbag deployment.
passenger airbag
passenger seat in the 3 rd row, move the
Never install a "rearward facing" child
seats in the 2nd row forward and straighten the
restraint system on a seat protected by an
backrest so that the child seat and the child's "Forward facing"
active front airbag. This could cause the
legs do not touch the seat in the 2nd row.
death of the child or serious injury.
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on a rear passenger seat in the 3rd
row,
When a "forward facing" child seat is

installed on the front passenger seat,
adjust the vehicle's seat to the intermediate
longitudinal and lowest position, with the
backrest straightened. Then pull the booster/
height adjuster control 11 times. Leave the
passenger's airbag active.
113
Safety
Passenger airbag deactivation To ensure the safety of your child, the front
switch passenger airbag must be deactivated
when you install a "rearward facing" child
seat on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Reactivating the front passenger

The warning label present on both sides of the
airbag
passenger sun visor repeats this advice. When you remove the "rearward facing" child
In line with current legislation, you will find this seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to
warning in all the required languages in the the ON position to reactivate the airbag and so
following tables. assure the safety of your front passenger in the
event of an impact.
Only the front passenger airbag can be
deactivated. When the ignition is switched on,
F With the ignition off, insert the key in the this warning lamp comes on in the
Passenger airbag OFF instrument panel, for approximately
passenger airbag deactivation switch.
F Turn it to the OFF position. one minute to signal that the front
F Remove the key keeping the switch in the airbag is activated.
new position.
When the ignition is switched on,

this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel. It stays on while
the airbag is deactivated.
114
Safety
AR
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
BG
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
CS
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
DA
KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung,
DE
das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
EL
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
5
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
EN
CHILD can occur.
NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
ES
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja
ET
avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
FI
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
FR
frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l'ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT.
NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
HR
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez
HU
a gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
IT
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
LT
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
115
Safety
NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
LV
SPILVENS. Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT Qatt m'ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f'siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista' tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
NL
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
NO
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
PL POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
PT
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
RO
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
RU защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем. Это может привести к
ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM.
SK
Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA.
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
SL
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu
SR
nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
SV
DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
TR
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
116
Safety
Recommended child seats Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

Range of recommended child seats which are
secured using a three-point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX XP"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX
mountings.
5
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Is only installed on the outer rear seats.
L1 The head restraint on the vehicle seat must
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" be removed.
Is installed in the "rearward facing" position.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L6
"GRACO Booster"
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Is only installed on the front passenger seat
or on the outer rear seats.
117
Safety
Installing a child seat attached with the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved
(a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Groups 0 (b) and 0+) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

Seat position
Birth to 13 kg 9-18 kg 15-25 kg 22-36 kg
Front passenger seat (c)
1st row - fixed U U U U
- height adjustable U(R) U(R) U(R) U(R)
Fixed outer rear seats and

centre rear seat (d)
2nd row U U U U
Longitudinally-adjustable
outer rear seats (d) (e)
3rd row Outer rear seats U U U U
(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant (c) Refer to the current legislation in your
be installed in all vehicles using the car seats and "car cots" cannot be country before installing your child on
seat belt. installed on the front passenger seat or this seat.
in the 3rd row. When installed in the 2nd
row, they may prevent the use of the
other seats.
118
Safety
(d) To install a child seat on a rear seat, "ISOFIX" mountings

rearward facing or forward facing,
move the front seat forward, then Your vehicle has been approved in accordance
straighten the backrest to allow enough with the latest ISOFIX regulations.
space for the child seat and the child's The seats, shown below, are fitted with ISOFIX
legs. compliant mountings:
(e) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearward facing or forward facing,
adjust the rear seat to the fully back
position with the backrest straightened.
U: seat suitable for the installation of
a child seat secured using a seat belt - a ring B, located under a cover on the back
and universally approved, rearward of the top of the seat backrest, referred to as
and/or forward facing, with the front the TOP TETHER for fixing the upper strap.
5
seat which must be adjusted in the Its position is indicated by a marking.
intermediate longitudinal position. Located on the back of the seat backrest, the
There are three rings for each seat: TOP TETHER is used to secure the upper strap
U(R): as with U, with the passenger seat
that must be adjusted to the low of child seats that have one. This device limits
position with 11 actions on the seat forward tipping of the child seat, in the event of
height control and in the intermediate a front impact.
longitudinal position.
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two
latches which are easily secured on the two
rings A.
Some also have an upper strap which is
attached to ring B.
- two rings A, located between the vehicle's
seat backrest and cushion, indicated by To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
a marking, - remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on the seat (refit it
once the child seat has been removed),
119
Safety
- detach the TOP TETHER cover by pulling RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX
its cut-out, Baby P2C Mini and its ISOFIX base
base
- pass the upper strap of the child seat over (size categories: C, D, E)
(size category: E)
the seat backrest, centring it between the
openings for the head restraint rods, Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
- fix the hook of the upper strap to ring B,
- tighten the upper strap.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in

a vehicle compromises the protection of
the child in the event of an accident.
Strictly observe the fitting instructions
provided with the child seat.
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX

base which is attached to rings A.
For information on the possibilities for base which is attached to rings A.
The base has a height adjustable support leg
installing ISOFIX child seats in your The base has a height adjustable support leg
that rests on the vehicle's floor.
vehicle, refer to the summary table. that rests on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be secured with a
This child seat can also be secured with
seat belt.
a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used
In this case, only the shell is used and must
and must be attached to the vehicle seat
be attached to the vehicle seat using the
Recommended ISOFIX child using the three-point seat belt.
three-point seat belt.
seats
Also consult the user guide from the child

seat's manufacturer to find out how to
install and remove the seat.
120
Safety
Summary tables of locations for

Baby P2C Midi and its ISOFIX base (size ISOFIX child seats
classes: D, C, A, B, B1)
In line with European regulations, these tables
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg indicate the options for installing ISOFIX child
seats on the vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal
ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category,
determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated
on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

base which is attached to rings A.
The base has a height adjustable support leg
5
that rests on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be used "forward
facing".
This child seat cannot be secured with
a seat belt.
We recommend that you use the seat in the
"rearward facing" position up to the age of
3 years.
121
Safety
Under 10 kg
Under 10 kg
(group 0)
(group 0) 9-18 kg (group 1)
Under 13 kg
Up to about From about 1 to 3 years old
(group 0+)
6 months
Up to about 1 year
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat* rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX
Fixed rear outer seats IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU X IUF, IL-SU
Longitudinally-adjustable rear outer

IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU (1) IUF/IL-SU
seats
Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be IUF: seat suitable for the installation of X: seat not suitable for the installation of
installed on the front passenger seat. an ISOFIX Universal seat, "Forward a child seat or infant car seat for the
facing" secured using the upper strap weight group indicated.
** The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured to the
on the upper ring of ISOFIX seating
lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies all (1): the outer row 2 seat must be adjusted
positions.
of the space on the rear bench seat. to the maximum forward position minus
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of 3 notches.
an Isofix Semi-Universal seat which For more information on the ISOFIX
can be: mountings and in particular the upper strap,
- "rearward facing" fitted with an refer to the corresponding section.
upper strap or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with
a support leg, or
- an infant car seat fitted with an
upper strap or a support leg.
122
Safety
Under 10 kg
Under 10 kg
(group 0)
(group 0) 9-18 kg (group 1)
Under 13 kg
Up to about From about 1 to 3 years old
(group 0+)
6 months
Up to about 1 year
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat* rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX
Fixed rear outer seats IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
Longitudinally-adjustable rear outer

seats
Centre rear seat

IL-SU**
X
IL-SU
IL-SU
IL-SU
IL-SU
IUF/IL-SU
IUF/IL-SU
IUF/IL-SU
IUF/IL-SU
5
3rd row rear seat Not ISOFIX
* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an X: seat not suitable for the installation of
installed on the front passenger seat. ISOFIX Universal seat, "Forward facing" a child seat or infant car seat for the
secured using the upper strap on the weight group indicated.
** The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured to the upper ring of ISOFIX seating positions.
lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies all For more information on the ISOFIX mountings
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an and in particular the upper strap, refer to the
of the space on the rear bench seat.
Isofix Semi-Universal seat which can corresponding section.
be:
- "rearward facing" fitted with an
upper strap or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with
a support leg, or
- an infant car seat fitted with an
upper strap or a support leg.
123
Safety
Child lock Advice Children at the rear

This mechanical system prevents opening of At rear seating positions, always leave
a rear door using its interior control. The incorrect installation of a child seat in sufficient space between the front seat
The control is located on the edge of each rear a vehicle compromises the protection of and:
door and locking is independent for each door. the child in the event of an accident. - a "rearward facing" child seat,
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat - the child's feet for a child seat fitted
belt buckle under the child seat, as this "forward facing".
could destabilise it. To do this, move the front seat forwards
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the and, if necessary, straighten its backrest.
Locking child seat harnesses keeping the slack For optimal installation of the "forward
relative to the child's body to a minimum, facing" child seat, verify that its backrest is
even for short journeys. as close as possible to the backrest of the
When installing a child seat using the seat vehicle seat, if possible in contact with it.
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened
correctly on the child seat and that it
secures the child seat firmly on the seat
Children at the front
of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is
The legislation on carrying children on the
adjustable, move it forwards if necessary.
front passenger seat is specific to each
The head restraint must be removed
country. Refer to the legislation in force in
before installing a child seat with
the country in which you are driving.
a backrest on a passenger seat.
Deactivate the front passenger airbag
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
F Using the integral ignition key, turn the when a "rearward facing" child seat is
attached securely to prevent it from being
control as far as it will go: installed on the front passenger seats.
thrown around the vehicle in the event
- to the left on the left-hand rear door, Otherwise, there is a risk of serious or
of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint
- to the right on the right-hand rear door. fatal injury to the child if the airbag is
when the child seat is removed.
deployed.
Unlocking
F Using the integral ignition key, turn the
control as far as it will go:
- to the right on the left-hand rear door,
- to the left on the right-hand rear door.
124
Safety
Installing a booster seat

The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
We recommend using a booster seat with
a backrest, equipped with a belt guide at
shoulder level.
Additional protections
5
To prevent accidental opening of the doors
and rear windows, use the child lock.
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays
of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear
windows.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- a child or children alone and
unattended in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle
which is exposed to the sun, with the
windows closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
125
Driving
Driving advice Important!

Observe driving regulations and remain vigilant
whatever the traffic conditions. Never drive with the parking brake applied
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your – Risk of overheating and damage to the
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to braking system!
react at any time to any eventuality. As the exhaust system of your vehicle
As a safety measure, the driver should only is very hot, even several minutes after
switching off the engine, never park or run If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road:
carry out any operations that require close
the engine on inflammable surfaces (dry - check that the depth of water does not
attention when the vehicle is stationary.
grass, fallen leaves, etc.) – Risk of fire! exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
On a long journey, taking a break every two
might be generated by other users,
hours is strongly recommended.
- deactivate the Stop & Start function,
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate
- drive as slowly as possible without stalling.
the need to brake and increase the distance
In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h),
from other vehicles.
- do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety
the engine running. If you have to leave conditions allow, make several light brake
your vehicle with the engine running, apply applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
Never leave the engine running in the parking brake and put the gearbox into If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact
an enclosed area without adequate neutral or position N or P, depending on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
ventilation: internal combustion engines the type of gearbox.
emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon
monoxide. There is a risk of poisoning and
death!
In very severe wintry conditions
Driving on flooded roads
(temperatures below -23°C), to guarantee We strongly advise against driving on flooded
correct operation and the longevity of roads, as this could cause serious damage
the mechanical elements of your vehicle to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the
(engine and gearbox), the engine must be electrical systems of your vehicle.
left running for 4 minutes before driving.
126
Driving
In case of towing New vehicle Anti-theft protection

Do not pull a trailer before having driven at least
Driving with a trailer places greater approximately 620 miles (1,000 kilometres). Electronic immobiliser
demands on the towing vehicle and The keys contain an electronic chip which has
requires extra care from the driver. a secret code. When the ignition is switched
Braking on, this code must be recognised in order for
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. starting to be possible.
To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
Side wind engine braking is recommended. engine management system a few moments
F Take into account the increased sensitivity after the ignition is switched off, and prevents
to wind. Tyres starting of the engine by anyone who does not
have the key.
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing In the event of a malfunction, you are informed
Cooling vehicle and of the trailer, observing the by a message in the instrument panel screen.
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the recommended pressures. If this happens, your vehicle will not start;
temperature of the coolant. contact a CITROËN dealer if required.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling Lighting
6
capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
F To lower the engine speed, reduce your F Check the electrical lighting and signalling Starting/switching off
on the trailer and the headlamp beam height
speed.
The maximum towable load on an incline of your vehicle.
the engine using the
depends on the gradient and the exterior electronic key
temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
Starting the engine
temperature. For more information on Headlamp
adjustment, refer to the corresponding
section.
F If this warning lamp and the
STOP warning lamp come on,
stop the vehicle and switch off Certain driving or manoeuvring aid
the engine as soon as possible. functions are automatically disabled if an
approved towing system is used.
127
Driving
F Place the gear selector at P or N for If one of the starting conditions is not met,
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
vehicles with an automatic gearbox or a reminder message is displayed in the
engine will not stop.
neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox. instrument panel. In some circumstances, it is
F Place the electronic key in the reader. necessary to turn the steering wheel slightly
F Press the brake pedal for vehicles with an while pressing the "START/STOP" button to
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of
automatic gearbox, or fully depress the assist unlocking of the steering; a message
braking assistance.
clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual warns you when this is needed.
gearbox.
F Briefly press the "START/STOP" button. With petrol engines, after a cold start, Emergency switch-off
The steering column unlocks and the engine preheating the catalytic converter can
starts more or less instantly. In the event of an emergency only, the engine
cause noticeable engine vibrations for
On certain versions with the automatic gearbox can be switched off without conditions (even
anything up to 2 minutes while stationary
(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not when driving).
with the engine running (accelerated idle
lock. Press the "START/STOP" button for about
speed).
three seconds.
In this case, the steering column locks as soon
For Diesel vehicles, in sub-zero temperatures as the vehicle stops.
the engine will not start until the pre-heater On certain versions with the automatic gearbox
warning lamp has gone off.
Switching off the engine (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
F Immobilise the vehicle. lock.
F Place the gear selector at P or N for
vehicles with an automatic gearbox or Electronic key left in the reader
If this warning lamp comes on after neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox. You will be warned by a message if the
pressing the "START/STOP" button, F Press the "START/STOP" button. electronic key is still in the reader on
press down on the brake or clutch The engine stops and the steering column opening the driver's door.
pedal until the warning lamp goes locks.
off, without pressing the "START/ On certain versions with the automatic gearbox
STOP" button again, until the engine (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
starts and runs. lock.
F Remove the electronic key from the reader.
128
Driving
F With an automatic gearbox, you should

Starting/switching off the The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic
keep the brake pedal fully depressed and
engine with Keyless Entry key must be inside the vehicle.
If the electronic key is not detected in this
not press the "START/STOP" button again
and Starting zone, a message is displayed.
until the engine is running.
Move the electronic key into this zone so If one of the starting conditions is not met,
Starting the engine that the engine can be started. a reminder message is displayed in the
If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key instrument panel.
not detected – Back-up starting" section. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn
the steering wheel slightly while pressing the
"START/STOP" button to assist unlocking of
the steering column.
F Press the "START/STOP" button while

maintaining pressure on the pedal until the With petrol engines, after a cold start,
engine starts. preheating the catalytic converter can
The steering column unlocks and the engine cause noticeable engine vibrations for
6
F With a manual gearbox, put the gear lever starts. up to 2 minutes while stationary with the
into neutral. On certain versions with the automatic gearbox engine running (accelerated idle speed).
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
fully depress the clutch pedal. lock.
or
For Diesel engines, when the temperature is
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear
negative and/or the engine is cold, the start As a safety measure, never leave the
selector in mode P or N.
will only take place once the preheater warning vehicle while the engine is running.
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
lamp is off.
press the brake pedal.
If this warning lamp comes on after
pressing the "START/STOP" button: Switching off the engine
F Immobilise the vehicle, engine at idle.
F With a manual gearbox, you should keep
F With a manual gearbox, preferably put the
the clutch pedal fully depressed and not
gear lever into neutral.
press the "START/STOP" button again until
the engine is running.
129
Driving
F With an automatic gearbox, preferably Key not detected Back-up switch-off

select mode P or N.
Back-up starting
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
press the "START/STOP" button.
The engine stops and the steering column
locks.
In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn
the steering wheel to lock the steering column.
On certain versions with the automatic gearbox
(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
lock, but the gearbox locks in mode P.
When the electronic key is not detected or is

When the electronic key is in the recognition no longer in the recognition zone, a message
zone and after pressing the "START/STOP" appears in the instrument panel when closing
button, the engine does not start: a door or trying to switch off the engine.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the F Place the gear selector at P or N for
engine will not stop. vehicles with an automatic gearbox or F To confirm the instruction to switch off the
neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox. engine, press the "START/STOP" button for
F Place the electronic key in the back-up about three seconds.
Never leave your vehicle with the reader.
electronic key still inside. In the event of a fault with the electronic key,
F Press the brake pedal on vehicles with an
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
automatic gearbox, or fully depress the
workshop.
clutch pedal with a manual gearbox.
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of
F Press the "START/STOP" button.
braking assistance.
The engine starts.
Emergency switch-off
In the event of an emergency only, the engine
can be switched off without conditions (even
when driving).
Press the "START/STOP" button for about
three seconds.
In this case, the steering column locks as soon
as the vehicle stops.
130
Driving
On certain versions with the automatic gearbox It goes off to confirm the release of the parking
(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not
Electric parking brake brake.
lock. The indicator lamp in the control lever flashes
during manual application or release.
Switching the ignition on After applying the parking brake, the
simultaneous flashing of the indicator lamps
(without starting) in the instrument panel and in the control lever
With the electronic key in the reader or the warns you to secure the immobilisation of the
The system provides, in automatic operation, vehicle by engaging a gear (with a manual
Keyless Entry and Starting key inside the
the application of the parking brake on gearbox or by placing the selector at position
vehicle, pressing the "START/STOP" button,
switching off the engine and release as the P with an automatic gearbox or by placing
with no action on the pedals, allows the
vehicle moves off. a chock against one of the wheels (e.g. parking
ignition to be switched on.
The driver can take over at any time to apply on a very steep slope or a steep slope with
F Press the "START/STOP" button, the or release the parking brake, by operating the a weak battery).
instrument panel comes on but the engine control lever:
does not start. - by briefly pulling the control lever to apply
F Press the button again to switch off the the brake,
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. - by briefly pushing the control lever, while
6
pressing the brake pedal, to release it. In the event of a battery failure, the
Automatic mode is activated by default. electric parking brake no longer works.
As a safety measure, if the parking brake
With the ignition on, the system is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by
automatically changes to energy economy engaging a gear (with a manual gearbox)
mode when required to maintain an or placing a chock against one of the
adequate state of charge of the battery. The technology adopted for the electric wheels.
parking brake does not allow the fitment of Call a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
15-inch wheels. workshop.
Indicator lamp
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and in the control
lever to confirm the application of
the parking brake.
131
Driving
Label on door panel When towing, parking on a steep slope,

Manual application
or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn With the vehicle stationary:
the wheels towards the kerb and engage F pull briefly on the control lever.
a gear (with a manual gearbox) or place Confirmation of the instruction is signalled by
the gear selector at position P with an flashing of the indicator lamp in the control
automatic gearbox. lever.
For towing, you vehicle is approved for
Application of the parking brake is confirmed
parking on slopes of up to 12%.
by illumination of the brake indicator lamp
and the P indicator lamp in the control lever,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake applied".
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the
parking brake is applied: the indicator
lamps in the instrument panel and the Manual operation Automatic operation
control lever must be on fixed.
Manual release
If the parking brake is not applied, there Automatic release
is an audible signal and a message is With the ignition on or the engine running, to
displayed on opening the driver's door. release the parking brake: Ensure first that the engine is running and the
F press the brake pedal, driver's door is properly closed.
F while maintaining pressure on the brake The electric parking brake releases
pedal, briefly push the control lever. automatically and progressively when the
The complete release of the parking brake is vehicle moves off.
Never leave a child alone inside the
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they could With a manual gearbox
P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
release the parking brake. F Fully depress the clutch pedal, engage 1st
accompanied by the display of the message
gear or reverse.
"Parking brake released".
F Press the accelerator pedal and release the
clutch pedal.
If you push the control lever without With an automatic gearbox

pressing the brake pedal, the parking F Press the brake pedal.
brake will not be released and a message F Release the brake pedal and press the
is displayed. accelerator pedal.
132
Driving
Immobilisation of the vehicle with the

With an automatic gearbox, if the brake With automatic operation, you can also
parking brake released
does not release automatically, check that manually apply or release the parking
F Switch off the engine.
the front doors are correctly closed. brake at any time using the control lever.
Application of the parking brake is
confirmed by illumination of the indicator
lamps in the instrument panel and the
control lever.
The complete release of the parking brake is Special cases F Switch on the ignition again, without starting
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, In some situations, you may need to operate the engine.
accompanied by the display of the message the parking brake manually. F Release the parking brake manually by
"Parking brake released". pushing the control lever while keeping your
Immobilisation of the vehicle foot on the brake pedal.
When stationary with the engine running, do not with the engine running The complete release of the parking brake is
depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, To immobilise the vehicle with the engine confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
you risk releasing the parking brake. running, briefly pull the control lever. P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
Application of the parking brake is confirmed accompanied by the display of the message
Automatic application "Parking brake released".
6
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake F Switch off the ignition.
is automatically applied when the engine is accompanied by the display of the message
switched off. "Parking brake applied".
Application of the parking brake is confirmed

Deactivating automatic
operation
Parking the vehicle with the
accompanied by the display of the message In some situations, for example when it is
brake released
"Parking brake applied". extremely cold or during towing (caravan,
recovery), it may be necessary to deactivate
In very cold conditions (ice), it is
Automatic application does not take place automatic operation of the system.
recommended that the parking brake not
if the engine stalls or goes into STOP be applied. F Start the engine.
mode of Stop & Start. To immobilise your vehicle, engage a gear F Apply the parking brake with the control
or fit the chocks against one of the wheels. lever, if it is released.
133
Driving
F Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. In the event of a failure of the main service This system only operates when:
F Push and hold the control lever in the brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver - the vehicle is completely stationary, with
release direction for at least 10 seconds and taken ill, under instruction, etc.), a continuous your foot on the brake pedal,
no more than 15 seconds. pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle. - certain slope conditions are met,
F Release the control lever. Braking takes place while the control lever is - the driver's door is closed.
F Press and hold the brake pedal. being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever The hill start assist system cannot be
F Pull the control lever in the application is released. deactivated.
direction for 2 seconds. The ABS and DSC systems ensure stability of
the vehicle during emergency braking.
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being
If the emergency braking malfunctions,
held temporarily by hill start assist.
the message "Parking brake fault" will be
Deactivation of the automatic If you need to get out of the vehicle with
displayed.
functions is confirmed by the engine running, apply the parking
illumination of this indicator lamp in brake manually. Then verify that the
the instrument panel. parking brake warning lamp (and the
warning lamp P on the electric parking
F Release the control lever and the brake brake control lever) are on continuously.
pedal. If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction,
signalled by the illumination of one or both
From now on, the parking brake can only
warning lamps in the instrument panel, then
be applied and released manually using the
stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.
control lever.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
Operation
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic driver by repeating alternate "pull-release"
operation. actions on the control lever until the vehicle is
Reactivation of automatic operation is immobilised.
confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel going off.
Hill start assist
Emergency braking System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to Uphill, with the vehicle stationary, the
The emergency braking should only be
move your foot from the brake pedal to the vehicle is held for a short time when you
used in an exceptional situation.
accelerator pedal. release the brake pedal:
- provided you are in first gear or neutral with
a manual gearbox.
134
Driving
- provided you are in mode D or M with an

automatic gearbox.
5-speed manual gearbox 6-speed manual gearbox
Engaging reverse gear Engaging 5th or 6th gear
F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5th
or 6th gear.
Failure to follow this advice could cause

permanent damage to the gearbox
(inadvertent engagement of 3rd or 4th
Downhill, with the vehicle stationary and
gear).
reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held
for a short time when you release the brake
pedal.
Engaging reverse gear
F With the clutch pedal fully down, place the
6
Operating fault gear lever in neutral.
F Move the gear lever to the right then pull it
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning back.
lamps come on, accompanied by an alert
message. Contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop to have the system
Only engage reverse gear when the
checked.
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate

starting of the engine:
- always select neutral, F Raise the ring under the knob and move the
- press the clutch pedal. gear lever to the left then forwards.
135
Driving
P. Park.
Only engage reverse gear when the To move the selector, switch on the
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle. ignition or start the engine.
brake applied or released.
When the battery charge is too low, it will
- Starting the engine.
not be possible to move the selector.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate R. Reverse.
starting the engine: - Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle
- always select neutral, stationary, engine at idle.
- press the clutch pedal. N. Neutral. Steering mounted controls
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking
brake applied.
- Starting the engine.
Automatic gearbox D. Automatic operation.
Six or eight-speed automatic gearbox with M. Manual operation with sequential
steering wheel-mounted selector. It also offers changing of the gears.
a manual mode with gear changes via steering
mounted paddles located behind the steering
wheel. To come out of position P, shift the
selector to the right to the required
position, while pressing the brake pedal to +. Control paddle to change up, to the right
the floor. of the steering wheel.
Gear selector F Pull the "+" control paddle towards you to
change up.
To select position P, move the selector to
the uppermost position (towards R), then -. Control paddle to change down, to the left
push it forwards, then to the left. of the steering wheel.
Only engage it when the vehicle is
completely stationary. In this position, the F Pull the "-" control paddle towards you to
front wheels are locked. Ensure that the change down.
selector is positioned correctly.
The steering mounted paddles do not
allow neutral to be selected, nor reverse
gear to be engaged or disengaged.
136
Driving
Displays on the instrument panel F If the parking brake is released, the vehicle
If these conditions are not met, an audible
moves off.
signal is issued together with a message.
If the parking brake is applied and automatic
mode is activated, accelerate gradually.
If P is displayed on the instrument panel

but the gear selector is in another position, If the parking brake does not release
move the selector to position P to allow automatically, check that the front doors
the engine to be started. are properly closed.
F With the engine running, press the brake

pedal. Never press the brake and accelerator
F Select automatic mode (position D), pedals at the same time. Braking or
sequential mode (position M) or reverse accelerating must be done with the
When you move the selector, the indicator
(position R). right foot only. Pressing the two pedals
corresponding to its position is displayed on the
simultaneously risks damaging the
instrument panel.
gearbox.
P. Parking. If you do not press the brake
6
R. Reverse. pedal when trying to move
N. Neutral. the gear selector out of
position P, this warning lamp If position R, D or M is selected when the
D. Drive (Automatic operation).
or this symbol appears on engine is running at idle, with the brakes
1 to 6 or 8. Gears engaged during manual
the instrument panel with the released, the vehicle moves even without
operation.
message "Shift automatic the accelerator being pressed.
-. Invalid value during manual
gearbox to P", the P symbol
operation.
flashes and a beep sounds.
Never leave children unattended in the
Starting the vehicle vehicle when the engine is running.
When carrying out maintenance with the
F With your foot on the brake pedal, select F Check that the display on the instrument engine running, apply the parking brake
position P or N. panel agrees with the position engaged. and select position P.
F Start the engine. F Gradually release the brake pedal.
137
Driving
Never select position N while the vehicle Automatic mode Temporary control of gear
is moving. If position N is selected by
changing
F Select position D.
mistake while driving, allow the engine
to return to idle, then select position D to
accelerate.
D and the gear engaged appear in the
instrument panel.
Never select position P or R unless the The gearbox operates in auto-adaptive mode,
vehicle is completely stationary. without any action by the driver. It continuously
If you wish to engage reverse gear, selects the gear best suited to the following
to prevent jolting, do not accelerate parameters:
immediately after selecting R. - optimisation of fuel consumption, You can temporarily take control of gear
Selection of position R is accompanied by - style of driving, changes using the steering mounted control
the sound of a beep. - road conditions, paddles "+" and "-". The gear change
- vehicle load. instruction is acted on if the engine speed
For maximum acceleration without touching permits.
the selector, press the accelerator fully down This function allows you to anticipate certain
(kick-down). The gearbox changes down situations, such as overtaking another vehicle
automatically or holds the gear selected until or approaching a bend in the road.
In the event of a battery failure, you the maximum engine speed is reached. After a few moments with no action on the
must place the chocks supplied with the When braking, the gearbox changes down control paddles, the gearbox returns to
vehicle tools against one of the wheels to automatically to provide effective engine automatic operation.
immobilise the vehicle. braking.
If you release the accelerator sharply, the
gearbox will not change to a higher gear for
Manual mode
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,
safety reasons. F Select position M.
never try to start the engine by pushing
F Use the steering mounted control paddles
the vehicle.
"+" and "-" to change gears.
The gears engaged are displayed in sequence
in the instrument panel.
When the vehicle is stationary or moving very
slowly, the gearbox automatically selects gear 1.
138
Driving
In sequential mode, it is not necessary to door is opened or approximately 45 seconds Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed
release the accelerator pedal when changing after the ignition is switched off, an audible restrictions permitting.
gear. signal sounds and a message appears: Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
Changing from one gear to another only F reposition the lever to position P; the a qualified workshop.
occurs if the vehicle speed and engine speed audible signal stops and the message
conditions allow; otherwise the gearbox will disappears.
operate temporarily in automatic mode. Whatever the parking circumstances, you must Gear efficiency indicator
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the apply the parking brake manually to immobilise
This system reduces fuel consumption by
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then the vehicle if automatic operation has been
recommending the most appropriate gear.
the gear actually engaged is displayed. deactivated.
Operation
In all circumstances, ensure that the
Invalid value during manual operation selector is in position P before leaving Depending on the driving situation and your
your vehicle. vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
This symbol is displayed if a gear you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can
is not engaged correctly (selector follow this instruction without engaging the
In the event of a battery failure, use the
6
between two positions). intermediate gears.
chock to immobilise your vehicle. Gear efficiency recommendations are for
information only. In fact, the road layout, the
You can change mode at any time by traffic density and safety remain the deciding
moving the gear selector from D to M or factors when choosing the best gear. The driver
vice versa. Operating fault therefore remains responsible for deciding
whether or not to follow the indications issued
If the gearbox malfunctions, the by the system.
Service warning lamp comes on in
Stopping the vehicle This function cannot be deactivated.
the instrument panel, accompanied
Before switching off the engine, you can by a message and an audible signal.
engage position P or N to place the gearbox
in neutral. In both cases, apply the parking
In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up
brake to immobilise the vehicle, unless it is
mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may then
programmed to automatic mode. With an automatic gearbox, the system is
feel a substantial jolt when changing from P to
If the lever is not in position P, when the driver's only active in manual mode.
R and from N to R. This jolt will not cause any
damage to the gearbox.
139
Driving
The information appears in the Operation For your convenience, during parking
instrument panel in the form of an
manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available
arrow. Going into engine STOP mode
for a few seconds after coming out of
reverse gear.
With a manual gearbox, the arrow may be
This indicator lamp comes on in the The Stop & Start system does not modify
accompanied by the gear recommended.
instrument panel and the engine the vehicle's functions, such as, for
This arrow may be pointing up or down,
goes into standby automatically. example, braking, power steering, etc.
depending on the context.
- With a manual gearbox, at speeds below

12 mph (20 km/h), or with the vehicle
The system adapts its gear efficiency stationary (with the PureTech 110, 130 and Never refuel with the engine in STOP
recommendation according to the driving BlueHDi 100, 130 versions), when you place mode; you must switch off the ignition with
conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the the gear lever in neutral and you release the the "START/STOP" button.
driver's requirements (power, acceleration, clutch pedal,
braking, etc.). - With an automatic gearbox, at speeds
The system never suggests: below 2 mph (3 km/h), or when the vehicle
- engaging first gear, Special cases: STOP mode not
is stationary (depending on version), when
- engaging reverse gear. available
you press the brake pedal or place the gear
selector into position N. STOP mode is not invoked when:
If your vehicle is fitted with this system, a time - the driver's door is open,
Stop & Start counter calculates the sum of the periods in - the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system STOP mode during a journey. It resets to zero - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust every time the ignition is switched on with the (10 km/h) since the last engine start using
emissions as well as the noise level when "START/STOP" button. the "START/STOP" button,
stationary. - the electric parking brake is applied or being
applied,
The Stop & Start system puts the engine
- the engine is needed to maintain
temporarily into standby – STOP mode – during
a comfortable temperature in the passenger
stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or
compartment,
other, etc.). The engine restarts automatically –
- demisting is active,
START mode – as soon as you wish to move off
again.
Restarting occurs instantaneously, quickly and
silently.
140
Driving
- certain special conditions (battery charge, Special cases: START mode The system can be deactivated at any time,
engine temperature, braking assistance, activated automatically once the ignition is switched on.
exterior temperature, etc.) where the engine If the engine is in STOP mode, it then restarts.
START mode is activated automatically if:
is needed for control of the system. The Stop & Start system is reactivated
- you open the driver's door,
automatically every time the ignition is switched
- you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
on.
In this case, this indicator lamp - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 16 mph
flashes for a few seconds then goes (25 km/h) with a manual gearbox (2 mph The Stop & Start is deactivated in the Driving
off. (3 km/h) with PureTech 110, 130, THP 165, menu of the touch screen.
180 and BlueHDi 100, 130 versions), 2 mph Select "Stop & Start" to deactivate the system.
This operation is perfectly normal. (3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox,
- the electric parking brake is being applied,
- certain specific conditions (battery charge, It is indicated by this warning lamp
engine temperature, braking assistance, coming on.
Going into engine START mode air conditioning setting, etc.) where the
engine is needed for control of the system
This indicator lamp goes off and the or vehicle. Select "Stop & Start" again to reactivate the
engine restarts automatically. function.
6
- With a manual gearbox, when you fully It is indicated by this indicator lamp
depress the clutch pedal. coming on.
- With an automatic gearbox:
• gear selector in position D or M, when In this case, this indicator lamp
flashes for a few seconds, then goes Use of the adaptive cruise control
you release the brake pedal,
off. deactivates the Stop & Start function.
• or gear selector in position N and brake
pedal released, when you place the gear
This operation is perfectly normal.
selector in position D or M,
• or when you engage reverse gear.
Deactivation/Manual Operating fault
reactivation
If the system fails, this warning lamp
In certain circumstances, such as to
flashes for a few seconds before
maintain the temperature in the passenger
lighting up continuously, associated
compartment, it may be necessary to
with a message.
deactivate the Stop & Start system.
141
Driving
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or

Driving on flooded roads The under-inflation detection system does
Before driving in a flooded area, it is not replace the need for vigilance on the
If a fault occurs in STOP mode, the engine may
strongly recommended that you deactivate part of the driver.
stall.
the Stop & Start system. This system does not avoid the need to
All of the instrument panel warning lamps come
For more information on Driving advice, check the tyre pressures (including the
on.
particularly on flooded roads, refer to the spare wheel) every month as well as
Depending on version, an alert message may also
corresponding section. before a long journey.
be displayed, asking you to place the gear lever in
Driving with under-inflated tyres worsens
position N and press the brake pedal.
road-holding, lengthens braking distances,
It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and
causes premature wear of the tyres,
start the engine again using the "START/STOP"
button. Tyre under-inflation particularly in adverse conditions (heavy
loads, high speeds, long journeys).
The Stop & Start requires the use of
detection
a 12 V battery of special specification and System which automatically checks the
technology. pressures of the tyres while driving.
All work on this type of battery must be
The system monitors the pressure of the four Driving with under-inflated tyres
carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or
tyres when the vehicle is moving. increases fuel consumption.
For more information on the 12 V battery, It compares the information given by the
refer to the corresponding section. wheel speed sensors with reference values,
which must be reinitialised after every tyre
The inflation pressures defined for your
pressure adjustment or wheel change.
vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure
The system triggers an alert as soon as it
label.
detects a drop in the pressure of one or more
For more information on the
Opening the bonnet tyres.
Identification markings, refer to the
corresponding section.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,

deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid
the risk of injury related to an automatic
change to START mode.
142
Driving
F If it is not possible to make this check

Checking tyre pressures Snow chains
immediately, drive carefully at reduced
This check should be done when the tyres The system does not have to be
speed.
are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or reinitialised after fitting or removing snow
or
after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) chains.
F In case of a puncture, use the temporary
at moderate speeds).
puncture repair kit or the spare wheel
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the Reinitialisation of the system is done on the
(depending on equipment).
values indicated on the label. touch screen, with the ignition on and the
The alert is kept active until the system is vehicle stationary.
reinitialised. F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving
functions" tab, then "Under-inflation
Under-inflation alert initialisation".
This is indicated by continuous Reinitialisation F Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes",

illumination of this warning lamp, The system must be reinitialised after any an audible signal and a message confirm
an audible signal and, depending adjustment to the pressures of one or more the reinitialisation.
on equipment, the display of tyres, and after changing one or more wheels. The new pressure parameters saved are
a message. treated as reference values by the system.
6
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive
steering movements and sudden braking.
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do Malfunction
so.
Before reinitialising the system, ensure
that the pressures of the four tyres
The loss of pressure detected does not are correct for the conditions of use
always cause visible bulging of the tyre. of the vehicle and conform to the The flashing and then fixed illumination of the
Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual recommendations on the tyre pressure under-inflation warning lamp accompanied
check. label. by illumination of the Service warning lamp
The under-inflation alert can only be relied indicates a fault with the system.
on if the reinitialisation of the system has A message appears, accompanied by an
F If you have a compressor, such as the one been done with the pressures in the four audible signal.
in the temporary puncture repair kit, check tyres correctly adjusted. In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the
the pressures of the four tyres when cold. The under-inflation detection system tyres is no longer provided.
does not give a warning if a pressure is Have the system checked by a CITROËN
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation. dealer or a qualified workshop.
143
Driving
After carrying out any work on the system, Speed Limit recognition
the pressure of the four tyres must be
checked and the system reinitialised.
and recommendation
Memorising speeds
This function allows speeds to be saved, which
can then be offered to set the two systems: the
speed limiter (to limit the speed of the vehicle) F Select the system for which you want to
or the cruise control (for a vehicle cruising memorise new speed settings.
This system allows the speed limit detected by
speed). F Press the button corresponding to the the camera to be displayed in the instrument
You can memorise up to six speed settings speed setting you want to modify. panel.
for each of the two systems. By default, some
F Enter the new value using the numerical The system also processes speed limit
speed settings are already memorised.
keypad and confirm. information from the navigation system
mapping.
Memorisation
As a safety measure, the driver must carry You should update your navigation
This function can be accessed in the Driving mapping regularly in order to receive
out these operations when stationary.
menu of the touch screen. accurate speed limit information from the
F Select the "Driving functions" tab then system.
Adjusting Speeds.
Specific speed limits, such as those for heavy

goods vehicles, are not displayed.
The display of the speed limit in the instrument
panel is updated as you pass a speed limit sign
intended for cars (light vehicles).
144
Driving
The speed limit units (mph or km/h) To maintain correct operation of the
depend on the country you are driving in. system: regularly clean the area in front of
This should be taken into account in order the camera.
to observe the speed limit. The internal surface of the windscreen can The system is active but is not detecting speed
For the system to operate correctly when also become misted around the camera. limit information.
you change country, the units for speed in In humid and cold weather, demist the
the instrument panel must be those for the windscreen regularly.
country you are driving in.
Activation/Deactivation On detection of speed limit information, the

Activation and deactivation of the system is system displays the value.
The automatic reading of road signs is done in the touch screen's Driving menu.
a driving assistance system and does not Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then
always display speed limits correctly. "Security"/"Safety" and "Recommended
Operating limits
The speed limit signs present on the road speed display". The legislation on speed limits is specific to
always take priority over the display by the each country.
6
system. Displays in the instrument panel The system does not take account of reduced
The system cannot in any circumstances speed limits in the following cases:
replace the need for vigilance on the part - poor weather (rain, snow),
of the driver. - atmospheric pollution,
The driver must observe the driving - when towing,
regulations and must adapt the speed of - driving with a space-saver type spare wheel
the vehicle to suit the weather and traffic. or snow chains fitted,
The system may not display the speed - puncture repair using the temporary repair
limit if it does not detect a speed limit sign kit,
within a preset period. - young drivers, etc.
The system is designed to detect signs
that conform to the Vienna Convention on The following situations may interfere with
road signs. the operation of the system or prevent it from
1. Detected speed limit indication. working:
or - poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
2. Indication of the end of the speed limit. falling snow, rain, fog),
145
Driving
- windscreen area located in front of the Steering mounted controls Memorising the speed
camera dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow-
covered, damaged or covered by a sticker,
- fault with the camera,
- obsolete or incorrect mapping,
- obstructed road signs (by other vehicles, F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control.
vegetation, snow), Speed limiter/cruise control information is
- speed limit signs that do not conform to the displayed.
standard, are damaged or distorted.
On detection of a sign offering a new speed
1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode. limit, the system displays the value and MEM
2. Memorise a speed setting. flashes for a few seconds to offer to make it
a new speed setting.
Recommendation
Display in the instrument panel
If there is a difference of less than 6 mph
(10 km/h) between the speed setting and
the speed displayed by the Speed Limit
In addition to Speed Limit recognition and recognition and recommendation, the
recommendation, the driver can select the MEM symbol is not displayed.
speed displayed as a speed setting for the
speed limiter or cruise control using the speed
limiter or cruise control memorisation button. Depending on the road conditions, several
speeds may be displayed.
F Make an initial press on button 2 to request

For more information on the Speed saving of the speed suggested.
limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive 3. Speed limit indication. A message is displayed to confirm the request.
cruise control, refer to the corresponding
4. Memorise the speed.
sections. F Press button 2 again to confirm and save
5. Current speed setting.
the new speed setting.
After a predetermined period, the screen
returns to the current display.
146
Driving
Speed limiter "LIMIT" Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
System which prevents the

vehicle from exceeding the speed
programmed by the driver.
Once the programmed speed limit is reached,

additional pressure on the accelerator pedal
has no effect.
1. Select speed limiter mode.
Operation of the speed limiter requires 2. Decrease the programmed speed.
a programmed speed of at least 19 mph 3. Increase the programmed speed.
(30 km/h).
4. Speed limiter On/Pause. 6. Speed limiter on/off indicator.
The speed limiter is paused using the control.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds or 7. Speed limiter mode selected.
The programmed speed can be exceeded
Use the speed suggested by the Speed 8. Value of the speed setting.
temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly
Limit recognition and recommendation
beyond the point of resistance.
6
system.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal until the set Switching on/Pause
For more information on Memorising speeds,
speed limit has been reached again.
refer to the corresponding section. F Turn wheel 1 to the LIMIT position: the
For more information on Speed Limit speed limiter mode is selected but is not
recognition and recommendation and its switched on (Pause).
memorisation, refer to the corresponding F Switch the speed limiter on by pressing
The programmed speed remains in the system section. button 4, if the speed displayed is suitable
memory when the ignition is switched off. (by default, the last speed programmed).
F You can pause the speed limiter by pressing
button 4 again: the display confirms that it
The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances, has been stopped (Pause).
replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
147
Driving
Adjusting the Speed Limit Temporarily exceeding the

recognition and recommendation programmed speed
setting F Press firmly on the accelerator pedal,
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on going beyond the point of resistance, to
in order to set the speed. exceed the programmed speed limit. On sharp acceleration, as when
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily descending a steep hill, the speed limiter
To modify the limit speed setting from the
and the displayed programmed speed flashes. will not be able to prevent the vehicle from
current speed of the vehicle:
An audible signal accompanies the flashing
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make exceeding the programmed speed.
of the programmed speed when exceeding An audible signal accompanies the
successive short presses on button 2 or 3,
the speed is not due to an action by the driver
F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h), flashing of the programmed speed when
(steep hill, etc.). exceeding the speed is not due to an
press and hold button 2 or 3.
As soon as the vehicle's speed returns to the action by the driver.
To modify the limit speed setting using programmed value, the limiter operates again: The use of mats not approved by
memorised speeds and from the touch screen: the display of the programmed speed becomes CITROËN may interfere with the operation
F press button 5 to display the memorised steady again. of the speed limiter.
speed settings,
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
F press the button for the desired speed
setting. Switching off - ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
The selection screen closes after a few
F Turn wheel 1 to the 0 position. The display - never fit one mat on top of another.
moments.
of information related to the speed limiter
This setting becomes the new limit speed.
disappears.
To modify the limit speed setting from the
speed suggested by the vehicle Speed Limit
Malfunction
recognition and recommendation:
F the speed suggested is displayed in the Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the
instrument panel,
F make a first press on button 5; a message
speed limiter.
Cruise control "CRUISE"
is displayed to confirm the memorisation a qualified workshop.
System which automatically
request,
maintains the speed of the vehicle
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
at the value programmed by the
speed.
driver, without any action on the
The speed displays immediately in the
accelerator pedal.
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
148
Driving
Operation of the cruise control requires Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
a vehicle speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h).
As well as engagement:
- of third gear or higher with a manual
gearbox,
- of second gear or higher in manual mode
with an automatic gearbox,
- of position D with an automatic gearbox.
The cruise control is paused manually by
pressing button 4 or pressing the brake pedal
or if the ESC system is invoked for safety 1. Select cruise control mode.
reasons. 2. Set the current speed as the cruise speed
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed setting/Reduce the cruise speed setting.
temporarily by depressing the accelerator 3. Set the current speed as the cruise speed 6. Cruise control pause/resume indication.
pedal. setting/Increase the cruise speed setting. 7. Cruise control selection indication.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
4. Pause/Resume cruise control. 8. Value of the speed setting.
release the accelerator pedal until the
5. Display the list of memorised speeds or
6
programmed cruise speed is reached again. For more information on Memorising speeds,
Use the speed suggested by the sSpeed
Limit recognition and recommendation refer to the corresponding section.
system. For more information on Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation and its
memorisation, refer to the corresponding
Switching off the ignition cancels any
section.
programmed speed setting.
Switching on
The cruise control system cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it F Turn wheel 1 to the CRUISE position: cruise
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. control mode is selected but the function is
It is recommended that you always keep your feet close paused.
to the pedals.
149
Driving
F Press button 2 or 3: your vehicle's current To modify the cruise speed setting using Switching off
speed becomes the cruise speed. memorised speed settings and from the touch
The cruise control is activated (ON). screen: F Turn wheel 1 to the 0 position. The display
F press button 5 to display the memorised of information related to the cruise control
speed settings, disappears.
Pause F press the button for the desired speed
You can temporarily stop the speed limiter by setting.
pressing button 4 again: the display confirms
Operating fault
The selection screen closes after a few
that it has been stopped (Pause). moments. Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the
This setting becomes the new cruise speed. cruise control.
Modifying the cruise speed To modify the cruise speed setting using a qualified workshop.
the speed suggested by the Speed Limit
setting recognition and recommendation system:
The cruise control must be active. F the speed suggested is displayed in the
instrument panel,
To modify the cruise speed setting from the
F make a first press on button 5; a message
current speed of the vehicle:
is displayed to confirm the memorisation
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make
request,
successive short presses on button 2 or 3,
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h),
speed.
press and hold button 2 or 3.
The speed displays immediately in the
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
Take care: pressing and holding button
2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the Exceeding the programmed
speed of your vehicle.
speed
If the speed setting is exceeded, the displayed
As a precaution, it is recommended speed flashes.
that the cruise speed chosen be close The display becomes steady again once the
to the current speed of your vehicle, so speed of the vehicle has reached the level of
as to avoid any sudden acceleration or the speed setting again.
deceleration of the vehicle.
150
Driving
When the cruise control is switched on, be Adaptive cruise control Principles of operation
careful if you maintain the pressure on one
Using radar with a range of about 100 metres,
of the programmed speed modification
The system allows the speed of located at the front of the vehicle, this system
buttons: this may result in a very rapid
your vehicle to be maintained at the detects a vehicle travelling in front of your
change in the speed of your vehicle.
setting you have made, and also to vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on slippery
respect the inter-vehicle time that It automatically adapts the speed of your
roads or in heavy traffic.
you have selected between your vehicle to that of the vehicle in front.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
vehicle and the one in front, when If the vehicle in front is travelling more slowly,
control system cannot prevent the vehicle
the situation permits it. the system progressively reduces the speed of
from exceeding the programmed speed.
your vehicle using just engine braking (as if the
On steep climbs or when towing, the
driver had pressed the "-" button).
programmed speed may not be reached
If your vehicle is too close to the vehicle in
or maintained.
Switching between the front or is approaching it too quickly, adaptive
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the operation
types of cruise control cruise control is automatically deactivated.
The driver is then alerted by an audible signal
of the cruise control. The choice between "adaptive" and "standard"
accompanied by a message.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: cruise control is made in the Driving menu.
6
If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes
- ensure that mats are secured correctly,
lane, the adaptive cruise control gradually
- never fit one mat on top of another. F Turn the cruise control wheel to accelerates your vehicle to return to the
the "CRUISE" position. programmed speed.
If the driver operates the direction indicator to
the left (left-hand drive) or to the right (right-
F In the Driving menu, select the Driving
hand drive), to overtake a slower vehicle, the
functions tab and then Active cruise
adaptive cruise control allows your vehicle to
control to activate or deactivate adaptive
temporarily approach the vehicle in front to
cruise control.
assist the overtaking manoeuvre, though never
exceeding the programmed speed.
For more information on the Cruise
control, refer to the corresponding
section.
The adaptive cruise control operates
by day and at night, in fog or moderate
rainfall.
151
Driving
- when the speed of the vehicle in front is too

The adaptive cruise control uses only If the cruise speed setting is above
low,
engine braking to slow the vehicle. 93 mph (150 km/h), the adaptive cruise
- when the speed of your vehicle becomes
Consequently the vehicle loses speed control switches to standard cruise control
too low.
slowly, as when releasing the accelerator mode, without automatic regulation of the
pedal. inter-vehicle safety distance (a message
The regulation range is limited: there will appears in the instrument panel). The inter-vehicle time setting is
no longer be any adjustment of speed if the memorised when switching off the ignition.
difference between the programmed speed
setting and the speed of the vehicle in front
becomes too high (19 mph (30 km/h)). The adaptive cruise control cannot in any
circumstances replace the observation of Steering mounted control
speed limits, nor the need for the vigilance
If the difference between the programmed on the part of the driver.
speed setting and the speed of the It is recommended that you always keep
vehicle in front is too great, the speed your feet close to the pedals.
cannot be adjusted: the cruise control is
automatically deactivated.
The adaptive cruise control can be paused
manually or automatically:
- by pressing button 4,
General information - by pressing the brake pedal,
- if the ESC system is activated, for safety
The adaptive cruise control is switched on reasons,
manually, it requires the speed of the vehicle - if there is an action on the electric parking 1. Select cruise control mode.
to be between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 93 mph brake control,
2. Use the current speed as the speed
(150 km/h) and the engagement of: - when an inter-vehicle time threshold is
setting/Lower the speed setting.
- third gear or higher with a manual gearbox, reached (calculated according to the relative
- second gear in manual mode with an 3. Use the current speed as the speed
speeds of your vehicle and the vehicle
automatic gearbox, setting/Raise the speed setting.
in front and the inter-vehicle time setting
- position D with an automatic gearbox. chosen), 4. Pause/Resume cruise control.
- when the distance between your vehicle
and the one in front becomes too short,
152
Driving
5. Display the list of memorised speeds or, 9. Value of the programmed speed or F choose a speed setting: it is displayed on
Use the speed suggested by the Speed adjusted speed below the programmed the instrument panel.
Limit recognition and recommendation speed. The selection screen closes after a few
system. moments. The modification is then accepted.
6. Display and adjustment of the - by pressing button 5, if your vehicle is
programmed inter-vehicle distance. Operation equipped with speed limit recognition:
Switching on F the speed to be memorised appears on
For more information on Memorising speeds, the instrument panel.
refer to the corresponding section. Adaptive cruise control must be selected in the F press button 5 again to save the speed.
For more information on Speed Limit Driving menu. The value appears immediately on the
recognition and recommendation and its F Turn wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position: instrument panel.
memorisation, refer to the corresponding cruise control mode is selected but the
section. function is paused. For more information on Speed Limit
F Press one of the buttons 2 or 3: the current recognition and recommendation and its
speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise memorisation, refer to the corresponding
Displays on the instrument speed setting. section.
panel The cruise control is activated (ON).
6
By default, the inter-vehicle time is set at
2 seconds.
Otherwise, the last setting made will be used As a precaution, it is recommended that
when switching on the system. you select a cruise speed setting close to
the current speed of your vehicle.
Modification of the cruise speed

Information is grouped together on the
- using buttons 2 or 3:
instrument panel.
F by successive short presses, to change
Changing the inter-vehicle
in steps of + or – 1 mph (km/h),
distance
7. Cruise control pause/resume indication.
8. Cruise control selection indication, or F by a maintained press, to change in steps Press button 6 to select a new inter-vehicle
vehicle speed adjustment phase. of + or – 5 mph (km/h). distance setting from the three levels ("Close",
- pressing button 5: "Normal", "Distant").
F the six speeds memorised are displayed This setting remains memorised, whatever the
in the touch screen, state of the system.
153
Driving
If a vehicle presence is detected by the Driving situations and

radar and if the speed selected is much associated alerts
higher than the speed of that vehicle,
the system does not activate and the The table below describes the alerts and
alert message "Activation not possible, messages displayed depending on the driving
conditions unsuitable" is displayed until situation.
the driving conditions are safe to allow The display of these alerts is not sequential.
activation of the system.
Exceeding the programmed

setting
It is possible to exceed the speed setting

temporarily by depressing the accelerator
pedal.
Then simply release the accelerator pedal to
return to the programmed speed.
If the programmed setting is unintentionally
exceeded, descending a steep hill for example,
the speed setting in the instrument panel
flashes as a warning.
154
Driving
Display on the Associated

Symbol Comments
instrument panel message
No vehicle detected:
the system operates as a standard cruise control.
Detection of a vehicle, at the limit of the range of the radar:

the system operates as a standard cruise control.
"SPEED Detection of a vehicle that is too close or running at a speed lower than your vehicle's
ADJUSTED" cruise speed setting.
The system uses engine braking to slow your vehicle and then hold it at the speed of the
vehicle in front so as to observe the programmed inter-vehicle time.
The regulation range is limited to a maximum difference of 19 mph (30 km/h) between the
cruise speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front.
"SPEED
ADJUSTED"
When the adjusted speed reaches the limit of regulation (speed setting – 19 mph
(30 km/h)), the adjusted speed flashes together with the speed setting to signal that
automatic deactivation of the system is imminent.
6
"Cruise If the system exceeds the limit of speed adjustment that it can make and in the absence of
control any reaction by the driver (operation of the direction indicator, change of lane, reduction in
paused". the speed of the vehicle), the system is automatically paused.
The display of the deactivation message is accompanied by an audible signal.
155
Driving
- if the system does not slow the vehicle

When the adaptive cruise control is
enough to continue to maintain a safe
automatically paused, it can only be
distance, for example when descending
reactivated when safe conditions are
a steep hill.
restored. The message "Activation
not possible, conditions unsuitable" The regulation range is limited to a maximum
- vehicles not running in the middle of the
is displayed while reactivation is not difference of 19 mph (30 km/h) between the
lane,
possible. cruise speed setting and the speed of the
When the conditions allow, it is vehicle in front. Above this, the system goes into
recommended that the function be pause if the safety distance becomes too short.
reactivated by pressing button 2 or 3,
which will make the current speed of your Poor weather conditions (very heavy
vehicle the new cruise speed setting, rain, accumulation of snow in front of the
rather than by pressing button 4 (on/ radar) may hinder the operation of the
pause) which reactivates the cruise control system, with the display of the operating
using the old cruise speed setting, which fault message "SYSTEM INACTIVE:
may be very different from the current Reduced visibility". The function remains - vehicles entering a corner,
speed of your vehicle. unavailable until the message disappears. - vehicles changing lane at the last moment.
The cruise control does not take account of:

- stationary vehicles,
Operating limits Since the radar detection range is relatively - vehicles driving in the opposite direction.
narrow, it is possible that the system cannot
The adaptive cruise control uses only engine
detect:
braking to slow the vehicle. Consequently the
vehicle loses speed slowly, as when releasing Malfunction
the accelerator pedal.
The system is paused automatically: In the event of a malfunction of the adaptive
- if the vehicle in front slows down too much cruise control system, you are warned by an
or too suddenly, and the driver does not audible signal and the display of the message
brake, - vehicles of reduced width, such as "Driving aid functions fault".
- if a vehicle comes between your vehicle and motorcycles, for example, Have the system checked by a CITROËN
the vehicle in front. dealer or a qualified workshop.
156
Driving
This system provides the following

When the cruise control is working, take Operation of the radar, located in the
functions:
care if keeping pressed one of the cruise front bumper, may be impaired by the
- Automatically maintains the
control programmed speed change accumulation of dirt (dust, mud, etc.) or in
vehicle at the speed set by the
buttons: this can lead to a very rapid certain weather conditions (snow, frost,
driver.
change in the speed of your vehicle. etc.).
- Automatic adjustment of the
Do not use adaptive cruise control on The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE:
distance between your vehicle
slippery surfaces or in heavy traffic. Reduced visibility". is displayed to indicate
and the one in front.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise that the function is in standby.
control system cannot prevent the vehicle Clean the front bumper regularly. With an automatic gearbox, automatic
from exceeding the programmed speed. If the front bumper is to be repainted or adjustment of the distance can cause your
On steep climbs or when towing, the retouched, contact a CITROËN dealer vehicle to come to a complete stop.
programmed speed may not be reached or a qualified workshop. Certain types of
or maintained. paint could interfere with the operation of
The use of mats not approved by the radar.
CITROËN may interfere with the operation Cruise control remains active after
of the cruise control. changing gear regardless of the gearbox
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: type.
6
- ensure that mats are secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Adaptive cruise control
until vehicle is stopped/ It manages the acceleration and deceleration
of the vehicle by automatically acting on the
until 19 mph (30 km/h) engine and the braking system.
Function until vehicle is stopped: with
automatic gearbox
Function until 19 mph (30 km/h): with manual
gearbox
For this purpose there is a radar installed in the

front bumper.
157
Driving

Primarily designed for driving on main This system is a driving aid that cannot,
setting/decrease the speed setting.
roads and motorways, this system only in any circumstances, replace the need to
works on moving vehicles, driving in the observe speed limits and safety distances,
setting/increase the speed setting.
same direction as your vehicle. nor the need for vigilance on the part of
the driver. 4. Pause/Resume cruise control.
Some vehicles present on the road may 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed
not be properly seen or may be poorly Limit recognition and recommendation.
Principle of operation interpreted by the camera and/or radar 6. Display and adjustment of the
(e.g. a lorry), which may lead to a poor programmed inter-vehicle distance.
The system automatically adapts the speed of
assessment of the distances and lead to
your vehicle to that of the vehicle in front, to For more information on the Speed Limit
the vehicle inappropriately accelerating or
maintain a constant distance. recognition and recommendation, refer to
braking.
If the vehicle in front is driving more slowly, the the corresponding section.
The driver must be ready at all times
system slows or even stops your vehicle, using
to retake control of their vehicle by
engine braking and the braking system (for
permanently holding both hands on the
versions fitted with an automatic gearbox).
steering wheel and keeping their feet near
If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes
the brake and accelerator pedals.
Displays in the instrument
lane, the cruise control progressively panel
accelerates your vehicle to return to the
programmed speed.
If the driver operates a direction indicator to Steering mounted control
overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise control
allows your vehicle to temporarily approach
the vehicle in front to assist the overtaking
manoeuvre, though never exceeding the
programmed speed.
7. Indication of the presence/absence of

a target vehicle.
8. Indication of cruise control activation/
The brake lamps illuminate as soon as deactivation.
the braking system is activated with 9. Value of the speed setting.
deceleration of the vehicle. 1. Select cruise control mode.
158
Driving
10. Indication that vehicle is held stationary With a manual gearbox • When changing from mode D to N with an
(versions fitted with an automatic With the speed of the vehicle between 19 and automatic gearbox.
gearbox). 99 mph (30 and 160 km/h): - or automatically:
11. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit F When the vehicle is moving, press one of • If the ESC system is activated, for safety
recognition and recommendation. the buttons 2 or 3: the current speed of your reasons.
vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting. • When the speed of the vehicle falls below
As soon as a vehicle is detected, the symbol The cruise control starts operating (displayed 19 mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox.
7 is filled with the colour associated with the in green).
cruise control mode. By default, the symbol 7 is
empty. With an automatic gearbox
When the cruise control is in operation, the Mode D or M must be selected.
symbols 7 and 8 are displayed in green. By With the speed of the vehicle between 19 and When the cruise control is paused, it
default, they are displayed in grey. 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h): can only be reactivated when all of the
F When the vehicle is moving, press one of safety conditions are met. The message
the buttons 2 or 3: the current speed of your "Activation not possible, conditions
vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting. unsuitable" is displayed while reactivation
is not possible.
6
Remembering the settings
Switching off the ignition cancels any speed
12. Inter-vehicle distance setting.
setting value chosen by the driver.
13. Position of vehicle detected by the radar.
By default, the inter-vehicle distance is set
Reactivating the function
This information is visible in the instrument at "Normal" (2 dashes). Otherwise, the last Versions fitted with a manual gearbox
panel in "DRIVING" display mode. setting made will be used when switching on To reactivate the function, the driver must
the system. accelerate to reach at least 19 mph (30 km/h),
then press one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4.
Switching on
Pause Versions fitted with an automatic gearbox
To switch on the cruise control
The cruise control can be paused manually by: Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to
F With the engine running, turn the wheel
- action by the driver: a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle
1 to the "CRUISE" position. The system is
• On the button 4 (Pause). stationary; the cruise control is paused.
paused (grey display).
• On the brake pedal.
• On the electric parking brake control.
• On the clutch pedal, by pressing and
holding for more than 5 seconds.
159
Driving
The driver should press the accelerator pedal Modification of the programmed
Take care: pressing and holding button
to move off, then reactivate the system above
19 mph (30 km/h) by pressing button 2, 3 or 4.
2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the inter-vehicle distance
speed of your vehicle.
If the driver takes no action following this
immobilisation, the electric parking brake is
applied automatically after a while (approx. five
minutes). Modification from the
Speed Limit recognition and
recommendation system Three threshold settings are suggested for the
inter-vehicle distance:
As a safety measure, wait until the current F The suggested speed is displayed in the - "Distant" (3 dashes),
speed approaches the speed setting to instrument panel. - "Normal" (2 dashes),
reactivate the function by pressing button 4. F Make an initial press on button 5; a - "Close" (1 dash).
message is displayed to confirm the
memorisation request. Engine running and with the wheel at the
F Press button 5 again to save the suggested "CRUISE" position:
Modification of the speed speed. F Press button 6 to display the selection
setting The speed displays immediately in the screen for inter-vehicle distance.
With the engine running and cruise control on instrument panel as the new speed setting. F By pressing button 6 repeatedly, cycle
(green), you can modify the speed setting. through the predefined settings.
For more information on the Speed Limit The selection screen closes after a few
recognition and recommendation, refer to seconds.
Modification from the current the corresponding section. The modification is then accepted.
speed
This setting remains in memory, whatever the
F By successive short presses on button 2 or As a precaution, it is recommended state of the system and when the ignition is
3, to lower or raise the setting in steps of + that you select a cruise speed close to switched off.
or – 1 mph (km/h), the current speed of your vehicle, so
F By a maintained press on button 2 or 3, to as to avoid any sudden acceleration or The selection also applies to the stopping
lower or raise the setting in steps of + or – deceleration of the vehicle. distance (versions with EAT6 and
5 mph (km/h). EAT8 automatic gearbox).
160
Driving
Exceeding the programmed Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments

setting
"Cruise control paused" System paused.
It is possible to exceed the speed setting
No vehicle detected.
temporarily by depressing the accelerator
pedal. (grey)
The cruise control no longer manages the
"Cruise control paused" System paused.
braking system during this period.
A vehicle has been
Simply release the accelerator pedal to return
(grey) detected.
to the programmed speed.
If the programmed speed setting is exceeded,

"Cruise control on" System activated.
the display of the speed setting disappears
No vehicle detected.
and a message "Cruise control suspended"
is displayed until the accelerator pedal is
according to
released. (green)
the inter-vehicle
distance selected
Driving situations and
associated alerts
6
"Cruise control on" System activated.
A vehicle has been
To benefit from all necessary information on detected.
the instrument panel, you must select the
(green)
"DRIVING" display mode beforehand.
The table below describes the alerts and according to
messages displayed depending on the driving the inter-vehicle
situation. distance selected
The display of these alerts is not sequential. "Cruise control System activated.
suspended" The driver has
temporarily taken
or control of the vehicle by
accelerating.
(green)
161
Driving
Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments
"Take back control of the The driver must take

+ vehicle" back control of the
vehicle by accelerating
or braking, depending on
(green) (orange)
the circumstances.
"Take back control of the The system cannot

+ vehicle" manage the critical
situation alone
(emergency braking of
(green) (red)
the target vehicle, rapid
insertion of another
vehicle between the two
vehicles).
The driver must
immediately take back
control of the vehicle.
"Activation not possible, The system refuses

70 conditions unsuitable" to activate the cruise
control (speed outside
or the operating range,
(orange)
winding road).
70
(grey)
162
Driving
Versions fitted with an automatic gearbox When the driver must suspend the cruise
control system:
Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments
"Cruise control paused" The system has brought

(for a few seconds) the vehicle to a complete
stop and is holding it
or immobilised.
The driver must
according to
accelerate to move off - Vehicles in a tight bend.
the inter-vehicle
again. - When approaching a roundabout.
(grey)/(green) distance selected
The cruise control
and the actual
remains paused until the
distance from the
driver reactivates it.
target vehicle
Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to Cases of non-detection by the radar:
6
a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle - Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. - When following a narrow vehicle.
stationary; the cruise control is paused. - Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, Reactivate cruise control when conditions
The driver should press the accelerator etc.). permit.
pedal to move off, then reactivate the
system by pressing one of buttons 2, 3 or Cases where the driver is urged to take
4. If the driver takes no action following this back control immediately:
immobilisation, the electric parking brake is - Excessively sharp deceleration of the
applied automatically after a while (approx. five vehicle in front of you.
minutes).
- Vehicles crossing your lane.
Operating limits - Oncoming vehicles.
The system cannot exceed the limits of the
laws of physics.
The system cannot deal with certain situations
- When a vehicle cuts in sharply between
and the driver has to take back control of the
your vehicle and the one in front.
vehicle.
163
Driving
The system must not be activated in the

The cruise control operates by day and The system is not intended for the
following situations:
night, in fog or moderate rainfall. following situations:
- When the "space-saver" spare wheel is
However, it is strongly recommended - the front end of the vehicle has been
being used (depending on version).
that you always adapt your speed and modified (addition of long-range
- When towing.
your safety distance from vehicles ahead headlamps, painting of the front
- Following an impact on the front bumper.
according to the driving conditions, the bumper),
weather and the road surface. - driving on a racing track,
Be particularly careful:
Use the cruise control only where - driving on a rolling road,
- When motorcycles are present and
the driving conditions allow running - use of snow chains, non-slip covers or
when there are vehicles staggered
at a constant speed and keeping an studded tyres.
onto the traffic lane.
adequate safety distance. The use of mats not approved by
- When you enter a tunnel or cross
Do not activate the cruise control in urban CITROËN may interfere with the operation
a bridge.
areas where pedestrians are likely to of the cruise control.
cross the road, in heavy traffic, on winding To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
or steep roads, on slippery or flooded - ensure that the mat is secured
roads, when there is snowfall, if the front correctly,
bumper is damaged or when the brake - never fit one mat on top of another.
lamps have failed.
In certain circumstances, it may not
be possible for the speed setting to be
maintained or even reached: loaded
vehicle, ascending a steep hill, etc.
164
Driving
The following situations may interfere with Malfunction Active Safety Brake with
the operation of the system or prevent it
from working:
Collision Risk Alert and
- poor visibility (inadequate street
If the cruise control
malfunctions, dashes are
Intelligent emergency
lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense displayed instead of the braking assistance
fog, etc.), cruise control speed setting.
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
If this warning lamp comes
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
on, accompanied by an
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
alert message and an
shade and light, etc.),
audible signal, this confirms
- camera or radar masked (mud, frost, The system allows:
a malfunction.
snow, condensation, etc.). - the driver to be warned that their vehicle is
In these situations, detection performance Have the system checked by a CITROËN at risk of collision with the vehicle in front,
may be reduced. dealer or a qualified workshop. - a collision to be prevented, or its severity to
The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE: be limited, by reducing the vehicle's speed.
Reduced visibility". is displayed to indicate
that the function is in standby. This system is a driving aid that includes three
6
The adaptive cruise control deactivates functions:
automatically if the use of a "space-saver" - Collision Risk Alert (alert if there is a risk of
type spare wheel is detected or if there is collision),
a malfunction on the lateral brake lamps or - Intelligent emergency braking assistance,
Clean the front bumper regularly.
trailer brake lamps (for approved trailers). - Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency
If the front bumper is to be repainted or
retouched, contact a CITROËN dealer braking).
or a qualified workshop. Certain types of
paint could interfere with the operation of
the radar.
165
Driving
Deactivation/Activation The following situations may interfere with

By default, the system is automatically the operation of the system or prevent it
activated at every engine start. from working:
The system can be deactivated or activated via - poor visibility (inadequate street
the vehicle settings menu. lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense
fog, etc.),
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
Deactivation of the system is
signalled by the illumination of this
indicator lamp, accompanied by the
display of a message.
The vehicle has a camera located at the top of - camera or radar obstructed (mud, frost,
the windscreen, and, depending on the version, snow, condensation, etc.).
a radar located in the front bumper. Operating conditions and On versions with camera alone, this
message indicates to you that the camera
limits
This system is designed to assist the is obstructed: "Driving aids camera:
The ESC system must not be faulty. visibility limited, see user guide".
driver and improve road safety.
The ASR must not be deactivated. In these situations, detection performance
It is the driver's responsibility to
All passenger seat belts must be fastened. may be reduced.
continuously monitor the state of the
Driving at a steady speed on roads with few
traffic, observing the driving regulations.
bends is required.
This system does not replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
As soon as the system detects a potential

obstacle, it prepares the braking circuit in
case automatic braking is needed. This
may cause a slight noise and a slight
sensation of deceleration.
166
Driving
Clean the windscreen regularly, The system is automatically deactivated Collision Risk Alert
particularly the area in front of the camera. after the use of the "space-saver" type It warns the driver if their vehicle is at risk of
The internal surface of the windscreen can spare wheel is detected, or if a fault with collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian
also become misted around the camera. the lateral brake lamps is detected. present in their traffic lane.
In humid and cold weather, demist the
windscreen regularly.
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the Modifying the alert trigger
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could It is possible that warnings are not given, threshold
conceal the detection camera. are given too late or seem unjustified. This threshold determines how you wish
Clean the front bumper, especially around Consequently, always stay in control of to be alerted of the presence of a moving
the radar, removing mud, snow, etc. your vehicle and be prepared to react at or stationary vehicle in front of you, or
any time to avoid an accident. a pedestrian present in your traffic lane.
The current threshold can only be

In the following cases, deactivating the system After an impact, the function automatically modified via the touch screen's
6
via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: stops operating. Contact a CITROËN Driving menu.
- towing a trailer, dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
- carrying long objects on roof bars or roof system checked. You can select one of three predefined
rack,
thresholds:
- with snow chains fitted,
- "Distant",
- before using an automatic car wash, with
- "Normal",
the engine running, If the front bumper is to be repainted or
- "Close".
- before placing the vehicle on a rolling road retouched, contact a CITROËN dealer
The last threshold selected is kept in memory
in a workshop, or a qualified workshop. Certain types of
when the ignition is switched off.
- towed vehicle, engine running, paint could interfere with the operation of
- damaged front bumper (version with radar), the radar.
- following impact to the windscreen close to Operation
the detection camera. Depending on the degree of risk of collision
detected by the system and the alert threshold
chosen by the driver, different levels of
alert can be triggered and displayed in the
instrument panel.
167
Driving
These levels of alert are based on the inter- Intelligent emergency It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid
vehicle time between your vehicle and the a frontal collision by your vehicle where the
vehicle in front.
braking assistance driver fails to react.
If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid
They take account of the vehicle dynamics,
a collision, this system will supplement the
the speed of your vehicle and the one in front, Operation
braking, within the limits of the laws of physics.
the environmental conditions, the operation of
This assistance will only be provided if you The system operates under the following
the vehicle (cornering, pedals pressed, etc.) to
press the brake pedal. conditions:
trigger the alert at the best moment.
- The vehicle's speed does not exceed
37 mph (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is
Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, detected.
signalling to you that the vehicle in
Active Safety Brake - The vehicle's speed does not exceed
front is very close. 50 mph (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle
The message "Vehicle close" is is detected.
displayed. - The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and
53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) (versions
with camera alone) or 87 mph (140 km/h)
Level 2 (red): visual and audible (versions with camera and radar) when
alert, warning you that a collision is a moving vehicle is detected.
imminent.
If the camera and/or radar have
The message "Brake!" is displayed.
confirmed the presence of a vehicle
or a pedestrian, this warning lamp
flashes once the function is acting
Where the speed of your vehicle is too fast
on the vehicle's brakes.
approaching another vehicle, the first level
of alert may not be displayed: the level
With an automatic gearbox, in the event of
2 alert may be displayed directly.
automatic emergency braking until the vehicle
Important: alert level 1 is never displayed
comes to a complete stop, keep the brake
when the "Close" trigger threshold has
pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from
been selected. This function, also called automatic emergency
starting off again.
braking, intervenes following the alert if the
With a manual gearbox, in the event of
driver does not react quickly enough and does
automatic emergency braking until the vehicle
not operate the vehicle's brakes.
comes to a complete stop, the engine may stall.
168
Driving
The driver can maintain control of the Lane Departure Warning This system is a driving aid that cannot,
vehicle at any time by sharply turning
the steering wheel and/or pressing the
System in any circumstances, replace the
driver's own vigilance. The driver must
accelerator pedal. Using a camera located at the top of the remain in control of the vehicle under all
windscreen to identify lane markings on the circumstances.
ground, the system corrects the trajectory of The system helps the driver only when
Operation of the function may be felt by the vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily
slight vibration in the brake pedal. a risk of involuntary crossing of a line. wandering from the lane it is being driven
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, This system is particularly useful on motorways in. It does not manage the safe driving
the automatic braking is maintained for and main roads. distance, the speed of the vehicle or the
1 to 2 seconds. brakes.
The driver must hold the steering wheel
with both hands in a way that allows
control to be maintained in circumstances
where the system is not able to intervene
Malfunction (if lane markings disappear, for example).
It is necessary to observe the driving
6
In the event of a fault with the
regulations and take a break every two
system, you are alerted by the
hours.
illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by the display of
Conditions for operation
a message and an audible signal. The speed of the vehicle must be between
40 mph and 112 mph (65 km/h and 180 km/h).
Operation
The driver must hold the steering wheel with Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle
workshop to have the system checked.
both hands. involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings
The change of trajectory must not be detected, it makes the correction to the
accompanied by operation of the direction trajectory required to return the vehicle to its
indicators. initial path.
The ESC system must be activated and fault- The driver will notice a turning movement of the
free. steering wheel.
This warning lamp flashes during

trajectory correction.
169
Driving
If the driver wishes to maintain the If the system detects that the driver is not
trajectory of the vehicle, they can prevent holding the wheel firmly enough during
the correction by keeping a firm grip on an automatic correction of trajectory,
the wheel (during an avoiding manoeuvre, it interrupts the correction. An alert is
for example). triggered to encourage the driver to take
The correction is interrupted if the back control of the vehicle.
direction indicators are operated.
Driving situations and

associated alerts
To benefit from all necessary information on
the instrument panel, you must previously
select the "DRIVING" display mode.
The table below describes the alerts and
messages displayed depending on the driving
situation.
While the direction indicators are on and for The display of these alerts is not sequential.
a few seconds after switching them off, the
system considers that any change of trajectory
is voluntary and no correction is triggered
during this period.
However, with the Blind Spot Detection system
activated, if the driver starts changing lanes
and another vehicle is detected in the vehicle's
blind spot, the system will correct the trajectory
of the vehicle even though the direction
indicators are on.
For more information on the Blind Spot
Detection, refer to the corresponding section.
170
Driving
Display and/
Status of the Indicator
or associated Comments
function lamp
message
OFF System deactivated.
(grey)
ON System active, conditions not met:

- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),
(grey) - no lane marking recognised,
- ESC deactivated or operation triggered,
- "sporty" driving.
ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the system (for example: detection of a trailer, use of the
"space-saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle).
(grey)
6
Display and/
Status of the Indicator
or associated Comments
function lamp
message
ON Detection of lane markings.
Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
(green)
ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of involuntary crossing is
detected (orange line).
(orange)/(green)
ON - If, during correction, the system detects that the driver has not held the wheel for a few
seconds, it interrupts the correction and returns control to the driver.
(orange)/(green) - During correction of the trajectory, if the system determines that the correction will not be
"Take control of the enough and that a solid line is crossed (orange line): the driver is warned that they must
vehicle". complete the correction of the trajectory.
171
Driving
Operating limits The system is not intended for driving in the

The following situations may interfere with
following situations:
The system goes into standby automatically in the operation of the system or prevent it
- driving on a speed circuit,
the following cases: working:
- driving with a trailer,
- ESC deactivated or operation triggered, - conditions of poor visibility (inadequate
- driving on a rolling stand,
- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater street lighting, snowfall, rain, fog),
- driving on unstable surfaces.
than 112 mph (180 km/h), - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
- connected electrically to a trailer, vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
- use of the "space-saver" spare road, leaving a tunnel, alternating Activation/Deactivation
wheel detected (as detection is not shade and light),
- windscreen area located in front of the Activation and deactivation of the system is
immediate, deactivation of the system is
camera: dirty, misted, frost-covered, done in the Driving menu of the touch screen.
recommended),
snow-covered, damaged or covered by Select the "Driving functions" then the "Lane
- dynamic driving style detected, pressure on
a sticker, assist" tab.
the brake or accelerator pedal,
- lane markings worn, hidden (snow, The system state remains in memory when the
- driving where there are no lane markings,
mud) or multiple (roadworks, etc.), ignition is switched off.
- activation of the direction indicators,
- crossing the inside line on a bend, - running close to the vehicle in front
- driving in a tight corner, (the lane markings may not be
- inactivity by the driver detected during detected),
correction. - roads that are narrow, winding, etc. Malfunction
Risk of undesirable operation In the event of a fault with the system, you are
alerted by the illumination of these warning
Deactivation of the system is recommended in lamps in the instrument panel, accompanied by
the following situations: the display of a message and an audible signal.
- driving on a road surface in poor condition, Have the system checked by a CITROËN
- poor weather conditions, dealer or a qualified workshop.
- driving on slippery surfaces (ice).
172
Driving
Blind Spot Detection This driving aid system is designed to Operation

improve safety when driving and is in no Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
circumstances a substitute for the use monitor the blind spots.
of the interior rear view mirror and door The alert is given by an orange warning lamp
mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to coming on in the relevant door mirror, as soon
constantly check the traffic, to assess the as a vehicle – car, lorry, cycle – is detected.
relative distances and speeds of other The following conditions must be met for this:
vehicles and to predict their movements - all vehicles are moving in the same direction
before deciding whether to change lane. and in adjacent lanes,
This system is a driving aid that cannot, in - the speed of the vehicle must be between
any circumstances, replace the need for 7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h),
vigilance on the part of the driver. - you overtake a vehicle with a speed
This system warns the driver of the presence difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h),
of another vehicle in the blind spots of their - a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
vehicle (areas hidden from the driver's field difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),
of vision), as soon as this presents a potential
Activation/Deactivation - the traffic is flowing normally,
- overtaking a vehicle over a certain period
6
danger. The function is activated and
deactivated in the Driving menu of of time and the vehicle being overtaken
the touch screen. remains in the blind spot,
- you are driving on a straight or slightly
When the function is activated, curved road,
this indicator lamp comes on in the - your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a
instrument panel. caravan, etc.
The state of the system stays in memory when

switching off the ignition.
A fixed warning lamp appears in the door mirror The system is automatically deactivated
on the side in question: when towing with a towing device
- immediately, when being overtaken, approved by CITROËN.
- after a delay of about one second, when
overtaking a vehicle slowly.
173
Driving
- with vehicles moving in the opposite

The system may suffer temporary
direction,
interference in certain weather conditions
- driving on a winding road or a sharp corner,
(rain, hail, etc.).
- when overtaking or being overtaken by
In particular, driving on a wet surface or
a very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which
the transition from a dry area to a wet area
is both detected in the rear blind spot and
can cause false alerts (e.g. the presence
present in the driver's front field of vision,
of water droplets in the blind spot is
- when overtaking quickly,
interpreted as a vehicle).
- in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
front and behind are confused with a lorry or
sensors are not covered with mud, ice or
a stationary object,
snow.
- if the Park Assist function is activated.
Take care not to cover the warning zone in
the door mirrors or the detection zones on
the front and rear bumpers with adhesive
labels or other objects; they may hamper
the correct operation of the system.
Operating fault
system, this warning lamp flashes
for a few moments in the instrument High pressure jet wash
panel, accompanied by the Service When washing your vehicle, keep the
warning lamp coming on and the nozzle at a minimum distance of 12 inches
display of a message. (30 cm) from the sensors.

No alert will be given in the following situations: workshop to have the system checked.
- in the presence of non-moving objects
(parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps,
road signs, etc.),
174
Driving
Active Blind Spot This alert is issued via the display of

These systems cannot in any circumstances
a message encouraging you to take a break,
Monitoring System replace the need for vigilance on the part
accompanied by an audible signal.
(depending on version) of the driver who must remain in control
If the driver does not follow this advice, the
In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door of their decisions. In no case can these
alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is
mirror on the side in question, a correction of systems keep the driver awake or prevent
stopped.
trajectory will be felt if you cross a lane marking them from falling asleep at the wheel.
It is the driver's responsibility to stop if they The system resets itself if one of the following
with the direction indicators on, to help you conditions is met:
avoid a collision. feel tired.
- engine running, the vehicle has been
stationary for more than 15 minutes,
Conditions for operation - the ignition has been switched off for a few
The following systems must be activated:
Activation/Deactivation minutes,
- the driver's seat belt is unfastened and their
- Blind Spot Detection, These functions are activated and
door is open.
- Lane Departure Warning System. deactivated in the Driving menu of
The speed of the vehicle must be between the touch screen.
40 and 87 mph (65 and 140 km/h) inclusive. As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops
The state of the system stays in the memory below 40 mph (65 km/h), the system goes
6
when the ignition is switched off. into standby.
Fatigue detection system The driving time is counted again once the
speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h).
Take a break as soon as you feel tired or at Driver Attention Warning
least every two hours.
Depending on version, the function relies either The system triggers an alert once it
on the "Driver Attention Warning" system alone detects that the driver has not taken
or combined with the "Driver Attention Alert" a break after two hours of driving at Driver Attention Alert
system. a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
Depending on version, the "Driver Attention
Warning" may be combined with the "Driver
Attention Alert".
175
Driving
After three first level alerts, the system triggers

Clean the windscreen regularly,
a new alert with the message "Take a break!",
particularly the area in front of the camera.
accompanied by a more pronounced audible
The internal surface of the windscreen can
signal.
also become misted around the camera.
In humid and cold weather, demist the
In certain driving conditions (poor road
windscreen regularly.
surface or strong winds), the system may
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
give alerts independent of the driver's
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
level of vigilance.
conceal the detection camera.
Clean the front bumper, especially around
the radar, removing mud, snow, etc.
Using a camera placed at the top The following situations may interfere with
of the windscreen, the system the operation of the system or prevent it
assesses the driver's level of working:
vigilance by identifying variations - poor visibility (inadequate lighting of
in trajectory compared to the lane the roadway, falling snow, heavy rain,
markings. dense fog, etc.),
This system is particularly suited to fast roads
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming Parking sensors
(speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)).
- windscreen area located in front of the
camera dirty, misted up, frost-covered,
snow-covered, damaged or covered by
a sticker,
- lane markings absent, worn, hidden
When the system interprets the behaviour of (snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks,
the vehicle as indicating a certain fatigue or etc.),
inattention threshold on the part of the driver, it - close to the vehicle ahead (lane
triggers the first level of alert. markings not detected),
The driver is then alerted by the message - roads that are narrow, winding, etc. Using sensors located in the bumper, this
"Take care!", accompanied by an audible function warns of the proximity of obstacles
signal. (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) entering
their field of detection.
176
Driving
The information on proximity is given by an Front parking sensors

This function is a manoeuvring aid which
intermittent sound signal, the succession of
cannot, in any circumstances, replace the In addition to the rear parking sensors, the
which becomes more rapid as the vehicle
need for vigilance on the part of the driver. front parking sensors are triggered when an
approaches the obstacle.
The driver must remain attentive and stay obstacle is detected in front and the speed of
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left)
in control of their vehicle. the vehicle remains below 6 mph (10 km/h).
indicates which side the obstacle is on.
They must always check the vehicle's The front parking sensors are interrupted if
When the distance between the vehicle and
surroundings before undertaking the vehicle stops for more than three seconds
the obstacle becomes less than approximately
a manoeuvre. in forward gear, if no further obstacles are
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes
During the entire manoeuvre, the driver detected or when the speed of the vehicle
continuous.
must ensure that the space remains clear. exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
Visual assistance
Rear parking sensors
The sound emitted by the speaker (front or
The system is switched on by engaging reverse rear) indicates whether the obstacle is in
gear. front or behind.
6
This is confirmed by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when you come out
of reverse gear.
Deactivation/Activation
It supplements the audible signal by displaying The function is deactivated and
bars on the screen that move progressively activated in the Driving menu of the
nearer to the vehicle (white: more distant touch screen.
Audible assistance obstacles; orange: close obstacles; red: very
close obstacles). This warning lamp comes on in the
When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" instrument panel when the function
symbol is displayed on the screen. is deactivated.
A new selection reactivates the
function.
The state of the function stays in the memory

when the ignition is switched off.
177
Driving
- A front or rear impact to the vehicle can

The rear parking sensors system will In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
distort the settings of the sensors, which is
be deactivated automatically if a trailer sensors are not covered by mud, ice or
not always detected by the system: distance
or bicycle carrier is connected to snow.
measurements may be incorrect.
a towing device installed in line with the When reverse gear is engaged, an audible
- The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is
manufacturer's recommendations. signal (long beep) indicates that the
very loaded can affect the distance
In this case, the outline of a trailer is sensors may be dirty.
measurements.
displayed at the rear of the image of the Certain sound sources (motorcycle,
- The sensors may be affected by poor
vehicle. lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger
weather conditions (heavy rain, thick fog,
the audible signals of the parking sensor
snowfall, etc.).
system.
The parking sensors are deactivated while the
Park Assist system is measuring a space.
For more information on the Park Assist, refer High pressure jet wash
to the corresponding section.
Operating fault When washing your vehicle, direct the
lance at least 30 cm away from the
Operating limits If the system fails, when reverse sensors.
gear is engaged this warning lamp
- Certain obstacles located in the sensors' flashes for a few seconds before
blind spots may not be detected or no lighting up continuously, together Reversing camera
longer be detected during the manoeuvre. with the Service warning lamp.
- Sounds such as those emitted by noisy
vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, A message appears, accompanied by an
pneumatic drills, etc.) may interfere with the audible signal.
vehicle's sensors. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
- Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound workshop.
waves: pedestrians may not be detected.
- Accumulated snow or dead leaves on the
road surface can interfere with the vehicle's
sensors.
The reversing camera is activated automatically

when reverse gear is engaged.
178
Driving
Depending on version, the image is displayed The blue lines 1 represent the general direction
on the touch screen or the instrument panel. of the vehicle (the gap represents the width of
Vision 360
your vehicle except for the door mirrors).
The red line 2 represents a distance of about
The reversing camera function may be
30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear
supplemented with parking sensors.
bumper.
The green lines 3 represent distances of about
The reversing camera cannot, in any circumstances, one and two metres beyond the edge of your
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. vehicle's rear bumper.
The turquoise blue curves 4 represent the
maximum turning circle.
This system allows the near surroundings of

Opening the tailgate causes the display to the vehicle to be viewed in the instrument panel
disappear. using cameras.
They are situated at the front and rear of the
vehicle, as well as under the door mirrors.
Clean the reversing camera regularly
6
Depending on the angle of view chosen (front
using a soft, dry cloth.
view, rear view or 360° panoramic view), the
Vision 360 system provides a specific visual aid
The representation with overlaid lines helps the
High pressure jet wash in particular driving conditions, such as when
manoeuvre.
When washing your vehicle, do not direct entering a blind crossroads or manoeuvring in
the lance from less than 30 cm from the areas with reduced visibility.
They are represented by lines marked lens of the camera. Once activated, this function is operational up
"on the ground" and do not allow you to to 9 mph (15 km/h). Above 19 mph (30 km/h),
determine the position of tall obstacles (for the system deactivates automatically.
example: other vehicles, etc.) relative to
the vehicle.
Some distortion of the image is normal.
It is normal to have a part of the number
plate showing in the bottom of the screen.
179
Driving
This system is a visual aid that cannot in Rear vision Vision 360
any circumstances replace the need for The camera situated on the tailgate is activated The cameras situated on the front and rear
vigilance on the part of the driver. and the view of the area behind your vehicle is bumpers as well as those below the door
The images provided by the camera(s) displayed in the instrument panel and behaves mirrors activate and a view from above of your
may be distorted by the relief. The as a reversing camera, regardless of the vehicle in its close environment is generated
presence of areas in shadow, bright position of the gear selector. and is displayed in the instrument panel.
sunlight, or poor lighting conditions may The blue outline represents the width of
make the image dark and reduce contrast. your vehicle (without mirrors): its orientation
depends on the position of the steering wheel. Opening a door or the tailgate will disrupt the
The red line represents the distance of 30 cm) 360 and rear views.
from the rear bumper and the two green lines Installation of the very cold climate screen will
Forward vision the distances of 1 m and 2 m respectively from alter the image transmitted by the front camera.
The camera situated on the front bumper is the rear bumper.
activated and the views of the area to the
front left and the area to the front right of your
vehicle appear simultaneously in the instrument
The rear vision is displayed automatically
panel.
when reverse gear is engaged, regardless
of the state of the system.
180
Driving
Operation or The driver can take control at any time by

F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving gripping the steering wheel.
Function activation functions" tab, then "Panoramic visual aid".
F Select "Camera OFF".
This manoeuvring assistance system
cannot, in any circumstances, replace the
need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
The driver must remain in control of their
Check the cleanliness of the camera
vehicle ensuring that the space remains
lenses regularly.
clear throughout the manoeuvre.
High pressure jet wash
In some circumstances, the sensors may
When washing your vehicle, keep the
not detect small obstacles located in their
nozzle at least 12 inches (30 cm) from the
blind spots.
cameras.
With the engine running:

functions" tab, then "Panoramic visual aid".
Park Assist The Park Assist system cannot work with
the engine off.
6
This system provides active assistance with
On display of the menu, select one of the three parking: it detects a parking space then
views: operates the steering system to park in this
"Front camera". space.
With a manual gearbox, the driver manages
"360 camera".
the accelerator, brakes, gears and clutch.
"Rear camera".
With an automatic gearbox (EAT6/EAT8), the
The selected view comes up in the instrument driver manages the accelerator, brakes and
panel. gears.
During phases of entry into and exit from
The display disappears from the a parking space, the system provides visual The Park Assist system provides assistance for
instrument panel above 9 mph (15 km/h). and audible information to the driver in order the following manoeuvres:
to make the manoeuvres safe. It may be A. Parallel parking.
necessary to move forwards and backwards B. Exit from a parallel parking space.
Function deactivation more than once.
C. Bay parking.
F Accelerate to over 19 mph (30 km/h).
181
Driving
During manoeuvring phases, the steering The sequence of manoeuvres and the The parking sensors function is
wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold driving instructions are displayed in the not available during parking space
the steering wheel, do not put your hands instrument panel. measurement. It intervenes later when
between the spokes of the steering wheel. manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle
The assistance is activated:
Watch out for any object that could block is approaching an obstacle: the audible
the display of this symbol and
the manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarves, signal becomes continuous when the
a speed limit indicate that
ties, etc.) - injury risk! obstacle is less than thirty centimetres
the steering manoeuvres are
away.
controlled by the system: do not
If you have deactivated the parking
touch the steering wheel.
sensors, they are automatically
When the Park Assist is active, it prevents The assistance is deactivated: reactivated during assisted parking
the Stop & Start going into STOP mode. the display of this symbol manoeuvres.
In STOP mode, activating Park Assist indicates that the steering
restarts the engine. manoeuvres are no longer
controlled by the system:
you must take control of the Activation of Park Assist deactivates the
The Park Assist system takes control Blind Spot Detection.
steering.
of the assistance for a maximum of
4 manoeuvre cycles. The function is
deactivated after these 4 cycles. If you
think that your vehicle is not positioned Operation
correctly, you should then take control of You should always check the surroundings
the steering to carry out the manoeuvre. of your vehicle before starting Assistance with parallel parking
a manoeuvre. manoeuvres
F When you have found a parking space.
F Press this button.
182
Driving
This indicator lamp comes on in

the instrument panel to confirm the
F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move forwards slowly until a message is
parking side chosen to activate the displayed, accompanied by an audible
measurement function. You should drive at signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to the row of parked vehicles.
a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h)
and select "Enter parallel parking
6
space" on the touch screen.
To enter a parking space, the system does

not identify spaces that are clearly smaller
or larger than the vehicle.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel

F Drive slowly following the instructions until and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
the system finds a free space. (7 km/h).
183
Driving
Assistance in exiting a parallel F Engage reverse or forward gear and release

parking space the steering wheel.
F When you want to leave a parallel parking

space, start the engine.
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in F With the vehicle stationary,

progress. press this button.
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), move
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
forwards and backwards, aided by the
This indicator lamp comes on in progress. Without exceeding 3 mph
warnings from the "Parking sensors"
the instrument panel to confirm the (5 km/h), move forwards and backwards,
system, until the end of the manoeuvre is
activation of the system. aided by the warnings from the "Parking
indicated.
sensors" system, until the indication of the
F Press "Exit parking space" on end of the manoeuvre.
the touch screen.
F At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator

lamp in the instrument panel goes off,
accompanied by a message and an audible
signal. The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's
F Operate the direction indicator for the exit front wheels are clear of the parking space.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
side chosen.
over control.
184
Driving
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp

in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
by a message and an audible signal.
over control.
Assistance with bay parking

manoeuvres
F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move forwards slowly until a message is
parking side chosen to activate the displayed, accompanied by an audible
measurement function. You should drive at signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
F Once you have found a parking the row of parked vehicles.
area, press this button.
6
This indicator lamp comes on in
the instrument panel to confirm the
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to

a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h)
and select "Enter bay parking
space" on the touch screen.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel
F Drive slowly following the instructions until and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
the system finds a free space. (7 km/h).
When several successive bays are found,

the vehicle will be directed towards the
last one.
185
Driving
- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the

During a bay parking manoeuvre, the Park
stated limit,
Assist system is automatically deactivated
- when the driver interrupts movement of the
once the rear of the vehicle is within
steering wheel,
20 inches (50 cm) of an obstacle.
- after 4 manoeuvre cycles,
- on opening the driver's door,
- if one of the front wheels encounters an
obstacle.
During parking and exit from parking The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes
manoeuvres, the reversing camera off and a message is displayed accompanied
by an audible signal.
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in function may come into operation. It
facilitates monitoring of the surroundings The driver should then take back control of the
progress.
of the vehicle, by displaying additional vehicle's steering.
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), follow
the instructions displayed in the instrument information in the instrument panel.
panel, aided by the warnings from the For more information on the Reversing If the system is deactivated during
"Parking sensors" system, until the end of camera, refer to the corresponding a manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate
the manoeuvre is indicated. section. it to repeat the measurement.
Switching off
Deactivation
The system is switched off automatically:
The system is deactivated by pressing the - when towing a trailer, connected electrically,
control. - if the driver's door is opened,
The system is deactivated automatically: - if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph
- on switching off the ignition, (70 km/h).
- if the engine stalls, To switch the system off for a prolonged period,
- if no manoeuvre is performed within contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
5 minutes of selecting the type of workshop.
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
manoeuvre
in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during
by a message and an audible signal.
a manoeuvre,
- if the wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) is
over control.
triggered,
186
Driving
Operating faults High pressure jet washing

When washing your vehicle, keep the lance at
least 12 inches (30 cm) away from the sensors.
In the event of a fault, this warning
lamp flashes for a few seconds,
accompanied by an audible signal.
If the fault occurs during the use of the system,

the warning lamp goes off.

power steering, this warning lamp
is displayed in the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message.

workshop.
6
If the lateral distance between your vehicle
and the space is too great, the system may
not be able to measure the space.
Any object projecting beyond the dimensions
of the vehicle (e.g. a ladder on the roof or
a towball) will not be taken into account by
the Park Assist system during a manoeuvre.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that

the sensors are not covered by dirt, ice or
snow.
In the event of a fault, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or
187
FILL UP WITH
CONFIDENCE
WITH TOTAL QUARTZ For more than 45 years, TOTAL
LUBRICANTS and CITROËN have shared common
values: excellence, creativity and
technological innovation.
It is in this same spirit that TOTAL has
developed a range of TOTAL QUARTZ
lubricants adapted to CITROËN
engines, making them even more
fuel efficient and protective of the
environment.
TOTAL and CITROËN test the
reliability and the performance of their
products during motorsport races in
extreme conditions.
Choose TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants
to maintain your vehicle, this is your
assurance of optimum durability and
performance from your engine.
Practical information
Compatibility of fuels
Fuel used for petrol engines
Diesel fuel that meets standard
The petrol engines are compatible with biofuels The only Diesel additives authorised
EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that
that conform to current and future European for use are those that meet the
meets standard EN14214 (possibly
standards and which can be obtained from B715000 standard.
containing up to 10% Fatty Acid Methyl
filling stations: Ester).
Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets Diesel at low temperature
standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel
Petrol that meets standard EN228, At temperatures below 0°C (+32°F), the
that meets standard EN14214 (possibly
mixed with a biofuel that meets formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel
containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl
standard EN15376. fuels could result in an abnormal operation
Ester).
of the fuel supply circuit. To avoid this, we
B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard recommend using winter-type Diesel fuel and
EN16709 can be used in your Diesel keeping the fuel tank more than 50% full.
The only petrol additives authorised engine. However, this use, even If, despite this, at temperatures below -15°C
for use are those that meet the occasional, requires strict application of (+5°F) the engine has problems starting,
B715001 standard. the special servicing conditions referred just leave the vehicle in a garage or heated
to as "Arduous conditions". workshop for a little while.
Fuel used for Diesel

7
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop. Travelling abroad
engines
Certain fuels could damage your vehicle's
The Diesel engines are compatible with
engine.
biofuels that conform to current and future
In certain countries, the use of a particular
European standards and which can be The use of any other type of (bio) fuel
fuel may be required (specific octane rating,
obtained from filling stations: (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct
domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited
Diesel fuel that meets standard operation of the engine.
(risk of damage to the engine and fuel
EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets For any additional information, contact a dealer.
system).
standard EN14214 (possibly containing
up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
189
Opening the filler flap may create a noise F Hold it in this position throughout the filling
Fuel caused by an inrush of air. This is entirely operation.
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 57 litres normal and results from the sealing of the fuel F Push the filler flap to close it.
(petrol) or 55 litres (Diesel). system.
If you are filling your tank to the top, do not
continue after the 3 rd cut-off of the nozzle;
Low fuel level this could cause malfunctions.
When the low fuel level is reached, Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter,
this warning lamp in the instrument a device which helps to reduce the level of
panel comes on, accompanied by harmful emissions in the exhaust gases.
an audible warning, a message and For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
the last bar of the fuel gauge lights fuel.
up orange. The filler neck is narrower, allowing only
unleaded petrol nozzles to be introduced.
When it first comes on there remains
approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank.
Until sufficient fuel has been added, this
If you have put in the wrong fuel for
warning lamp appears every time the ignition
your vehicle, you must have the fuel
is switched on, accompanied by an audible
tank drained and filled with the correct
warning and a message. This audible warning
fuel before starting the engine.
and this message are repeated with increasing
frequency as the fuel level drops towards "0". To refuel in complete safety:
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running F You must switch off the engine.
out. F With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear Fuel cut-off
edge of the flap to open it (the filler cap is
Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that
Refilling a part of it).
cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an
F Take care to select the pump that delivers
A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the the correct type of fuel for your vehicle. impact.
filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use,
F Insert the nozzle so as to push in the metal
depending on your engine.
non-return flap. With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres, in
F Make sure that the nozzle is pushed in as engine in STOP mode; you must switch
order to be registered by the fuel gauge.
far as possible before starting to refuel (risk off the ignition with the "START/STOP"
of blowback). button.
190
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) Travelling abroad Installation tips

(Depending on the country of sale.) As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be F If you have to fit the chains during a journey,
Mechanical device which prevents filling the different in other countries, the presence stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side
tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It helps of the misfuel prevention device may make of the road.
avoid the risk of engine damage that can result refuelling impossible. F Apply the parking brake and position any
from filling with the wrong fuel. Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent
misfuel protection, so before travelling movement of your vehicle.
abroad, we recommend that you check F Fit the chains following the instructions
with the CITROËN dealer network, provided by the manufacturer.
whether your vehicle is suitable for the F Move off gently and drive for a few
fuel pumps in the country in which you
Operation intend to travel.
moments, without exceeding 31 mph
(50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
Snow chains It is strongly recommended that before

In wintry conditions, snow chains you leave, you practise fitting the snow
improve traction as well as the chains on a level and dry surface.
behaviour of the vehicle when
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into braking.
7
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
the fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes
that have been cleared of snow to avoid
into contact with the flap. The system remains
damaging your vehicle's tyres and the
closed and prevents filling.
Snow chains must be fitted only to the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
front wheels. They must never be fitted to alloy wheels, check that no part of the
filler nozzle.
"space-saver" type spare wheels. chain or its fixings is in contact with the
wheel rim.
It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill
the tank.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, Take account of the legislation in force in
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in your country on the use of snow chains
direct contact with the flap of the misfuel and the maximum authorised speed.
prevention device and pour slowly.
191
Only use the chains designed to be fitted to the

Use towing devices and their genuine Observe the maximum authorised towable
type of wheels fitted to your vehicle:
harnesses approved by CITROËN. It weight, indicated on your vehicle's
is recommended that the installation registration certificate, the manufacturer's
be performed by a CITROËN dealer or label as well as in the Technical data
a qualified workshop. section of this guide.
Original tyre size Chain type If the towing device is not fitted by Complying with the maximum
a CITROËN dealer, it must still be authorised nose weight (towball)
205/60 R16 fitted in accordance with the vehicle also includes the use of accessories
Maximum link size:
manufacturer's instructions. (bicycle carriers, tow boxes, etc.).
205/55 R17 9 mm
Important: for versions equipped with
the motorised tailgate with "Hands-Free
THULE K-Summit
Tailgate Access" function, if a towing
225/45 R18 K34 model Observe the legislation in force in the
device other than a genuine CITROËN
exclusively country in which you are driving.
one is installed, it is imperative to
For more information on snow chains, contact visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to recalibrate the detection Vehicle equipped with motorised tailgate
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
system: risk of "Hands-Free Tailgate with "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
Access" function failure. function
Towing device Certain driving or manoeuvring aid To avoid unwanted opening of the tailgate
functions are automatically disabled if an when using the towing device:
Load distribution - please deactivate this function in advance
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the approved towing system is used.
in your vehicle's configuration menu,
heaviest items are as close as possible to - or remove the electronic key from the
the axle and the nose weight approaches the recognition zone, with the tailgate closed.
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducing engine performance. The maximum
towed load must be reduced by 10% for every
1,000 metres of altitude.
192
Blanking plug F Fit the end of the towball into the carrier
underneath the rear bumper, as far as it can
In the event of recovery, it is essential to remove go.
the blanking plug if your vehicle has one.
To do this, contact a CITROËN dealer or
The blanking plug is located behind the

lower air intake grille.
F Press and hold control A on the towball.
F Unlock the locking mechanism by pressing
trigger B.
Towing system with F Make sure that the towball is correctly
secured in place. The two pins must be in
quickly detachable towball contact with the carrier notches and trigger
No tools are required to install or remove the B must be returned to the "locking" position.
towball on this genuine towbar system. F Install the protective cover and clip it into
place by turning it anti-clockwise.
Trailers with LED lamps are not

compatible with the wiring harness of this
7
device. F Before fitting the towball, check that the
contact points, shown by arrows, are clean.
Use a clean and soft cloth.
Fitting
F Connect the trailer plug to the 13 pin socket

next to the carrier.
F Secure the trailer by connecting its safety
cable to the hoop on the carrier.
F Below the rear bumper, unclip and remove
the protective cover from the carrier.
193
Removing If the towball is not locked, the trailer can

detach. This may cause an accident.
Always lock the towball in accordance with
the descriptions.
Observe the legislation in force in the
country in which you are driving.
Remove the towball if it is not being used.
F Clip the protective cover to the carrier Before starting the vehicle, check that the
underneath the bumper. trailer lamps are working correctly.
F Unclip and remove the protective cover, by Before setting off, check the adjustment of
turning it clockwise. the headlamp beam height.
Maximum weight authorised on the towing
device: 70 kg.
For more information on the Weights
of your vehicle, refer to the associated
section.
Carrier systems (box or bicycle carrier).
Always comply with the maximum load
authorised on the towing system: if it is
exceeded, this system may detach from
F Press and hold control A on the towball.
the vehicle and thus cause a serious
F Unlock the locking mechanism by pressing
accident.
trigger B.
F Press trigger B and remove the towball by

pulling it towards you.
194
Load reduction mode If a telephone call is being made at this Changing a wiper blade
System which manages the use of certain time, it will be maintained for around
functions according to the level of charge 10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free Before removing a front
remaining in the battery. system of your audio system. wiper blade
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as air conditioning, Exiting the mode
heated rear screen, etc. These functions will be automatically restored
The deactivated functions are reactivated the next time the vehicle is used.
automatically as soon as conditions permit. In order to restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
- for less than ten minutes, to use the
Energy economy mode equipment for approximately five minutes,
System which manages the duration of use of - for more than ten minutes, to use the F Within one minute after switching off the
certain functions to conserve a sufficient level equipment for up to approximately thirty ignition, operate the wiper control stalk to
of charge in the battery. minutes. position the wiper blades vertically on the
After the engine has stopped, you can Let the engine run for the duration specified to windscreen.
still use functions such as the audio and ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. or
telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the F More than one minute after switching off the
beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for engine in order to charge the battery. ignition, straighten the arms manually.
7
a maximum combined duration of about forty
minutes. Removing
F Lift the corresponding wiper arm.
Switching to this mode F Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
A message appears in the instrument panel A flat battery prevents the engine from
screen indicating that the vehicle has switched starting. Refitting
to economy mode and the active functions are For more information on the 12 V battery,
put on standby. refer to the corresponding section. F Position and clip the new wiper blade to the
arm.
F Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
195
After refitting a front wiper Version without longitudinal Version with longitudinal
blade bars bars
F Operate the wiper control stalk again to
park the wiper blades.
The replacement of wiper arms should be

carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or
Roof bars
When fitting roof bars, use only the four fixing
As a safety measure and to avoid points located on the roof frame. These points
damaging the roof, it is essential to use are masked by the vehicle doors when closed. You must fit the transverse bars to the
the transverse bars approved for your The roof bar fixings include a stud which should longitudinal bars at the fixing points indicated
vehicle. be fitted to the opening in each fixing point. by engraved markings on the longitudinal bars.
Observe the fitting instructions and the Recommendations

conditions of use in the user guide supplied
F Distribute the load evenly, avoiding
with the bars.
overloading on one side.
F Arrange the heaviest part of the load as
close as possible to the roof.
F Secure the load firmly and fit a warning flag
if it overhangs the vehicle.
F Drive gently: the vehicle will be more
susceptible to the effects of side winds (the
stability of the vehicle may be affected).
F Remove the roof bars once they are no
longer needed.
196
Maximum load, distributed over the roof Before fitting or removing a screen, Removing
bars, for a loading height not exceeding ensure that the engine is off and the F Use a screwdriver as a lever to release each
40 cm: 80 kg. cooling fan has stopped. of the fixings of each screen in turn.
As this value may be changed, please
verify the maximum load quoted in the
user guide supplied with the roof bars. Fitting
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the It is essential to remove the very cold
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the climate screen (or screens):
road to avoid damaging the roof bars and - when the exterior temperature exceeds
the fixings on the vehicle. 10°C,
Be sure to refer to national legislation in - when towing,
order to comply with the regulations for - at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
transporting objects which are longer than
the vehicle.
Vision 360 system
The pre-cut section must be removed
before fitting the screen on the front
bumper, in order to be able to release the
When carrying long objects, it is camera.
recommended that the motorised tailgate When the very cold climate screen is
function is deactivated. present, the camera image is slightly
7
altered.
Very cold climate screen(s)

(Depending on the country where the product
is sold.)
Removable screen(s) which prevent snow F Offer up the corresponding very cold
accumulating at the radiator cooling fan. climate screen to the lower or upper section
Depending on the version, you have one or two of the front bumper.
screens. F Press around its edge to engage the fixing
clips of each screen one by one.
197
Bonnet When the engine is hot, handle the

exterior safety catch and the stay with
Opening care (risk of burns), using the protected
area.
When the bonnet is open, take care not to
damage the safety catch.
Do not open the bonnet under very windy
conditions.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,

F Unclip the stay from its housing and place it deactivate the Stop & Start system to
in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. avoid any risk of injury resulting from an
automatic change to START mode.
Closing
F Take the stay out of the support slot.
F Clip the stay in its housing.
F Lower the bonnet and release it near the
F Open the front left door. end of its travel.
F Pull the lever, located at the bottom of the F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is fully The cooling fan may start after
door aperture, towards you. latched. switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might be
caught by the fan blades.
The location of the interior bonnet release

lever prevents opening of the bonnet when Because of the presence of electrical
the left-hand front door is shut. equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, etc.) be limited.
F Lift the lever and raise the bonnet.

198
5. Fusebox.
Engine compartment 6. Air filter.
Take care when working under the bonnet,
This engine is shown as an example. as certain areas of the engine may be
7. Engine oil dipstick. extremely hot (risk of burns) and the
The positions of the following elements may
8. Engine oil filler cap. cooling fan could start at any time (even
change:
- Air filter. 9. Remote earth point. with the ignition off).
- Engine oil dipstick. 10. Priming pump*
- Engine oil filler cap.
* Depending on engine.
- Priming pump.
Used products
The Diesel fuel system operates under
very high pressure. Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
Petrol All work on this circuit must be carried out fluids with the skin.
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Most of these fluids are harmful to health
workshop. or indeed very corrosive.
Checking levels Do not discard used oil or fluids into

sewers or onto the ground.
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with
Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer or
the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them
a qualified workshop and dispose of
Diesel up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
7
it in the containers reserved for this
If a level drops significantly, have the
purpose.
corresponding system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Engine oil level

The liquid must comply with the The check is carried out either when
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash manufacturer's recommendations and with the ignition is switched in using the
reservoir. the vehicle's engine. oil level indicator in the instrument
2. Engine coolant reservoir. panel for vehicles equipped with an
3. Brake fluid reservoir. electric gauge, or using the dipstick.
4. Battery/Fuses.
199
To ensure that the reading is correct, your

Topping up the engine oil level
vehicle must be parked on a level surface The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the
with the engine stopped for more than corresponding underbonnet layout view.
30 minutes. F Unscrew the oil filler cap to access the filler
A = MAX opening.
It is normal to top up the oil level between B = MIN F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
two services (or oil changes). CITROËN spills on engine components (risk of fire).
recommends that you check the level, and top F Wait a few minutes before checking the
up if necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
F After checking the level, carefully refit the oil
Checking using the dipstick If you find that the level is above the A mark or filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
The location of the dipstick is shown in the below the B mark, do not start the engine.
corresponding underbonnet layout view. - If the level is above the MAX mark (risk of
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and damage to the engine), contact a CITROËN
pull it out completely. dealer or a qualified workshop.
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean - If the level is below the MIN mark, you must
non-fluffy cloth. top up the engine oil. After topping up the oil, the check when
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then switching on the ignition with the oil level
pull it out again to make the visual check: indicator in the instrument panel is not
Oil grade
the correct level is between marks A and B. valid during the 30 minutes after topping
Before topping up the oil or changing the oil,
up.
check that the oil is the correct grade for your
engine and conforms to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Engine oil change
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
and emissions control system, never use
additives in the engine oil.
200
Brake fluid level To avoid the risk of scalding when you need to Diesel fuel additive level
top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around
The fluid level should be close to the the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to
(Diesel with particle filter)
"MAX" mark. If it is not, check the allow the pressure to drop.
brake pad wear. Once the pressure has dropped, remove the The additive reservoir low level is
cap and top up to the required level. indicated by fixed illumination of this
Fluid specification warning lamp, accompanied by an
The cooling fan may start after audible signal and a message that
The fluid must conform to the manufacturer's the particle filter additive level is
switching off the engine: take care
recommendations. too low.
with articles and clothing that might be
caught by the fan blades.
Topping up
Coolant level Fluid specification This additive must be topped up without delay
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
This fluid must conform to the manufacturer's
Check the coolant level regularly. recommendations.
It is normal to top up the fluid
Level of AdBlue
between two services.
Screenwash/headlamp An alert is triggered once the reserve level is
The check and top-up must only be done with
wash level low reached.
7
the engine cold. To avoid the vehicle being immobilised as per
In the case of vehicles fitted with
A low coolant level presents a risk of serious regulations, you must top up with AdBlue.
headlamp washers, when the fluid
damage to your engine. reservoir low level is reached this For more information on AdBlue and the SCR
The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" warning lamp comes on in the system, and, in particular, topping up the tank,
mark but should never exceed it. instrument panel, accompanied by refer to the corresponding section.
If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark, an audible signal and a message.
it is essential to top up.
The warning lamp comes on when the ignition
When the engine is hot, the temperature of the
is switched on, or every time the stalk is
coolant is regulated by the fan.
operated, until the reservoir is refilled.
In addition, as the cooling system is
The next time you stop, have the screenwash/
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
headlamp wash reservoir topped up.
switching off the engine before carrying out any
work.
201
Checks Air filter Particle filter (Diesel)

Unless otherwise indicated, check these Depending on the environment The start of saturation of the particle
components in accordance with the (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the filter is signalled by the temporary
manufacturer's service schedule and according use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), illumination of this warning lamp
to your engine. replace it twice as often if accompanied by a message warning
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN necessary. of the risk of the filter clogging up.
12 V battery Passenger compartment Traffic conditions permitting, regenerate

the filter by driving at a speed of at least
The battery does not require any filter 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
maintenance. Depending on the environment goes off.
However, check regularly that the (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates
terminals are correctly tightened use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), a low Diesel additive level.
(versions without quick release terminals) replace it twice as often if For more information on Checking levels,
and that the connections are clean. necessary. refer to the corresponding section.
For more information and the precautions

to take before starting work on the 12 V
battery, refer to the corresponding A clogged passenger compartment On a new vehicle, the first particle
section. filter may have an adverse effect on filter regeneration operations may be
the performance of the air conditioning accompanied by a "burning" smell, which
system and generate undesirable odours. is perfectly normal.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are Following prolonged operation of the
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
specific technology and specification. Oil filter you may, in exceptional circumstances,
Its replacement should be carried out notice the emission of water vapour at the
Change the oil filter each time the
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified exhaust on acceleration. This does not
engine oil is changed.
workshop. affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the
environment.
202
Manual gearbox Brake disc wear The pressures given on the tyre pressure label
are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven for
The gearbox does not require any more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles
maintenance (no oil change). For information on checking brake (10 kilometres) at more than 31 mph (50 km/h),
disc wear, contact a CITROËN 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be added to the values
dealer or a qualified workshop. given on the label.
Under-inflation increases fuel consumption.
Non-compliant tyre pressure causes premature
Automatic gearbox wear on tyres and has an adverse effect on the
vehicle's road holding – Risk of an accident!
The gearbox does not require any Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces
maintenance (no oil change). Electric parking brake braking efficiency and control of the vehicle's
steering. Regular inspections of the condition
This system does not require any of tyres (tread and sides) and rims are
specific check. However, in the recommended as well as making sure that
event of a problem, have the system
Brake pads valves are fitted.
checked by a CITROËN dealer or Using different size wheels and tyres from
Brake wear depends on the style a qualified workshop. those specified can affect the lifetime of tyres,
of driving, particularly in the case wheel rotation, ground clearance and the
of vehicles used in town, over short speedometer reading and have an adverse
distances. It may be necessary to effect on road holding.
For more information on the Electric
7
have the condition of the brakes Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles
checked, even between vehicle parking brake, refer to the corresponding
can cause the ESC to mistime.
services. section.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in

the brake fluid level indicates that the brake Wheels and tyres
pads are worn. The pressure must be checked on
all tyres, including the spare wheel,
when the tyres are "cold", at least
once a month and before a long
journey.
203
Only use products recommended by SCR system Once the AdBlue ® tank is empty, a system
CITROËN or products of equivalent quality ®
Using a fluid called AdBlue that contains required by regulations prevents starting
and specification. urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of the engine.
In order to optimise the operation of of nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and If the SCR system is defective, the level of
components as important as those in the water, which are harmless to health and the emissions from your vehicle will no longer
braking system, CITROËN selects and environment. meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle
offers very specific products. becomes polluting.
After washing the vehicle, dampness, or In the event of a confirmed fault with the
The AdBlue ® is contained in
in wintry conditions, ice can form on the SCR system, you must go to a CITROËN
a special tank holding about
brake discs and pads: braking efficiency dealer or a qualified workshop as soon
17 litres.
may be reduced. Make light brake as possible: after a running distance of
applications to dry and defrost the brakes. 685 miles (1,100 km), a system will be
triggered automatically to prevent engine
Its capacity allows a driving range of around starting.
12,500 miles (20,000 km). An alert system is In either case, a range indicator gives you
triggered automatically once the reserve level the distance you can travel before the
is reached: you can then drive for a further vehicle is immobilised.
AdBlue® (BlueHDi engines) 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is
empty.
To respect the environment and ensure
compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without
adversely affecting the performance or fuel For more information on the Warning and
consumption of Diesel engines, CITROËN indicator lamps and associated alerts,
has taken the decision to equip its vehicles refer to the corresponding section.
with a system that associates SCR (Selective
Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel particle filter
Freezing of the AdBlue ®
(DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases.
AdBlue ® freezes at temperatures below
around -11°C.
The SCR system includes a heater for the
AdBlue ® tank, allowing you to continue
driving in very cold conditions.
204
Topping up the AdBlue® You can obtain AdBlue ® from a CITROËN Precautions for use
Filling the AdBlue ® tank is an operation AdBlue ® is a urea-based solution. This liquid
included in every routine service on your is non-flammable, colourless and odourless
vehicle by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified You can also visit a petrol station (when kept in a cool place).
workshop. equipped with AdBlue ® pumps specially In the event of contact with the skin, wash the
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it designed for passenger vehicles (for those affected area with soap and water. In the event
may be necessary to top up the fluid between versions with access to the AdBlue ® tank of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) the
services, more particularly if an alert (warning via the fuel filler flap). eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye
lamps and a message) signals the requirement. wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If you feel
You can go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified a persistent burning sensation or irritation, get
workshop. medical attention.
If you envisage topping up yourself, please Never top up from an AdBlue ® dispenser If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
read the following warnings carefully. reserved for heavy goods vehicles. with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
In certain conditions (at high temperature,
for example), the risk of release of ammonia
cannot be excluded: do not inhale the vapour.
Recommendations on
Supply of AdBlue® storage
Ammonia has an irritant effect on mucous
membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
AdBlue ® freezes at about -11°C and
It is recommended that the AdBlue ® is deteriorates above 25°C. It should be stored in
topped up as soon as the first alert is
7
a cool place and protected from direct sunlight.
issued indicating that the reserve level has Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept
been reached. for at least a year.
If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it Keep AdBlue ® out of the reach of children,
has completely thawed out. in its original container or bottle.
In order to ensure that the SCR system
operates correctly:
- Use only AdBlue ® liquid that meets the
ISO 22241 standard.
- Never transfer AdBlue ® to another Never keep containers or bottles of
Procedure
container: it would lose its purity. AdBlue ® in your vehicle. Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure
- Never dilute AdBlue ® with water. that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level
surface.
205
In winter, check that the temperature of the F Press the "START/STOP" button to switch
Important: in the event of a top-up after
vehicle is above -11°C. If not, due to freezing, off the engine.
a breakdown because of a lack of
the AdBlue ® cannot be poured into the tank.
AdBlue, you must wait around 5 minutes
Park your vehicle somewhere warmer for a few
before switching on the ignition, without
hours before topping up.
opening the driver's door, locking the
vehicle, introducing the key into the
ignition switch, or introducing the key of
In the event of an AdBlue ® breakdown, the Keyless Entry and Starting system
confirmed by the message "Add AdBlue: into the passenger compartment.
Starting impossible", you must top up with Switch on the ignition, then wait for
at least 5 litres. 10 seconds before starting the engine.
Access to the AdBlue® tank via

Never pour AdBlue ® into the Diesel fuel
the boot
tank.
Filling the AdBlue ® tank is an operation
included in every routine service on your
If any AdBlue ® is splashed, or if there are
vehicle by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
any spillages on the side of the body, rinse
workshop.
immediately with cold water or wipe with
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it
a damp cloth.
may be necessary to top up the fluid between
If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off
services, as soon as an alert (warning lamps
using a sponge and hot water.
and a message) indicates it.
You can go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop. F To gain access to the AdBlue ® tank, raise
If you intend to do the topping-up yourself, the floor of the boot or, for the 7-seater
read the following procedure carefully. version, fold down the seat of the 3rd row on
the right.
The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies
topping up.
206
Important:
To prevent the AdBlue ® tank from
overflowing, it is recommended:
F To top up between 10 and 13 litres
using containers of AdBlue ®.
Or
F Without pressing, turn the black cap F If filling in a service station, stop after
a quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off. Read the following procedure carefully to the third automatic shut-off of the
F Turn the blue cap anti-clockwise and lift it be able to top up properly. nozzle.
off.
F Obtain a non-drip bottle of AdBlue ®. After F Press the "START/STOP" button to switch
first checking the use-by date, carefully off the engine.
read the instructions for use on the label F With the vehicle unlocked and the fuel filler
F After refilling, carry out these same
before pouring the contents of the bottle into flap open, turn the AdBlue ® blue filler cap
operations in reverse order.
your vehicle's AdBlue ® tank. anti-clockwise.
F After filling, perform the same operations in
F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue ®. After first
reverse order.
checking the use-by date, carefully read
the instructions for use on the label before
Access to the AdBlue® tank via pouring the contents of the container into
the fuel filler flap your vehicle's AdBlue ® tank.
7
A blue cap under the fuel filler flap indicates Or
access to the AdBlue ® tank. F Insert the AdBlue ® pump nozzle and fill the
tank until the nozzle stops automatically.
207
In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle Placing the triangle on the Access to the kit

This safety device is used in addition to the
road
hazard warning lamps. F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as
Its presence in the vehicle may be mandatory. required by the legislation in force in your
country.
Temporary puncture
repair kit
Scan the QR code on page 3 to view
explanatory videos.
Comprising a compressor and a sealant

cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of
a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest The kit is stowed in a bag inside the storage
A space is provided for the storage of the
garage. box located at the foot of the second row
triangle in the interior trim of the tailgate.
It is designed to repair most punctures which passenger seat.
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread
or shoulder.
Before leaving your vehicle to set up and
install the triangle, switch on the hazard
warning lamps and put on your high
visibility vest. The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of the compressor for long
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
Refer to the instructions on assembly/ repair.
unfolding indicated in the user guide
supplied with the triangle.
208
Composition of the kit F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
repaired, and place it in a clean area.
F Connect the pipe from the compressor to

1. 12 V compressor, with built-in pressure the bottle of sealant.
gauge.
2. Bottle of sealant, with built-in hose.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies which F Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant
3. Speed limit sticker.
have penetrated into the tyre. to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and
tighten firmly.
Repair procedure F Check that the compressor switch is at the
"O" position.
F Park the vehicle without obstructing any F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under
traffic and apply the parking brake. the compressor.
F Follow the safety instructions (hazard F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing the vehicle's 12 V socket.
8
high visibility vest, etc.) according to the
legislation in force in the country where you
Only the 12 V socket located at the front of
are driving.
the vehicle can be used.
F Switch off the ignition.
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
compressor. F Affix the speed limit sticker.
F Turn the sealant bottle over and secure it in
the notch provided on the compressor.
209
The speed limit sticker must be secured If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after
to the interior of the vehicle in the driver's about 7 minutes, this indicates that the
field of vision, to remind you that a wheel tyre is not repairable; contact a CITROËN
is in temporary use. dealer or a qualified workshop for
assistance.
F Place the switch in the "O" position.

F Disconnect the compressor's electric plug F Drive immediately for approximately three
The tyre inflation pressures are given on from the vehicle's 12 V socket. miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed
this label. F Replace the cap on the valve. (between 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)),
F Remove the kit. to plug the puncture.
F Remove and then store the bottle of sealant. F Stop to check the repair and measure the
tyre pressure using the kit.
Do not exceed the speed of 50 mph
Take care, the sealant product is harmful (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired
if swallowed and causes irritation to the using this type of kit.
eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
The use-by date of the fluid is marked on
Checking/adjusting tyre
the bottle. pressures
After use, do not discard the bottle in
standard waste, take it to a CITROËN You can also use the compressor,
dealer or an authorised waste disposal without injecting sealant, to check and, if
site. necessary, adjust the tyre pressures.
F Start the compressor by turning the switch
to the "l" position until the pressure of the Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of
tyre reaches 2.0 bars. The sealant product sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer
is injected under pressure into the tyre; or a qualified workshop. F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and
do not disconnect the pipe from the valve place it in a clean area.
during this operation (risk of blowback).
210
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the F Start the compressor by placing the switch
compressor. at position "I" and adjust the pressure to the
Spare wheel
value shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure
label. To deflate: press the black button
located on the compressor pipe, near the
valve connection. Procedure for changing a wheel with
a damaged or punctured tyre for the spare
wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after Scan the QR code on page 3 to view
7 minutes, this indicates that the tyre is explanatory videos.
not repairable; contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop for assistance.
F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten
firmly. Access to tooling
F Check that the compressor switch is at the
"O" position.
F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under F Once the correct pressure is reached, put
the compressor. the switch to the "O" position.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to F Remove the kit then stow it.
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Switch on the ignition. Do not drive more than 125 miles (200 km)
with the repaired tyre; see a CITROËN
Only the 12 V socket located at the front dealer or a qualified workshop to change
of the vehicle can be used to power the the tyre.
8
compressor.
Should the pressure of one or more tyres The tools are installed in the boot under the
be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise floor.
the under-inflation detection system. Remove the boot carpet to access them.
For more information on Tyre under-
The tyre inflation pressures are given on inflation detection, refer to the
this label. corresponding section.
211
List of tools 4. Wheel bolt cover removal tool. Access to the spare wheel
Removes the wheel bolt covers on alloy
(Depending on equipment.) wheels. The spare wheel is located in the boot, under
the floor.
5. Socket for the security bolts (located in
the glove box).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special Taking out the wheel
"security" bolts.
6. Towing eye and tool to open the front
protective cover.
For more information on Towing, refer to the

All of these tools are specific to your

vehicle and may vary according to the
level of equipment.
Do not use them for any other purposes.
F Loosen the central nut.

The jack must only be used to change F Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt).
a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. F Raise the spare wheel towards you from the
Do not use any jack other than the one rear.
supplied with this vehicle. F Take the wheel out of the boot.
If the vehicle does not have its original jack,
1. Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and the wheel
workshop to obtain the correct jack for it.
fastening bolts.
The jack meets European standards,
2. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (except as defined in the Machinery Directive
versions with manual gearbox). 2006/42/EC.
3. Jack with integrated handle. The jack does not require any
Used to raise the vehicle. maintenance.
212
Putting the spare wheel back in Since the width of the spare wheel is
place smaller than the width of the wheels of
the vehicle, in the event of a puncture, the
punctured wheel must be stored in the boot.
Spare wheel
One part of the tools can be accessed from the

Procedure for changing a wheel with
boot.
a damaged or punctured tyre for the spare
F Put the wheel back in its housing. The immobilisation chock 2 as well as the
wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
F Loosen the nut on the bolt by a few turns. wheelbrace extension 6 are stored in the right-
F Position the fastening device (nut and bolt) hand section of the boot sill trim.
in the middle of the wheel. Scan the QR code on page 3 to view The wheelbrace 1 and the towing eye 7 are
F Tighten fully until the central nut clicks to explanatory videos. stored in the left-hand section of the boot sill
retain the wheel correctly. trim.
Access to tooling The rest of the tools, the jack 3 and the wheel
bolt cover removal tool 4, are stored in a box
(Depending on version. The full set of tools is attached to the spare wheel.
supplied with the spare wheel.) The assembly is secured under the vehicle by
8
means of a winch carrier system.
F Put the box back in place in the centre of

the wheel.
213
List of tools 4. Wheel bolt cover removal tool. Wheel with wheel trim
Removes the wheel bolt covers on alloy
(Depending on version. The full set of tools is wheels. When removing the wheel, first remove the
supplied with the spare wheel.) 5. Socket for wheel security bolts (stored in trim using the wheelbrace 1 by pulling at the
the glove box). valve aperture.
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special When refitting the wheel, refit the trim
"security" bolts. starting by placing its notch facing the valve
and press around its edge with the palm of your
6. Wheelbrace extension.
hand.
For slackening/tightening the spare wheel
winch cable carrier nut.
7. Towing eye and tool to open the front
protective cover.
Access to the spare wheel
For more information on Towing, refer to the (Depending on version.)
All of these tools are specific to your

vehicle and may vary according to the
level of equipment.
Do not use them for any other purposes.
The jack must only be used to change

a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
Do not use any jack other than the one
supplied with this vehicle.
1. Wheelbrace. The spare wheel is supported by a winch
If the vehicle does not have its original jack,
For removing the wheel trim and removing carrier system underneath the vehicle.
the wheel bolts.
workshop to obtain the correct jack for it.
2. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (except The jack meets European standards, Only a "space-saver" type spare wheel
for versions with manual gearbox). as defined in the Machinery Directive may be fixed underneath the vehicle.
3. Jack with integrated handle. 2006/42/EC.
Used to raise the vehicle. The jack does not require any
maintenance.
214
Taking out the spare wheel F Detach the assembly of wheel and box from
the rear of the vehicle.
F Fold back the concertina board and install
the third row seat, on the left-hand side (if
your vehicle is equipped with it).
F Lift the pre-cut section of carpet to remove
the fixing winch nut from the spare wheel.
F Press the tab, slide the lid on the box up

to the middle and remove it to access the
other tools (jack and alloy wheel bolt cover
F Straighten the spare wheel to access tool removal tool).
box (A).
Tool storage
F Put the tools back in the box and store the
box in the boot of the vehicle.
F With the extension 6 placed on the end of F Reel in the winch by turning the key in
wheelbrace 1, "tighten" the nut to unwind the clockwise direction: once the cable is
the winch cable until the spare wheel is completely reeled in, you should no longer
flat on the ground. Unwind as much as feel any resistance.
8
necessary in order to access the wheel F Store the rest of the tools in the storage
easily. areas in the boot.
F Detach the connecting piece from the cover The wheel with the punctured tyre cannot
of the tool box (B – C). be fitted under the vehicle. It must be
F Pass the connecting piece through the stored in the boot. Use a cover to protect
wheel hub to release it (D). the interior of the boot.
215
Putting the winch carrier and F Pass the connecting piece through the
spare wheel back in place wheel hub (A).
F Replace the wheel/box assembly beneath

the vehicle by "loosening" the winch control
F Place the appropriate tools in the box and nut with the wheelbrace and extension.
close the cover again. F Insert the connecting piece into the tool box F Tighten fully. When the cable is completely
F Place the tool box on the ground. hole (B – C). reeled in, turning the nut no longer
F Centre and position the spare wheel on the encounters resistance.
When the spare wheel is fitted in place of tool box (D). F Check that the wheel is properly flattened
a wheel with a punctured tyre, the winch against the floor.
and tool box must be refitted underneath
the vehicle again before restarting.
F Straighten the wheel.
F Insert the centring guide into the wheel hub.

F Place the wheel/box assembly beneath the
rear of the vehicle.
216
Removing a wheel List of operations F Place the foot of the jack 3 on the ground
and ensure that it is directly below the front
A or rear B jacking point provided on the
Parking the vehicle
underbody, whichever is closest to the
Stop the vehicle where it does not block
wheel to be changed.
traffic: the ground must be level, stable
and non-slippery.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
Apply the parking brake, unless it is
ground is slippery or loose, the jack may
programmed in automatic mode; switch
slip or collapse – Risk of injury!
off the ignition and put the vehicle into first
Ensure that the jack is positioned only at
gear* so as to block the wheels.
one of the jacking points A or B under the
Check that the braking warning lamp and
vehicle, making sure that the vehicle's
the P warning lamp in the parking brake
contact surface is centred on the head of
control lever come on.
the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
For more safety, position the chock
damaged and/or the jack could collapse –
2 against the wheel opposite the one you
Risk of injury!
are replacing. F Remove the bolt cover(s) using the tool 4
Make absolutely certain that all the (according to equipment).
occupants have left the vehicle and are F Fit security socket 5 on wheelbrace 1 to
waiting in a safe area. slacken the security bolt (according to
Never go underneath a vehicle raised equipment).
using a jack; use an axle stand. F Slacken the other bolts (no more than
a 1/4 turn) using the wheelbrace 1 only.
8
Do not use:
- the jack for any other purpose than
lifting the vehicle,
- a jack other than the one supplied by
the manufacturer.
F Extend the jack 3 until its head comes into
* position P for the automatic gearbox contact with jacking point A or B used,
with contact surface A or B on the vehicle
correctly engaged with the central part of
the head of the jack.
217
Fitting a wheel List of operations
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient

space between the wheel and the ground The jack must only be used to change
a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. F Put the wheel in place on the hub.
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
F Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.
easily.
F Pre-tighten the security bolt using
The jack does not require any wheelbrace 1 fitted with security socket 5
maintenance. (according to equipment).
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
The jack meets European standards, wheelbrace 1 only.
as defined in the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC.
F Remove the bolts and keep them in a clean

place.
F Remove the wheel.
F Lower the vehicle again fully.
F Fold jack 3 and detach it.
218
After changing a wheel
With a "space-saver" type spare wheel
The following is recommended:

F Tighten the security bolt using the - deactivate some driving aid functions
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket (Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise The tyre inflation pressures are given on
5 (according to equipment). control with Stop function, etc.), as this label.
F Tighten the other bolts using wheelbrace indicated on the label attached to the
1 only. wheel,
F Refit the wheel bolt cover(s) (according to - do not exceed the maximum
equipment). authorised speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
F Store the tools in the box.
Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

Fitting the "space-saver" spare wheel workshop as soon as possible to have the
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, tightness of the bolts and the pressure of
when tightening the bolts on fitting, it is the spare wheel checked.
normal to notice that the washers do not Have the punctured tyre examined. After
8
come into contact with the "space-saver" inspection, the technician will advise you
spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it
conical contact of each bolt. must be replaced.
219
Changing a bulb In some weather conditions (e.g. low Front lamps

temperature or humidity), the presence Model with xenon headlamps
The lamps have polycarbonate lenses with of misting on the internal surface of the
a protective coating: glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
F do not clean them using a dry or normal; it disappears after the lamps have
abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent been on for a few minutes.
or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH
neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer Risk of electrocution
on persistent marks, do not keep the Xenon bulbs (D5S-25W) must be replaced
lance directed towards the lamps or by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
their edges for too long, so as not to workshop.
damage their protective coating and
seals.
Light-emitting diodes (LED)

For the replacement of this type of bulb,
you must contact a CITROËN dealer or
Changing a bulb should only be done after
1. Dipped beam headlamps (D5S-25W).
the lamp has been switched off for several
2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).
minutes (risk of serious burns).
3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
F Do not touch the bulb directly with your
(6 light-emitting diodes – LEDs).
fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet 4. Direction indicators
(UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the (6 light-emitting diodes – LEDs).
headlamp. 5. Foglamps (H11-55W).
Always replace a failed bulb with a new
bulb with the same type and specification.
220
Model with halogen headlamps Directional dipped beam F Remove the protective plastic cover by
headlamps (xenon model) pulling the tab.
F Push the connector.
F Pull the bulb to change it.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
Dipped beam headlamps

(halogen model)
Replacement of D5S xenon bulbs

must be done by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop as there is a risk of
electrocution.
In case of a fault in one of the two D5S
bulbs, it is recommended to also replace
the bulb on the opposite side.
1. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).
3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps Main beam headlamps (xenon
(4 light-emitting diodes – LEDs). model) F Turn the protective plastic cover to remove
4. Direction indicators (PWY24W). it.
(light emitting diodes – LEDs). F Disconnect the connector.
8
5. Foglamps (H11-55W). F Unhook the clips.
For bulbs with lugs (type H7, etc.), take
care to observe their correct installation so
as to ensure the best lighting performance.
221
Main beam headlamps (halogen model) F Unclip the finisher by pulling at the top.
Quicker flashing of the direction indicator
F Remove the two screws to remove the unit.
light (left or right) indicates that one of
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn.
the bulbs on the corresponding side has
F Remove the bulb holder.
failed.
F Change the faulty bulb.
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order,
The direction indicator bulb is located below pressing on the finisher to refit it.
the headlamp.
F Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise
a quarter of a turn.
F Remove the bulb holder.
F Change the faulty bulb. Door mirror spotlamps
F Remove the protective plastic cover by
pulling the tab. Direction indicators (light-
F Push the connector. emitting diodes – LEDs)
To reassemble, proceed in reverse order. For the replacement of this type of lamp,
workshop.
Direction indicators
Front foglamps You should contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop for the replacement of the
light-emitting diode – LED.
Integrated direction indicator

side repeaters
You should contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop for the replacement of
these bulbs.
222
Rear lamps Model with bulb lamps
F Remove the access cover.

3. Sidelamps (5W5).
4. Brake lamps (P21/W).
5. Direction indicators (WY16W).
1. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
6. Reversing lamp (W16W).
2. Sidelamps/foglamps (P21/5W).
Model with LED lamps Light-emitting diodes – LEDs
For replacement, contact a CITROËN

8
F Remove the three lamp fixing screws A.
Tailgate lamps F Disconnect the connector.
F Identify the faulty bulb. F Carefully remove the lamp from the outside
F Open the boot. by pushing the retaining clip B.
3. Brake lamps/sidelamps (light-emitting

diodes – LEDs).
4. Reversing lamps (W16W).
5. Direction indicators (PY21W).
223
For the replacement of the bulbs of the Model with LED lamps
sidelamps and of the brake lamps:
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
clockwise and remove it.
F Change the bulb.
Model with LED lamps
Rear lamps
3. Sidelamps (light emitting diodes – LEDs).

4. Brake lamps (light emitting diodes –
LEDs).
5. Direction indicators (PY21W).
6. Reversing lamps (light emitting diodes –
LEDs).
Light-emitting diodes – LEDs
Model with bulb lamps 1. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).

For replacement, contact a CITROËN
2. Sidelamps/foglamps (P21/5W). dealer or a qualified workshop.
For the replacement of the bulbs of the
reversing lamp and of the direction indicators:
F Use the "universal" type tweezers to turn
the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-clockwise
and remove it.
F Change the bulb.
224
Model with bulb lamps Model with bulb lamps
F Remove the three lamp fixing screws A.

3. Sidelamps (W5W). F Disconnect the connector.
4. Brake lamps/sidelamps (P21W). Direction indicators, sidelamps
F Carefully remove the lamp from its location.
and foglamps
5. Direction indicators (WY16W). F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
6. Reversing lamp. (W16W). clockwise and remove it.
F Change the bulb.
Tailgate lamp
Model with LED lamps
For access, pass your hand under the bumper.

8
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
remove it.
Identify the faulty bulb. F Change the bulb.
F Open the boot. To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
F Remove the access cover.
225
You can also contact a CITROËN dealer or F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cut-
a qualified workshop for the replacement of outs in the lens.
these bulbs. F Push it outwards to unclip it.
F Remove the lens.
F Change the faulty bulb.
Third brake lamp (light-emitting To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.
diodes – LEDs)
Changing a fuse
Access to tooling F Open the glove box
The extraction tweezers are fitted in the F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left,
dashboard fuses compartment. then right.
F Completely remove the cover by carefully
pulling it in the axis indicated by the arrow.
F Remove the tweezers.
For the replacement of this type of lamp,

Changing a fuse
workshop.
Before changing a fuse, it is necessary to:
Number plate lamps (W5W) F identify the cause of the failure and correct
it,
F switch off all electrical loads,
F immobilise the vehicle and switch off the
ignition,
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top right, F identify the defective fuse using the existing
then left, allocation tables and diagrams.
F Completely remove the cover by carefully
pulling it in the axis indicated by the arrow,
F Remove the tweezers.
226
To remove or fit a fuse, it is essential to: Installing electrical accessories Access to the fuses
F use the special tweezers to extract the fuse
from its housing and check the condition of
its filament,
Your vehicle's electrical system is
F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse
designed to operate with standard or
of the same rating (same colour); using
optional equipment.
a different rating could cause faults (risk of
Before installing other electrical
fire).
equipment or accessories on your vehicle,
If the fuse fails again soon after replacement,
have the vehicle's electrical system checked by
workshop.
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
CITROËN will not accept responsibility for

the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle
or for rectifying malfunctions resulting
from the installation of accessories
not supplied and not recommended by
CITROËN and not installed in accordance
with its instructions, in particular when
the combined consumption of all of the
Good Failed
additional equipment connected exceeds
10 milliamperes.
8
Fuses in the dashboard
Tweezers
The two fuseboxes are located in the lower
dashboard (left-hand side).
Replacing a fuse not shown in the tables
may cause a serious malfunction of your
vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer or
227
Fuse tables
Fusebox 1
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 40 A Heated rear screen.
F2 20 A Electric door mirrors.
F5 30 A Panoramic glass sunroof blind.
F6 20 A 12 V, rear multimedia sockets.
F7 20 A 230 V socket.
F9 25 A Heated seats.
F10 20 A Trailer interface unit.
F11 20 A Air conditioning blower.
F12 30 A Electric window motor.
228
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F7 10 A 12 V boot socket, rear multimedia.
F8 20 A Rear windscreen wiper.
F10 30 A Locks.
F17 5A Instrument panel.
F18 5A Automatic gearbox selector.
F21 3A START/STOP button.

Fusebox 2
F22 3A Rain and sunshine sensor, windscreen camera.
F24 5A Parking aid, panoramic visual aid.
F27 5A Automatic gearbox.
F29 20 A Audio and telematics systems.
F32 15 A 12 V sockets.
F35 5A Headlamp beam height adjustment, heated rear screen, radar.
F36 5A Lighting: glove box, central storage, reading lamps, courtesy
8
lamps.
229
Fuses in the engine Table of fuses

compartment
Fuse no. Rating Functions
The fusebox is placed in the engine
compartment near the battery. F16 20 A Headlamp wash.
F18 10 A Right-hand main beam headlamp.

Access to the fuses
F19 10 A Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F29 40 A Wipers.
F Unclip the cover by pushing the 2 red

latches towards the back of the vehicle.
F Change the fuse.
F When you have finished, close the cover
very carefully to ensure correct sealing of
the fusebox.
230
12 V battery Access to the battery Starting using another

battery
General points
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
Lead-acid starter batteries engine can be started using a backup battery
(external or from another vehicle) and jump
Batteries contain harmful substances leads or a battery booster.
such as sulphuric acid and lead.
They must be disposed of in
accordance with regulations and must
Never try to start the engine by connecting
not, in any circumstances, be discarded
a battery charger.
with household waste.
Never use a 24 V or higher battery
Take used remote control batteries and
booster.
vehicle batteries to a special collection The battery is located under the bonnet. Check beforehand that the backup
point. For access to the (+) terminal: battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and
F release the bonnet using the interior lever, a capacity at least equal to that of the
Protect your eyes and face before then the exterior safety catch, discharged battery.
handling the battery. F raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay, The two vehicles must not be in contact
All operations on the battery must be F lift the plastic cover for access to the (+) with each other.
carried out in a well ventilated area and terminal. Switch off the electrical consumers on
away from naked flames and sources of both vehicles (audio system, wipers,
The battery (-) terminal is not accessible. lighting, etc.).
sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion
A remote earth point is located on the upper Ensure that the jump lead cables do not
or fire.
part of the bonnet (next to the battery). pass close to moving parts of the engine
Wash your hands afterwards.
8
(cooling fan, belts, etc.).
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while
the engine is running.
231
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the In some circumstances it may be necessary to
good battery and leave it running for a few charge the battery:
minutes. - if you only use your vehicle for short
F Operate the starter on the broken down journeys,
vehicle and let the engine run. - if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
If the engine does not start straight away, several weeks.
switch off the ignition and wait a few moments Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
before trying again. workshop.
F Wait until the engine returns to idle then

disconnect the jump lead cables in the
If you wish to charge your vehicle's battery
reverse order.
yourself, use only a charger compatible
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
with lead-acid batteries with a nominal
your vehicle has one.
voltage of 12 V.
F Allow the engine to run for at least
30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle
stationary, so that the battery reaches an
adequate state of charge. Follow the instructions provided by the
F Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if manufacturer of the charger.
your vehicle has one. Never reverse polarities.
Some functions, including Stop & Start,
F Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of
are not available if the battery is not
flat battery A (at the metal elbow) then to
sufficiently charged. It is not necessary to disconnect the
the (+) terminal of backup battery B or the
booster. battery.
F Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the (-) terminal of backup battery
B or the booster (or an earth point on the
Charging the battery using
other vehicle). a battery charger
F Connect the other end of the green or black For optimum service life of the battery, it is
cable to earth point C on the broken down essential to maintain an adequate state of
vehicle. charge.
232
F At the end of the charging operation, switch Before disconnecting the battery:
off charger B before disconnecting the F close all openings (doors, boot, windows,
cables from battery A. roof),
F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, wipers, lighting, etc.).
F switch off the ignition and wait for four
minutes.
At the battery, detach the (+) terminal only.
If this label is present, it is essential to

use only a 12 V charger to avoid causing
irreversible damage to the electrical
components related to the Stop & Start Quick-release terminal clamp
system.
Disconnecting the (+) terminal
Never try to charge a frozen battery – risk

F Switch off the ignition. of explosion!
F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio If the battery has frozen, have it checked
system, lighting, wipers, etc.). by a CITROËN dealer or by a qualified
F Switch off charger B before connecting the workshop who will check that the internal
cables to the battery, so as to avoid any components have not been damaged and
dangerous sparks. that the container has not cracked, which
F Ensure that the charger cables are in good would mean a risk of toxic and corrosive
8
condition. acid leaking.
F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has F Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp B.
one, on the (+) terminal. F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off.
F Connect charger B cables as follows: Disconnecting the battery
- the (+) red cable to the (+) terminal of
In order to maintain an adequate state
battery A,
of charge for starting the engine, it is
- the (-) black cable to earth point C on the
recommended that the battery be disconnected
vehicle.
if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long
period.
233
Reconnecting the (+) terminal Referring to the corresponding section, you

must yourself reinitialise (depending on
Towing
version): Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for
- the remote control key, towing another vehicle using the towing eye.
- the electric blind(s),
- etc.
Access to tooling
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
specific technology and specification.
Its replacement should be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
F Raise the lever A fully.
F Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal.
F Push the clamp B fully down.
F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B.
The Stop & Start system may not be
operational during the trip following the
first engine start.
Do not force the lever as locking will not In this case, the system will only be The towing eye is installed in the boot under
be possible if the clamp is not positioned available again after a continuous the floor.
correctly; start the procedure again. period of immobilisation of the vehicle, The tool for opening the front protective cover
a period which depends on the exterior is fixed to the towing eye.
temperature and the state of charge of the To access it:
battery (up to about 8 hours). F open the boot,
Following reconnection of the
battery F lift the floor and remove it,
Following reconnection of the battery, switch on F remove the towing eye from the holder.
the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to
permit initialisation of the electronic systems. If
minor problems nevertheless persist following
this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or
234
Towing your vehicle F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on

General recommendations
both vehicles.
Observe the legislation in force in your
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
country.
distance.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
vehicle is greater than that of the towed
vehicle. Towing another vehicle
The driver must remain at the wheel of
the towed vehicle and must have a valid
driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, always use an approved
towbar: rope and straps are prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When the vehicle is towed with its engine
off, there is no longer braking and steering F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
assistance. using the tool fixed on the ring.
In the following cases, you must always F Screw the towing eye in fully.
call on a professional recovery service: F Install the towbar.
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or F Move the gear lever into neutral (position N F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
fast road, for an automatic gearbox). pressing at the bottom.
- four-wheel drive vehicle, F Screw the towing eye in fully.
- when it is not possible to put the F Install the towbar.
gearbox into neutral, unlock the F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
steering, or release the parking brake, both vehicles.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
8
- towing with only two wheels on the damage to some components (braking,
ground, distance.
driveline, etc.) and the absence of braking
- where there is no approved towbar, assistance when the engine is restarted.
etc. available.
F Unlock the steering by turning the ignition

key one notch and release the parking
brake.
235
BlueHDi 130 S&S and F Put the cover back in place and clip it in.
Running out of fuel F Close the bonnet.
(Diesel) BlueHDi 160 S&S engines
On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
system must be primed if you run out of fuel. Diesel.
For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
corresponding engine compartment view. engine).
F Wait around 1 minute and switch off the
ignition.
F Operate the starter to run the engine.
If the engine does not start, repeat the
For more information on Diesel misfuel
procedure.
prevention, refer to the corresponding
section.
Other engines
If the engine does not start first time, do
not keep trying but start the procedure F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
again from the beginning. Diesel.
F Open the bonnet.
F If necessary, unclip the cover to access the
BlueHDi 100 S&S, BlueHDi priming pump.
115/120 S&S and BlueHDi F Operate the priming pump
135/150 S&S engines repeatedly until resistance is felt
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of (there may be resistance on the
Diesel. first press).
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine). F Operate the starter to start the engine (if the
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the engine does not start at the first attempt,
ignition. wait around 15 seconds before trying
F Repeat the operation 10 times. again).
F Operate the starter to run the engine. F If the engine does not start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again
then start the engine.
236
Technical data
The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load

Engine technical data and values indicated are valid up to a maximum
towed loads altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value
must be reduced by 10% for each additional
Engines 1,000 metres of altitude.
The maximum authorised nose weight
The engine characteristics are given in the corresponds to the weight permitted on the
vehicle's registration document, as well as in towball.
sales brochures.
When exterior temperatures are high,

The maximum power corresponds to the
the vehicle performance may be limited
value type-approved on a test bed, under
in order to protect the engine. When the
conditions defined in European legislation
exterior temperature is higher than 37°C,
(Directive 1999/99/EC).
limit the towed weight.

Towing using a lightly loaded vehicle can
adversely affect roadholding.
Braking distances are increased when
Weights and towed loads towing a trailer.
When using a vehicle to tow, never
The weights and towed loads relating to your exceed a speed of approximately 60 mph
vehicle are given in the registration document, (100 km/h) (observe the local legislation
as well as in sales brochures. in force).
These values are also given on the
manufacturer's plate or label.
If the exterior temperature is high, it is
9
dealer or a qualified workshop. recommended that the engine is allowed
to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle
comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.
237
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – PETROL

PureTech PureTech PureTech PureTech PureTech
Petrol engines
110 S&S** 130 S&S** 130 S&S*** 130 S&S** 130 S&S***
BVM6 (manual BVM6 (manual BVM6 (manual EAT6 (automatic EAT8 (automatic
Gearbox
6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 8-speed)
Code EB2DTS EB2DTS EB2ADTS EB2DTS EB2ADTS
3D 3D…3E… 3A … 3D… 3E… 3A … 3D… 3E… 3A … 3D… 3E… 3A …

Model codes HNX… HNY… HNY…
HNS…P HNS…R
M/1S – M/2SM M/1S – M/2SM T/1S – T/2S
Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 96 96 96
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) 1,270-1,050- 1,270-1,050-

1,130 - -
on a 10% or 12% gradient 1,050 1,050
Unbraked trailer 640 640-647-648 - 640-647-648 -
Recommended nose weight 70 70 - 70 -
** Euro 6.1 engine 3D…: CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).

3E…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
*** Euro 6.2 engine (5 seats).
3A…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(7 seats).
238
Technical data
THP 165 S&S**

Petrol engines THP 150/160** THP 165 S&S** PureTech 180 S&S***
(For Israel)
EAT6 (automatic EAT6 (automatic EAT6 (automatic EAT8 (automatic

Gearbox
6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 8-speed)
Code EP6FDTM EP6FDT EP6FDTM EP6FADTXD
3D…3E… 3A … 3D…3E… 3A … 3D…3E… 3A … 3E… 3A …
Model codes 5GX – 5GY…

5GY…
A-A/1-A/2-A/D- A/1D- 5GZT/S 5GF…R
A/S – A/1S – A/2S
A/2D-Y-Y/1-Y/2
Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,598 1,598 1,598 1,598
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110/121 121 121 132
Fuel Unleaded/Alcohol Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
1,400 1,400
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)
800 - - -
on a 10% or 12% gradient
1,250-1,200 1,250-1,200
685 685
Unbraked trailer 600 - - -
690-690 690-690
Recommended nose weight 70 70 70 -
** Euro 6.1 engine 3D…: CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).

3E…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
*** Euro 6.2 engine
9
(5 seats).
3A…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(7 seats).
239
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – DIESEL

Diesel engines HDi 115* HDi 115* BlueHDi 100 S&S**
Gearbox BVM6 (manual 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed)
Code DV6C DV6C DV6FD
3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A…

Model codes BHY…
9HC8 9HC8/1
6/1S – 6/2SM
Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,560 1,560 1,560
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 85 85 73
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel

1,400-1,240-1,200 800 1,200-1,000-1,000
Unbraked trailer 680-690-690 685-695-695 645-659-660
Recommended nose weight 70 70 70
* Euro 5 engine …/S: e-HDi model equipped with Stop &

** Euro 6.1 engine Start.
3D… : CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).
3E… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(5 seats).
3A… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer
(7 seats).
240
Technical data
Diesel engines BlueHDi 115/120 S&S** BlueHDi 130 S&S*** BlueHDi 130 S&S***
Gearbox EAT6 (automatic 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed)
Code DV6FCD DV5RC DV5RC
3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A…

Model codes BHZ – BHX… YHZ… YHZ…
T/1S – T/2S P/S – P/1S – P/2S P/S – P/1S – P/2S
Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,560 1,499 1,499
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 85/88 96 96
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel

1,400-1,200-1,200 - -
Unbraked trailer 660-675-675 - -
Recommended nose weight 70 - -
** Euro 6.1 engine …/S: e-HDi model equipped with Stop &
*** Euro 6.2 engine Start.
3D… : CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).
(5 seats).
(7 seats).
9
241
Technical data
BlueHDi BlueHDi
Diesel engines BlueHDi 130 S&S*** BlueHDi 160 S&S***
135/150 S&S** 135/150 S&S**
EAT8 (automatic BVM6 (manual EAT6 (automatic EAT8 (automatic

Gearbox
8-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 8-speed)
Code DV5RC DW10FD DW10FD DW10FCC
3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A…

Model codes AHX-AHR-AHV-AHS… AHX… EHY…
YHZ…R
M/S – M/1S T/S – T/1S R/S – R/1S
Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,499 1,997 1,997 1,997
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 110 110 120
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

- 1,500-1,450-1,400 1,500-1,380-1,300 1,500-1,300-1,300
Unbraked trailer - 745-750-750 750 750
Recommended nose weight - 70 70 70
** Euro 6.1 engine …/S: e-HDi model equipped with Stop &
Start.
*** Euro 6.2 engine 3D… : CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats).
(5 seats).
(7 seats).
242
Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on an
unladen vehicle.
* Mirrors folded in.

9
243
Technical data
Identification markings -
-
the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval number,
the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Checking tyre pressures
The tyre pressures should be checked when
Different visible markings for the identification - the maximum authorised weight (gross vehicle cold at least monthly.
and research of your vehicle. weight), The pressures given on the label are valid for
- the maximum authorised weight with trailer (gross cold tyres. If you have driven for more than
train weight), 10 minutes or more than 6 miles (10 kilometres)
- the maximum weight on the front axle, at more than 31 mph (50 km/h), the tyres will be
- the maximum weight on the rear axle. warm; in this case 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be
added to the pressures given on the label.
Never reduce the pressure of a warm tyre.
D. Tyre/paint label.
This label on the middle door pillar, driver's Low tyre pressures increase fuel
side, contains the following information: consumption.
- the tyre inflation pressures with and without
load,
- the tyre sizes (including the load index and
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), speed rating),
under the bonnet. - the spare tyre inflation pressure,
This number is engraved on the chassis near - the paint colour code.
the right-hand front wheel arch.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on
the windscreen lower cross member.
The number is on a label, visible through the
windscreen. The vehicle may be originally equipped
C. Manufacturer's label. with tyres with higher load and speed
This tamperproof label on the middle door indices than those indicated on the label,
pillar, right or left-hand side, contains the without affecting inflation pressure.
following information:
- the name of the manufacturer,
244
CITROËN Connect Radio
CITROËN Connect Radio The different functions and settings

described vary depending on the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
As a safety measure and because it

requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system must be
done with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
The system is protected in such a way that

it will only operate in your vehicle.
The display of the Energy Economy
Mode message signals that a change to
Contents standby is imminent.
Multimedia audio system –
First steps 2
Applications – Bluetooth® Steering mounted controls 3
telephone Menus 4 The link below gives access to OSS (Open
Applications 5 Source Software) codes for the system.
Radio 6 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 8 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
Media 9
Telephone 11
Settings 16
Frequently asked questions 18
.
1
Selecting the audio source (depending on version):

First steps The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
- FM/DAB*/AM* radio stations.
type.
With the engine running, a press - Telephone connected via Bluetooth* and
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
mutes the sound. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming).
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with
With the ignition off, a press turns - CD player (depending on model).
no additional product.
the system on. - USB memory stick.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
- Media player connected via the auxiliary socket
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
Adjustment of the volume. (depending on model).
* Depending on equipment.
Use the buttons on either side of or below the
touch screen for access to the menus, then
Certain information is displayed permanently in
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
the upper band of the touch screen:
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or - Reminder of the air conditioning information
"Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen (depending on version), and direct access to
for access to the menus, then press the virtual the corresponding menu.
buttons in the touch screen. - Reminder of the Radio Media and
Telephone menu information.
You can display the menus at any time by - Access to the Settings of the touch screen
In the "Settings" menu you can create
pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. and digital instrument panel.
a profile for just one person or a group
All of the touch areas of the screen are white. of people with common points, with the
Press in the grey zone to go back a level or possibility of entering a multitude of
confirm. settings (radio presets, audio settings,
Press the back arrow to go back a level or ambiences, etc.); these settings are taken
confirm. into account automatically.
2
Radio: Steering mounted controls

In very hot conditions, the volume may
Short press: display the list of radio
be limited to protect the system. It may go
stations.
– Type 2
into standby (screen and sound off) for at
Long press: update the list.
least 5 minutes
Media:
The return to normal takes place when
Short press: display the list of
the temperature in the passenger
folders.
compartment has dropped. Depending on model.
Long press: display the available
sorting options. Voice commands:
This control is located on the
Change audio source (radio; USB; steering wheel or at the end of the
Steering mounted controls AUX if equipment connected; CD;
streaming).
lighting control stalk (depending on
model).
Steering mounted controls – Short press, smartphone voice
Type 1 Confirm a selection. commands via the system.
Increase volume.
or
Increase volume.
Radio:
Select the previous/next preset radio
station.
Select the previous/next item in Mute/Restore the sound.
a menu or a list. Decrease volume.
Or
Media: Mute by pressing the volume
Select the previous/next track. or
increase and decrease buttons
Select the previous/next item in simultaneously.
a menu or a list. Mute/Restore sound by Restore the sound by pressing one
simultaneously pressing the of the two volume buttons.
increase and decrease volume
.
buttons.
3
Decrease volume. Radio Media

Menus
or Depending on model/Depending on version Select an audio source or radio
station.
Air conditioning
Manage various temperature and air
Media (short press): change the flow settings.
multimedia source.
or Telephone (short press): start
telephone call.
Call in progress (short press):
access telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an
18,5 21,5
incoming call, end call; when no call
is in progress, access telephone
menu.
Telephone
Radio (rotate): previous/next preset. Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®.
Media (rotate): previous/next track, Operate certain applications on
or move in a list. Applications a smartphone connected via
Short press: confirm a selection; if MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay ® or Android
Access configurable equipment.
nothing selected, access to presets. Auto.
Radio: display the list of stations.

Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
4
Driving Applications
Activate, deactivate or configure Viewing photos
certain vehicle functions.
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.
To protect the system, do not use a USB

hub.
The system can read folders and image files in

the formats:.tiff;.gif;.jpg/jpeg;.bmp;.png.
Settings
Configure a personal profile and/ Press Applications to display the
or configure the sound (balance, primary page.
ambience, etc.) and the display
(language, units, date, time, etc.). Navigation Press "Photos".
Configure the guidance and select

your destination via MirrorLinkTM,
CarPlay ® or Android Auto. Select a folder.
Select an image to view.
Press this button to display the

details of the photo.
.
Press the back arrow to go back
a level.
5
Managing messages Press one of the buttons for an Changing waveband

automatic search for radio stations.
Press Applications to display the Press Radio Media to display the
primary page. primary page.
Or
Press "SMS". Move the cursor for a manual search Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
for frequencies up or down. secondary page.
Press "Band" to change waveband.
Select the "SMS" tab. Or
Press the frequency.
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Press this button to select the
display settings for messages.
Enter the FM and AM waveband
values using the virtual keypad.
Press this button to search for
a contact. Presetting a station
Press "OK" to confirm.
Select a radio station or frequency.
Select the "Quick messages" tab. Make a short press on the star
Radio reception may be affected by the outline. If the star is filled in, the
use of electrical equipment not approved radio station is already preset.
Press this button to select the by the Brand, such as a USB charger
display settings for messages. Or
connected to the 12 V socket.
The external environment (hills, buildings, Select a radio station or frequency.
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
Press "Preset".
block reception, including in RDS mode.
Radio This is a normal effect of the way in Make a long press on one of the
which radio waves are transmitted and buttons to preset the station.
Selecting a station does not indicate any failure of the audio
equipment.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
6
Activating/Deactivating RDS Press Radio Media to display the Activate/Deactivate "TA".

primary page.
primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press in the grey zone to confirm.
secondary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page. Activate/Deactivate "News"/"Info".
Activate/Deactivate "RDS".
Press in the grey zone to confirm. Audio settings
Press in the grey area to confirm. primary page.

Play TA messages secondary page.
The RDS, if activated, enables you to continue The TA (Traffic Announcement) function Press "Audio settings".
listening to the same station by automatically gives priority to TA alert messages.
retuning to alternative frequencies. However, To operate, this function needs good
in certain conditions, coverage of this RDS reception of a radio station that carries
station may not be assured throughout the this type of message. While traffic Select the "Tone" or "Balance"
entire country as radio stations do not cover information is being broadcast, the current or "Ringtones" or "Sound" tab to
100% of the territory. This explains the loss of media is automatically interrupted so that configure the audio settings.
reception of the station during a journey. the TA message can be heard. Normal
play of the media previously playing is
resumed at the end of the message. Press the back arrow to confirm.
Display text information

The "Radio Text" function allows Press Radio Media to display the
information transmitted by the radio primary page.
.
station and related to the station or the
song playing to be displayed.
secondary page.
7
In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience audio DAB (Digital Audio FM-DAB Tracking
settings, as well as Bass, Medium and
Treble are different and independent for
Broadcasting) radio "DAB" does not cover 100% of the
each audio source. Terrestrial Digital Radio territory.
In the "Balance" tab, the All passengers, When the digital radio signal is poor,
Driver and Front only settings are the "FM-DAB Tracking" allows you to
Digital radio provides higher quality
common to all sources. continue listening to the same station,
reception.
In the "Sound" tab, activate or deactivate by automatically switching to the
The different "multiplex/ensemble"
"Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary corresponding FM analogue station (if
services offer a choice of radio stations
input" and "Touch tones". there is one).
arranged in alphabetical order.

Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
The balance/distribution (or spatialisation primary page.
with the Arkamys© system) is audio Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
processing that allows the quality of the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page.
sound to be adapted according to the secondary page.
number of passengers in the vehicle. Activate/Deactivate "FM-DAB
Press "Waveband" to select the Tracking".
"DAB band".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Onboard audio: the Arkamys© Sound
Staging optimises the balance/distribution Press in the grey zone to confirm.
of sound in the passenger compartment.
If "FM-DAB Tracking" is activated, there

is a difference of a few seconds when the
system switches to FM analogue radio
with sometimes a variation in volume.
When the digital signal quality becomes
good, the system automatically switches
back to "DAB".
8
The playlists are updated every time the Selecting the source
If the "DAB" station being listened to is
ignition is switched off or a USB stick is
not available on FM, or if the "FM-DAB
connected. The lists are memorised: if they are Press Radio Media to display the
Tracking" is not activated, the sound will
not modified, the subsequent loading time will primary page.
cut out while the digital signal is too weak.
be shorter.
Press the "SOURCES" button.
Media Auxiliary socket (AUX) Choose the source.
(depending on model/depending on equipment)

USB port Bluetooth® audio streaming
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your smartphone.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first

adjust the volume on your portable device (to
a high level).
Then adjust the volume of your system.
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
If play does not start automatically, it may be
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or has been checked in the audio settings.
necessary to start the audio playback from the
connect the USB device to the USB port using
smartphone.
a suitable cable (not supplied).
Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) Control is from the portable device or by using
to the Jack socket using an audio cable (not the system's touch buttons.
To protect the system, do not use a USB supplied).
hub. First adjust the volume on your portable device
Once connected in Streaming mode, the
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
smartphone is considered to be a media
The system builds playlists (in temporary audio system.
source.
memory), an operation which can take from Display and management of the controls are
a few seconds to several minutes at the first via the portable device.
connection.
.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
9
Connecting Apple® players Information and advice It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters, without using special characters
Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port (e.g. " " ?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or
The system supports USB Mass Storage
using a suitable cable (not supplied). display problems.
devices, BlackBerry ® devices or Apple ®
Play starts automatically.
players via USB ports. The adapter cable Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
Control is via the audio system. is not supplied. (File Allocation Table).
Device management is done by the audio
system controls.
It is recommended that the original USB
Other devices, not recognised on
The classifications available are those cable for the portable device be used.
connection, must be connected to the
of the portable device connected
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
(artists/albums/genres/playlists/
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
audiobooks/podcasts); you can also use
depending on compatibility. CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or
a classification structured in the form of
Joliet if possible when burning the CD.
a library.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
The default classification used is by artist.
not be played correctly.
To modify the classification used, return
It is recommended that the same burning
to the first level of the menu then select
standard be always used on an individual disc,
the desired classification (playlists for To protect the system, do not use a USB
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
example) and confirm to go down through hub.
for the best acoustic quality.
the menu to the desired track.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
The audio equipment will only play audio files Joliet standard is recommended.
with ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
The version of software in the audio system 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
may not be compatible with the generation of It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
your Apple ® player. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
9 standard.
Sampling frequencies supported are 11, 22,
44 and 48 kHz.
10
When connecting a smartphone

Telephone As a safety measure, applications can
to the system, it is recommended
only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
MirrorLinkTM smartphone that Bluetooth ® be started on the
display is interrupted once the vehicle is
smartphone.
connection moving.
As a safety measure and because it Telephone connected by

The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires
requires sustained attention by the driver, Bluetooth®
using a smartphone when driving is a compatible smartphone and
prohibited. applications. From the system, press
All operations must be done with the "Telephone" to display the primary
vehicle stationary. page.
Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth® Press the "PHONE" button to display the
The synchronisation of a personal secondary page.
smartphone allows users to display Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the
applications adapted for the smartphone's
connected by a USB cable. application in the system.
MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle
screen.
From the system, press
The processes and standards
"Telephone" to display the primary Once the connection is established, a page
are constantly changing. For the
page. is displayed with the applications already
communication process between the
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
smartphone and the system to operate, Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the to MirrorLinkTM technology.
it is essential that the smartphone be application in the system.
unlocked; update the operating system Access to the different audio sources remains
of the smartphone as well as the date accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM
and time of the smartphone and the Depending on the smartphone, it may be display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
system. necessary to activate the "MirrorLink" TM Access to the menus for the system is possible
For the list of eligible smartphones, go function. at any time using the dedicated buttons.
to the Brand's internet website in your During the procedure, several
country. screen pages relating to certain
.
functions are displayed. There may be a wait for the availability of
Accept to start and complete the applications, depending on the quality of
connection. your network.
11
CarPlay® smartphone Or Android Auto smartphone

connection If the smartphone is already connection
connected by Bluetooth ®.
As a safety measure and because it As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the driver, requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is Connect a USB cable. The using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited. smartphone charges when prohibited.
All operations must be done with the connected by a USB cable. All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary. vehicle stationary.
"Telephone" to display the primary
The synchronisation of a personal page. On your smartphone, download the
smartphone allows users to display Android Auto application.
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the
applications compatible with the
secondary page.
smartphone's CarPlay ® technology on the
vehicle screen when the smartphone's
Press "CarPlay" to display the The synchronisation of a personal
CarPlay ® function has been previously
CarPlay ® interface. smartphone allows users to display
activated.
As the processes and standards are applications adapted for the smartphone's
constantly changing, it is recommended Android Auto technology on the vehicle
that you keep your smartphone's screen.
On connecting the USB cable, the The processes and standards
operating system updated.
CarPlay ® function deactivates the are constantly changing. For the
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
system's Bluetooth® mode. communication process between the
to the Brand's internet website in your
country. smartphone and the system to operate,
it is essential that the smartphone be
You can go to the CarPlay ® unlocked; update the operating system
Connect a USB cable. The navigation at any time by pressing of the smartphone as well as the date
smartphone charges when the system's Navigation button. and time of the smartphone and the
connected by a USB cable. system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
From the system, press Telephone to the Brand's internet website in your
to display the CarPlay ® interface. country.
12
As a safety measure, applications can

When connecting a smartphone Pairing a Bluetooth®
that Bluetooth® is started on the
telephone
display is interrupted once the vehicle is
smartphone
moving. As a safety measure and because it
Telephone connected by driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
The "Android Auto" function requires the telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free
use of a compatible smartphone and
Bluetooth®
applications. From the system, press done with the vehicle stationary and the
"Telephone" to display the primary ignition on.
page.
Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth® Press the "PHONE" button to display the
secondary page. Activate the Bluetooth function on the
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
Press "Android Auto" to start the
connected by a USB cable. all" (telephone configuration).
application in the system.

"Telephone" to display the primary Procedure from the telephone
Different audio sources remain accessible in
page.
the margin of the Android Auto display, using Select the name of the system in the
touch buttons in the upper bar. list of devices detected.
Press "Android Auto" to start the Access to the menus for the system is possible
application in the system. at any time using the dedicated buttons.
In the system, accept the connection request
Depending on the smartphone, it may be from the telephone.
necessary to activate the "Android Auto"
function.
There may be a wait for the availability of To complete the pairing, whichever
During the procedure, several
applications, depending on the quality of procedure is used (from the telephone or
screen pages relating to certain
.
your network. from the system), ensure that the code
functions are displayed.
is the same in the system and in the
Accept to start and complete the
telephone.
connection.
13
Procedure from the system Automatic reconnection The ability of the system to connect to just
Press Telephone to display the To modify the connection profile: one profile depends on the telephone.
primary page. All three profiles may connect by default.
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press "Bluetooth search".
The list of telephones detected is
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the The services available depend on
displayed.
secondary page. the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
Press "Bluetooth connection" to used. Check the instructions for your
Select the name of the chosen display the list of paired devices. telephone and with your service provider
telephone in the list.
for the services to which you have access.
Press the "details" button of a paired

If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended device.
The profiles compatible with the system
that you deactivate and then reactivate the are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
"Bluetooth" function in your telephone. MAP and PAN.
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone Go to the Brand's website for more information
Depending on the type of telephone, you
only), (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
may be asked to accept or not the transfer
of your contacts and messages. - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
the audio files on the telephone),
- "Internet data".
Managing paired telephones
On return to the vehicle, if the last
telephone connected is present again, it is Select one or more profiles.
This function allows the connection or
automatically recognised and within about disconnection of a peripheral device as
30 seconds of switching on the ignition, well as the deletion of a pairing.
the connection is established without any Press "OK" to confirm.
action on your part (Bluetooth activated).
primary page.
14
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the And Calling a contact

secondary page. Make a long press
Press "Bluetooth connection" to primary page.
display the list of paired devices.
on the steering mounted PHONE Or make a long press
button to reject the call.
Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it. Or
Press again to connect it. Press "End call". on the steering mounted PHONE
button.
Press "Contacts".
Deleting a telephone
Making a call Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Press the basket at the top right Press "Call".

Using the telephone is not recommended
of the screen to display a basket
while driving.
alongside the telephone chosen.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering mounted
Press the basket alongside the
controls. Calling a recently used
telephone chosen to delete it. number
Calling a new number Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Receiving a call primary page. Or
An incoming call is announced by a ring and
Make a long press
a superimposed display in the screen. Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted PHONE button to accept
Press "Call" to start the call. on the steering mounted button.
an incoming call.
15
Press "Recent calls". Press the back arrow again to

Settings confirm.
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Profile settings
Press this button to initialise the
It is always possible to make a call directly As a safety measure and because it profile selected.
from the telephone; as a safety measure, requires the sustained attention of the
first park the vehicle. driver, changes to settings must only be
done with the vehicle stationary.
Adjust brightness
Press Settings to display the
Press Settings to display the primary page.
Setting the ringtone primary page.
primary page. Press Brightness.
Press "Profiles".

secondary page. Move the cursor to adjust the
Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3" brightness of the screen and/or of
Press "Ring volume" to display the or "Common profile". the instrument panel (depending on
volume bar. version).
Press this button to enter a name for Press in the grey zone to confirm.
the profile using the virtual keypad.
Press the arrows or move the cursor
to set the ring volume.
Press "OK" to save.
Press the back arrow to confirm.

Modifying system settings
primary page.
Press this button to activate the
profile.
16
Press "Configuration" to go to the Press "Screen configuration". Press the back arrow to confirm.
secondary page.
Press "System configuration".

Press "Brightness".
Setting the time
Move the cursor to adjust the
brightness of the screen and/or of Press Settings to display the
Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
the instrument panel (depending on primary page.
fuel consumption and temperature.
version).
Press "Factory settings" to return to the initial
Press "Animation". Press "Configuration" to go to the
settings.
secondary page.
Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
scrolling".
Returning the system to factory settings
activates the English language by default Select "Animated transitions". Press "Date and time".
(depending on version).
Press the back arrow to confirm.

Select "System info" to display the versions of Select "Time".
the different modules installed in the system.
Press this button to adjust the time
using the virtual keypad.
Press the back arrow to confirm. Select the language
Press Settings to display the Press "OK" to save the time.
primary page.
primary page. Press "Configuration" to go to the Press this button to define the time
secondary page. zone.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
.
secondary page.
Select "Language" to change the Select the display format for the time
language. (12h/24h).
17
Activate or deactivate Press the back arrow to save the

synchronisation with GPS (UTC). date.
Press the back arrow to save the Select the display format of the date.
settings.
Press the back arrow again to

confirm.
The system does not automatically manage
the change between winter and summer
time (depending on the country of sale).
Adjustment of the time and date is only
available if "GPS Synchronisation" is
deactivated.
Setting the date The change between winter and summer
Press Settings to display the time is done by changing the time zone.
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the

secondary page.
Frequently asked questions
Press "Date and time". The following information groups together the
answers to the most frequently asked questions
concerning your audio system.
Select "Date".
Press on this button to define the
date.
18
Radio
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are not the station or no transmitter is present in the upper band to enable the system to check
working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not
basement car parks, etc.) blocks reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the
received stations. name in the list. "Radio" page.
The name of the radio station changes.
Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
.
19
Media
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick.
catalogue time).
Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and
playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device.
launch playback.
Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.
20
Telephone
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth
switched off or the telephone may not be switched on.
visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your
the system. telephone on the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to
Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
telephone call. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings.
order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts
can be transferred in a specific order.
.
21
Settings
When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an ambience setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or ambience
the ambience setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. settings to obtain the desired musical
When changing the ambience setting, the ambience.
treble and bass settings are reset.
When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution
distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted
the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different to the sources listened to. Adjust the audio
sound sources, which can generate audible functions to the middle position.
differences when changing source.
When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Start the engine to increase the charge of the
after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of battery.
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
22
CITROËN Connect Nav The different functions and settings

described vary depending on the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
As a safety measure and because it

done with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
The system is protected in such a way that

it will only operate in your vehicle.
The display of the Energy Economy
Contents Mode message signals that a change to
GPS satellite navigation – standby is imminent.
First steps 2
Applications – Multimedia Steering mounted controls 3
audio system – Bluetooth® Menus 3
telephone Voice commands 5 The link below gives access to OSS (Open
Navigation 11 Source Software) codes for the system.
Connected navigation 13 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
Applications 16 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
Radio 21
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 22
Media 23
.
Telephone 25
Settings 29
Frequently asked questions 32
1
First steps The touch screen is of the "capacitive" 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13
type.
With the engine running, a press
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
mutes the sound.
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with
With the ignition off, a press turns
no additional product.
the system on.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
Adjustment of the volume. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
Certain information is displayed permanently in Selecting the audio source (depending on

Use the buttons either side of or below the
the upper band of the touch screen: version):
touch screen for access to the menus, then
- Reminder of the air conditioning information - FM/DAB*/AM* radios.
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
(depending on version), and direct access to - USB memory stick.
the corresponding menu. - CD Player (depending on model).
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or - Go directly to the selection of the audio - Media player connected via the auxiliary
"Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen source, to the list of radio stations (or list of socket (depending on model).
for access to the menus, then press the virtual titles depending on the source). - Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
buttons in the touch screen. - Go to the message notifications, emails, Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming).
map updates and, depending on the
services, the navigation notifications.
You can display the menus at any time by
- Go to the settings for the touch screen and
pressing the screen briefly with three fingers.
the digital instrument panel.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.

Press the cross to go back a level.
* Depending on equipment.
2
Increase volume. Radio (rotate): automatic search for

In the "Settings" menu you can create
the previous/next station.
a profile for just one person or a group
or Media (rotate): previous/next track,
of people with common points, with the or
move in a list.
possibility of entering a multitude of
Short press: confirm a selection; if
settings (radio presets, audio settings,
nothing selected, access to presets.
navigation history, contact favourites,
Mute/Restore the sound.
etc.); these settings are taken into account
Or
automatically.
Mute by pressing the volume
or
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously. Radio: display the list of stations.
Restore the sound by pressing one Media: display the list of tracks.
In very hot conditions, the volume may Radio (press and hold): update the
of the two volume buttons.
be limited to protect the system. It may go list of stations received.
into standby (screen and sound off) for at
least 5 minutes
The return to normal takes place when Decrease volume.
the temperature in the passenger or
Menus
compartment has dropped. Depending on model/Depending on version
Air conditioning
Manage various temperature and air
Media (short press): change the
Steering mounted controls multimedia source.
flow settings.
Depending on model Telephone (short press): start

or telephone call.
Voice commands: 23 °C 12:13
Call in progress (short press):
This control is located on the
access telephone menu.
steering wheel or at the end of the
Telephone (long press): reject an
lighting control stalk (depending on
18,5 21,5
incoming call, end call; when no call
model).
is in progress, access telephone
.
Short press, system voice
menu.
commands.
Long press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
3
Connected navigation 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Telephone

Enter navigation settings and Connect a telephone via Bluetooth ®,
choose a destination. read messages and emails and send
or Use services available in real time, or quick messages.
depending on equipment.
23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13

23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13
Radio Media
Select an audio source, a radio
station, display photographs.
or
Applications 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13

Settings
Operate certain applications on Configure a personal profile and/
a smartphone connected via FM/87.5 MHz
87.5MHz or configure the sound (balance,
or CarPlay ®, MirrorLinkTM or Android ambience, etc.) and the display
Auto. or
(language, units, date, time, etc.).
Check the state of the Bluetooth ®
and Wi-Fi connections.
4
23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Voice commands First steps

Steering mounted controls Example of a "voice command" for
navigation:
Pressing this button activates the "Navigate to address, 11 Regent
voice commands function. Street, London".
Example of a "voice command" for
the radio and media:
"Play artist, Madonna".
To ensure that voice commands are Example of a "voice command" for
always recognised by the system, please the telephone:
observe the following recommendations: "Call David Miller".
Vehicle - speak in a normal tone without
breaking up words or raising your
Activate, deactivate or configure voice. The voice commands, with a choice of
certain vehicle functions. - always wait for the "beep" (audible 12 languages (English, French, Italian,
or signal) before speaking. Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese,
- for best operation, it is recommended Polish, Turkish, Russian, Arabic,
that the windows and sunroof Brazilian), are made using the language
be closed to avoid extraneous previously chosen and set in the system.
23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 interference (depending on version). For some voice commands, there are
- before making a voice command, ask alternative synonyms.
other passengers not to speak. Example: Guide to/Navigate to/Go to/…
The voice commands in Arabic for:
"Navigate to address" and "Display POI in
the city" are not available.
.
5
Information – Using the system Global voice commands

Press the Push To Talk voice
command button and tell me These commands can be made from any
what you'd like after the tone. screen page after pressing the "Voice
Remember you can interrupt command" or "Telephone" button located
me at any time by pressing on the steering wheel, as long as there is
this button. If you press it no telephone call in progress.
again while I'm waiting for
you to speak, it'll end the
conversation. If you need to
start over, say "cancel". If you
want to undo something, say Voice commands Help messages
"undo". And to get information
and tips at any time, just say
"help". If you ask me to do
Help There are lots of topics I can help you with.
something and there's some
You can say: "help with phone", "help with
information missing that I need, Voice command help navigation", "help with media" or "help with
I'll give you some examples
radio". For an overview on how to use voice
or take you through it step by Navigation help
controls, you can say "help with voice controls".
step. There's more information
Radio help
available in "beginner" mode.
You can set the dialogue mode Media help
to "expert" when you feel
comfortable. Telephone help
Set dialogue mode as <…> Choose "beginner" or "expert" mode.
Select profile <…> Select profile 1, 2 or 3.
Yes Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no"

and we'll start that again.
No
6
"Navigation" voice
Voice commands Help messages
commands
These commands can be made from any
screen page after pressing the "Voice Navigate home To start guidance or add a stopover, say
command" or "Telephone" button located "navigate to" and then the address or contact
on the steering wheel, as long as there is Navigate to work name. For example, "navigate to address
no telephone call in progress. 11 Regent Street, London", or "navigate to
Navigate to preferred address <…>
contact, John Miller". You can specify if it's
Navigate to contact <…> a preferred or recent destination. For example,
"navigate to preferred address, Tennis club",
Navigate to address <…> "navigate to recent destination, 11 Regent
Street, London". Otherwise, just say, "navigate
Show nearby POI <…>
home". To see points of interest on a map, you
can say things like "show hotels in Banbury"
or "show nearby petrol station". For more
information you can ask for "help with route
guidance".
Remaining distance To get information about your current route,

you can say "tell me the remaining time",
Remaining time "distance" or "arrival time". Try saying "help
with navigation" to learn more commands.
Arrival time
Stop route guidance
Depending on the country, give the
.
destination instructions (address) in the
language used by the system.
7
"Radio Media" voice

commands
These commands can be made from any
screen page after pressing the "Voice Tune to channel <…> You can pick a radio station by saying "tune
command" or "Telephone" button located to" and the station name or frequency. For
on the steering wheel, as long as there is example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to
no telephone call in progress. 98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say
"tune to preset number". For example "tune to
preset number five".
What's playing To display the details of the current "track",

"artist" and "album", you can say "What's
playing".
Play song <…> Use the command "play" or "listen to" to select
the type of music you'd like to hear. You can
Play artist <…> pick by "song", "artist", or "album". Just say
something like "play artist, Madonna", "play
Play album <…>
song, Hey Jude", or "play album, Thriller".
Media voice commands are available only

for a USB connection.
8
"Telephone" voice
commands
If a telephone is connected to the system,
these voice commands can be issued Call contact <…>* To make a phone call, say "call" followed by
from any main screen page after pressing the contact name, for example: "Call David
the "Telephone" button on the steering Dial <…>* Miller". You can also include the phone type, for
wheel, as long as there is no telephone example: "Call David Miller at home". To make
Display contacts*
call in progress. a call by number, say "dial" followed by the
If there is no telephone connected by Display calls* phone number, for example, "Dial 07776 835
Bluetooth, a voice message announces: 417". You can check your voicemail by saying
"Please first connect a telephone", and the Call (message box| voicemail)* "call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick
voice session will be closed. message to", followed by the contact, and then
the name of the quick message you'd like to
send. For example, "send quick message to
David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of
calls, say "display calls". For more information
on SMS, you can say "help with texting".
.
* This function is available only if the
telephone connected to the system supports
downloading of contacts and recent calls
and if the download has been done.
9
"Text message" voice

commands
If a telephone is connected to the system,
these voice commands can be issued Send text to <…> To hear your messages, you can say "listen to
from any main screen page after pressing most recent message". When you want to send
the "Telephone" button on the steering Listen to most recent message* a text, there's a set of quick messages ready
wheel, as long as there is no telephone for you to use. Just use the quick message
call in progress. name and say something like "send quick
If there is no telephone connected by message to Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the
Bluetooth, a voice message announces: phone menu for the names of the supported
"Please first connect a telephone", and the messages.
voice session will be closed. Please say "call" or "send quick message to",
and then select a line from the list. To move
around a list shown on the display, you can
say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or
"previous page". To undo your selection, say
"undo". To cancel the current action and start
again, say "cancel".
* This function is available only if the

telephone connected to the system supports
downloading of contacts and recent calls
and if the download has been done.
The system only sends pre-recorded

"Quick messages".
10
Press "OK" to start navigation.

Navigation Zoom out/zoom in using the touch buttons
or with two fingers on the screen.
Choice of a destination
Select "Position" to visualise the arrival
To a new destination point geographically.
In order to be able to use the navigation,
Press Navigation to display the it is necessary to fill in the "City", the
primary page. "Street" and the "Number" on the
or virtual keyboard or take it from the list in To "My home" or "My work"
"Contact" or in the "History" of addresses.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the Press Navigation to display the

secondary page. primary page.
Without confirmation of the street number,
you will be guided to one end of the street. or
Select "Enter address".
To a recent destination Press the "MENU" button to go to the

Select the "Country". secondary page.
Select "My destinations".

Press Navigation to display the
Enter the "City", the "Street" and the primary page.
"Number" and confirm by pressing or Select the "Preferred" tab.
on the suggestions displayed.
Select "My home".
Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
criteria". Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page. Or
And/Or
Select "See on map" to select the Select "My destinations". Select "My work".
"Guidance criteria".
.
Select the "Recent" tab. Or
Press "OK" to start navigation. Select a preset favourite destination.
Select the address chosen in the list to display
the "Guidance criteria".
11
Towards a contact Select "Points of interest". Press this button to start navigation.

Select the "Travel", or "Leisure" Or
primary page.
or "Commercial" or "Public" or Press this button to save the
or
"Geographic" tab. address displayed.
Or
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
Select "Search" to enter the name A long press on an item opens a list of
secondary page.
and address of a POI. POIs nearby.
Select "My destinations".
Press "OK" to start calculation of
the route. Towards GPS coordinates
Select the "Contact" tab.
primary page.
Select a contact in the list to start navigation. To a point on the map
or
primary page.
Towards points of interest or Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
(POI) screen.
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Press this button to display the world
categories. screen. map.
Using the grid, select by zoom the
Press Navigation to display the Select the destination by pressing on the map.
desired country or region.
primary page.
or
Tap the screen to place a marker Press this button to enter the GPS
and display the sub-menu. coordinates.
secondary page.
12
A marker is displayed in the middle TMC (Traffic Message Network connection provided by
of the screen, with the "Latitude" the user
and "Longitude" coordinates.
Channel)
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
messages are linked to a European
Press this button to start navigation.
standard on the broadcasting of traffic
information via the RDS system on FM
radio, transmitting traffic information in Connected navigation
Or real time. connection
The TMC information is then displayed
Press this button to save the
on a GPS Navigation system map and As a safety measure and because it
address displayed.
taken into account straight away during requires sustained attention by the driver,
navigation, so as to avoid accidents, traffic using a smartphone when driving is
OR jams and closed roads. prohibited.
Press this button to enter the value All operations must be done with the
for "Latitude" using the virtual vehicle stationary.
keypad. The display of danger zones depends on
the legislation in force and subscription to
And the service. For access to connected navigation, you
Press this button to enter the value can use the connection provided by the
for "Longitude" using the virtual vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance
keypad.
Connected navigation call" services or use your smartphone as
a modem.
Depending on version Activate and enter settings for sharing
Depending on the equipment level of the the smartphone connection.
vehicle
Network connection provided by
the vehicle
OR
.
13
Network connection provided by Restrictions of use: The processes and standards

the vehicle - With CarPlay ®, connection sharing is are constantly changing; for the
The system is automatically only with a Wi-Fi connection. communication process between the
connected to the modem included - With MirrorLinkTM, connection sharing smartphone and the system to work
for the "Emergency or assistance is only with a USB connection. correctly, we recommend that you
calls" services and does not require The quality of services depends on the update the operating system of the
a connection provided by the user quality of the network connection. smartphone as well as the date and
via their smartphone. time of the smartphone and the
system.
Network connection provided by With the arrival of "TOMTOM

the user TRAFFIC", the services are
Settings specific to
USB connection
available. connected navigation
Connect a USB cable. In the "Settings" menu you can create
The smartphone charges when The services offered with connected a profile for just one person or a group
connected by a USB cable. navigation are as follows. of people with common points, with the
A Connected Services pack: possibility of entering a multitude of
- Weather, settings (radio presets, audio settings,
Bluetooth connection - Filling stations, navigation history, contact favourites,
Activate the Bluetooth function on - Car park, etc.); these settings are taken into account
the telephone and ensure that it is - Traffic, automatically.
visible to all (see the "Applications" - POI local search.
section). A Danger zone pack (option).
Wi-Fi connection Press Navigation to display the

primary page.
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the
or
system and connect to it (see the
"Applications" section).

secondary page.
14
Select "Settings". "Danger zones" pack

The display of danger zones depends on
the legislation in force and subscription to updates
the service.
Select "Map".
primary page.
Activate or deactivate: Declaration of "Danger Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the

- "Allow declaration of danger
zones".
zones" secondary page.
- "Guidance to final destination
To distribute information on the Select "System settings".
on foot"
- "Authorise sending declaration of danger zones, you should
information" check the option: "Allow declaration of
These settings must be made danger zones". Select the "System info" tab.
according to each profile.
Select "View" to display the versions
Select "Alerts". primary page.
of the different modules installed in
or the system.
Activate or deactivate "Warn of
danger zones".
Select "Update(s) due".
Press the "Declare a new danger
Select this button.
zone" button located in the upper
bar of the touch screen
Activate: Give an audible warning You can download the system and map
Select the option "Type" to choose updates from the Brand's website.
the type of "danger zone". The update procedure can also be found
on the website.
For access to connected navigation, you
have to select the option: "Authorise Select the "Speed" option and enter
sending information". it using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to save and distribute

the information. .
15
Displaying the weather Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay ®,

Applications MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions.
Press Navigation to display the Internet Browser
primary page.
or Press Applications to display the
primary page. Applications
or
Press Applications to display the
Press this button to display the list of primary page.
services. Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Internet or
Browser" function.
Select "View map". Press "Internet Browser" to display the Press "Applications" to display the
browser home page. applications home page.
Select your country of residence.

Select "Weather".
CarPlay® smartphone
Press "OK" to save and start the connection
browser.
Press this button to display primary As a safety measure and because it
information. requires sustained attention by the driver,
Connection to the internet is via one of using a smartphone when driving is
the network connections provided by the prohibited.
Press this button to display the vehicle or the user. All operations must be done with the
detailed weather information. vehicle stationary.
Connectivity
The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will Press Applications to display the
be the maximum temperature for the day. primary page.
The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will or
be the minimum temperature for the night.
16

The synchronisation of a personal The synchronisation of a personal
"Applications" to display the
smartphone allows users to display smartphone allows users to display
or primary page.
applications compatible with the applications adapted for the smartphone's
smartphone's CarPlay ® technology on the MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle
vehicle screen when the smartphone's screen.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay ®
CarPlay ® function has been previously The processes and standards
function.
activated. are constantly changing. For the
As the processes and standards are Press "CarPlay" to display the communication process between the
constantly changing, it is recommended CarPlay ® interface. smartphone and the system to operate,
that you keep your smartphone's it is essential that the smartphone be
operating system updated. unlocked; update the operating system
For the list of eligible smartphones, go of the smartphone as well as the date
to the Brand's internet website in your On connecting the USB cable, the and time of the smartphone and the
country. CarPlay ® function deactivates the system.
system's Bluetooth® mode. For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable. MirrorLinkTM smartphone
Press on "Telephone" to display the
connection As a safety measure, applications can
CarPlay ® interface.
As a safety measure and because it display is interrupted once the vehicle is
or
requires sustained attention by the driver, moving.
using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
Or All operations must be done with the The MirrorLinkTM function requires the
Connect a USB cable. The vehicle stationary. use of a compatible smartphone and
smartphone charges when applications.
connected by a USB cable.
.
When connecting a smartphone
that Bluetooth® be started on the
smartphone.
17

There may be a wait for the availability of As a safety measure, applications can
smartphone charges when
applications, depending on the quality of only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
connected by a USB cable.
your network. display is interrupted once the vehicle is
From the system, press moving.
"Applications" to display the
or primary page. Android Auto smartphone
connection The "Android Auto" function requires
the use of a compatible smartphone and
Press "Connectivity" to go to the MirrorLinkTM As a safety measure and because it applications.
function. requires sustained attention by the driver,
using a smartphone when driving is Connect a USB cable. The
Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the
prohibited. smartphone charges when
application in the system.
All operations must be done with the connected by a USB cable.
vehicle stationary.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be From the system, press
necessary to activate the MirrorLinkTM "Applications" to display the
Synchronising a personal smartphone
function. or primary page.
In the process, several screen allows users to display applications
pages relating to certain functions adapted for the smartphone's Android
are displayed. Auto technology on the vehicle screen.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Android
Accept to start and complete the The processes and standards
Auto" function.
connection. are constantly changing. For the
communication process between the Press "Android Auto" to start the
Once connection is established, a page smartphone and the system to operate, application in the system.
is displayed with the applications already it is essential that the smartphone be
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted unlocked; update the operating system
to MirrorLinkTM technology. of the smartphone as well as the date During the procedure, several
and time of the smartphone and the screen pages relating to certain
Access to the different audio sources remains system. functions are displayed.
accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM For the list of eligible smartphones, go Accept to start and complete the
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. to the Brand's internet website in your connection.
Access to the menus for the system is possible country.
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
18
Different audio sources remain accessible in Select "Search".

Activate the Bluetooth function on the
the margin of the Android Auto display, using The list of telephones detected is
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
touch buttons in the upper bar. displayed.
all" (telephone configuration).
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
Procedure from the telephone that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Select the system name in the list of Bluetooth function in your telephone.
devices detected.
In Android Auto mode, the function to
display the menus by pressing the screen Select the name of the chosen
briefly with three fingers is deactivated. In the system, accept the connection request telephone in the list.
from the telephone.
Depending on the type of telephone, you

To complete the pairing, whichever
There may be a wait for the availability of may be asked to accept or not the transfer
procedure is used (from the telephone or
applications, depending on the quality of of your contacts and messages.
from the system), ensure that the code
your network. is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
Connection sharing
®
Bluetooth connection The system offers to connect the telephone
Procedure from the system with 3 profiles:
As a safety measure and because they - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
require prolonged attention on the part only),
primary page.
of the driver, the operations for pairing - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
or
of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the audio files on the telephone),
the Bluetooth hands-free system of your - "Mobile internet data".
audio system must be carried out with the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
vehicle stationary and the ignition on. secondary page.
.
Press "Bluetooth connection".
19
Select the "Secured" or "Not Select the "Activation" tab to activate or

The "Mobile internet data" profile
secured" or "Stored" tab. deactivate sharing of the Wi-Fi connection.
must be activated for connected
navigation (where the vehicle does not And/Or
Select a network.
have "Emergency and assistance call"
Select the "Settings" tab to change the name
services), having first activated sharing of
of the system network and the password.
this connection on your smartphone.
Using the virtual keypad, enter the
"Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the
"Password".
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to start the connection. To protect against unauthorised access
and make your systems as secure as
Press "OK" to confirm. possible, the use of a complex security
code or password is recommended.
The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of
the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive.
Wi-Fi connection
Network connection by the smartphone's Wi-Fi. Managing connections
Wi-Fi connection sharing
Press Applications to display the Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the primary page.
primary page. system. or
or
primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the or secondary page.
secondary page.
Select "Manage connection".
Select "Wi-Fi network Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
connection". secondary page.
Select "Share Wi-Fi connection". With this function you can view the access
to connected services, the availability of
connected services and modify the connection
mode.
20
Enter the values using the virtual Make a long press on one of the
Radio keypad. buttons to preset the station.
Selecting a station First enter the units then click on the
decimals zone to enter the figures
Press Radio Media to display the after the decimal point.
primary page. Activating/Deactivating RDS
or Press "OK" to confirm. Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
or
Press "Frequency". Radio reception may be affected by the
Press one of the buttons for an use of electrical equipment not approved
automatic search for radio stations. by the Brand, such as a USB charger Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
connected to the 12 V socket. secondary page.
The external environment (hills, buildings,
Or tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Select "Radio settings".
Move the cursor for a manual search block reception, including in RDS mode.
for frequencies up or down. This is a normal effect of the way in
which radio waves are transmitted and Select "General".
does not indicate any failure of the audio
Activate/Deactivate "Station
Or equipment.
follow".
primary page. Press "OK" to confirm.
or
Presetting a station
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Select a radio station or frequency.
listening to the same station by automatic
secondary page. (refer to the corresponding section)
retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
Press "Presets". in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS
Select "Radio stations" in the station may not be assured throughout the
secondary page.
.
entire country as radio stations do not cover
100% of the territory. This explains the loss
Press "Frequency". of reception of the station during a journey.
21
Displaying text information Playing TA messages Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function or

The "Radio Text" function allows gives priority to TA alert messages.
information transmitted by the radio To operate, this function needs good
station and related to the station or the reception of a radio station that carries Select the audio source.
song playing to be displayed. this type of message. While traffic
information is being broadcast, the current
media is automatically interrupted so that
Press "Band" to select the "DAB" waveband.
Press Radio Media to display the the TA message can be heard. Normal
primary page. play of the media previously playing is
or resumed at the end of the message.
DAB-FM auto tracking
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Select "Announcements". "DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory.
secondary page. When the digital radio signal is poor,
Activate/Deactivate "Traffic
"DAB-FM tracking" allows you to
announcement".
Select "Radio settings". continue listening to the same station,
Press "OK" to confirm. by automatically switching to the
corresponding FM analogue station (if
there is one).
Select "General".
Activate/Deactivate "Display radio

DAB (Digital Audio
text". Broadcasting) radio Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press "OK" to confirm. Terrestrial Digital Radio
or
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception.
The different "multiplex/ensemble" Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
services offer a choice of radio stations secondary page.
arranged in alphabetical order.
22
Select "Radio settings". Auxiliary socket (AUX)

Media
USB port (depending on model/depending on equipment)
Select "General".
Activate/Deactivate "Station
follow".
Press "OK".
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"

If "DAB-FM tracking" is activated, there
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or has been checked in the audio settings.
is a difference of a few seconds when the
connect the USB device to the USB port using
system switches to FM analogue radio
a suitable cable (not supplied).
with sometimes a variation in volume. Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc.)
Once the digital signal quality is restored, to the Jack socket using an audio cable (not
the system automatically changes back To protect the system, do not use a USB supplied).
to "DAB". hub. First adjust the volume of your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
Operation of controls is via the portable device.
memory), an operation which can take from
If the "DAB" station being listened to is a few seconds to several minutes at the first
not available on FM ("DAB-FM" option connection.
greyed out), or "DAB-FM tracking" is not
activated, the sound will cut out while the
Reduce the number of non-music files and the CD player
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
digital signal is too weak. The playlists are updated every time the (depending on model/depending on equipment)
ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick
is connected. The lists are memorised: if they Insert the CD in the player.
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
.
will be shorter.
23
Selecting the source Connecting Apple® players Information and advice

Press Radio Media to display the Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port
The system supports USB mass storage
primary page. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
devices, BlackBerry ® devices or Apple ®
or Play starts automatically.
players via USB ports. The adapter cable
is not supplied.
Control is via the audio system.
Device management is done by the audio
Select "Source". system controls.
Other devices, not recognised on
The classifications available are those of connection, must be connected to the
Choose the source. the portable device connected (artists/ auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
albums/genres/playlists/audiobooks/ supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
podcasts).
Bluetooth® audio streaming The default classification used is by
depending on compatibility.
Streaming allows you to listen to music from artists. To modify the classification used,
your smartphone. return to the first level of the menu then
select the desired classification (playlists
The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first
for example) and confirm to go down
adjust the volume on your portable device (to To protect the system, do not use a USB
through the menu to the desired track.
a high level). hub.
Then adjust the volume of your audio system.
If play does not start automatically, it may be The audio equipment will only play audio files
necessary to start the audio playback from the with ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
telephone. The version of software in the audio system file extensions and with a bit rate of between
Control is from the portable device or by using may not be compatible with the generation of 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
the system's touch buttons. your Apple ® player. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
Once connected in streaming mode, the 9 standard.
telephone is considered to be a media The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and
source. 48 kHz.
24
It is advisable to restrict file names to Procedure from the system

20 characters, without using special characters
Telephone
(e.g. " " ?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or Press Telephone to display the
Pairing a Bluetooth® primary page.
display problems.
telephone or
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
(File Allocation Table). As a safety measure and because it
Press "Bluetooth search".
It is recommended that the original USB
cable for the portable device be used.
done with the vehicle stationary and the Or
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or ignition on.
Select "Search".
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or
The list of telephones detected is
Joliet if possible when burning the CD.
displayed.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
not be played correctly. Activate the Bluetooth function on the
It is recommended that the same burning telephone and ensure that it is "visible to If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
standard is always used on an individual disc, all" (telephone configuration). that you deactivate and then reactivate the
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) Bluetooth function in your telephone.
for the best acoustic quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the chosen
Joliet standard is recommended. Select the system name in the list of telephone in the list.
devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request Connection sharing

from the telephone.
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
To complete the pairing, whichever
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
procedure is used (from the telephone or
.
only),
from the system), ensure that the code
- "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
is the same in the system and in the
the audio files on the telephone),
telephone.
- "Mobile internet data".
25
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Go to the Brand's website for more information
Activation of the profile; "Mobile internet
secondary page. (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
data" is obligatory for connected
navigation having first activated sharing of Select "Bluetooth connection" to
this connection on your smartphone. display the list of paired devices.
Managing paired telephones
Select one or more profiles. Press the "details" button.

This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
well as the deletion of a pairing.
Select one or more profiles.
Depending on the type of telephone, you Press "OK" to confirm. primary page.
may be asked to accept or not the transfer or
of your contacts and messages.
The ability of the system to connect to just
one profile depends on the telephone. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Automatic reconnection
All three profiles may connect by default. secondary page.
On return to the vehicle, if the last Select "Bluetooth connection" to
telephone connected is present again, it is display the list of paired devices.
automatically recognised and within about The services available depend on
30 seconds of switching on the ignition, the network, the SIM card and the
the connection is established without any compatibility of the Bluetooth devices Press on the name of the telephone
action on your part (Bluetooth activated). used. Check the instructions for your chosen in the list to disconnect it.
telephone and with your service provider Press again to connect it.
for the services to which you have access.
To modify the connection profile:
The profiles compatible with the system
primary page.
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
or MAP and PAN.
26
Deleting a telephone Making a call Or make a long press
Select the basket at top right of the

Using the telephone is not recommended
screen to display a basket alongside
while driving.
the telephone chosen. on the steering mounted PHONE
Park the vehicle.
button.
Make the call using the steering mounted
Press the basket alongside the controls.
Select "Contact".
telephone chosen to delete it.
Calling a new number
Select "Call".
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and primary page.
a superimposed display in the screen.
or
Make a short press on the steering Calling a recently used
mounted PHONE button to accept number
an incoming call. Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
primary page.
And
or
Make a long press Press "Call" to start the call.
Or
on the steering mounted PHONE Make a long press
button to reject the call. Calling a contact
Or
primary page. on the steering mounted button.
Select "End call".
or
.
Select "Calls".
27
It is always possible to make a call directly Managing messages Access to "Messages" depends on the
from the telephone; as a safety measure, compatibility of the smartphone and the
first park the vehicle. integral system.
primary page.
Depending on the smartphone, access to
or your messages or email may be slow.

Managing contacts/entries The services available depend on
secondary page.
the network, the SIM card and the
Press Telephone to display the Select "Messages" to display the list compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
primary page. of messages. used.
or Check in the manual for your smartphone
and with your service provider for the
Select the "All" or "Sent" or services available to you.
"Incoming" tab.
Select "Contact".
Select "Create" to add a new Select the detail of the message

contact. chosen in one of the lists.
Managing quick messages
In the "Telephone" tab, enter the telephone Press Telephone to display the
numbers for the contact. Press "Answer" to send a quick
primary page.
message stored in the system.
In the "Address" tab, enter the addresses for or
the contact.
Press "Call" to start the call.
In the "Email" tab, enter the email addresses Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
for the contact. secondary page.
Press " Play" to hear the message. Select "Quick messages" to display
The "Email" function allows email the list of messages.
addresses to be entered for a contact, but
the system is not able to send emails.
28
Select the "Delayed" or "My arrival" Select the "Incoming" or "Sent" or Or

or "Not available" or "Other" tab "Not read" tab.
"Voice".
with the possibility of creating new
messages. Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Or
"Ringtone".
Press "Create" to write a new
message. Press " Play" to start playing the Press "OK" to save the settings.
message.
Select the message chosen in one

The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
of the lists. Access to "Email" depends on the
with the Arkamys© system) is audio
compatibility of the smartphone and the
processing that allows the quality of the
integral system.
sound to be adapted according to the
Press "Transfer" to select the number of passengers in the vehicle.
addressee(s). Available only with the front and rear
Settings speakers configuration.
Press " Play" to start playing the Audio settings

message. The Ambience (6 optional ambiences)
Press Settings to display the and Bass, Medium and Treble audio
primary page. settings are different and independent for
or each audio source.
Managing email Activate or deactivate "Loudness".
Press Telephone to display the The settings for "Position" (All
Select "Audio settings". passengers, Driver and Front only) are
primary page.
common to all sources.
or
Activate or deactivate "Touch tones",
Select "Ambience". "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary
input".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Or
secondary page.
"Position".
.
Onboard audio: Arkamys© Sound Staging
Select "Email" to display the list of Or optimises the balance/distribution of
messages.
"Sound". sound in the passenger compartment.
29
Profile settings Insert a USB memory stick containing Or

the photograph in the USB port.
"Sound".
Select the photograph.
As a safety measure and because it Or
requires the sustained attention of the Press "OK" to accept the transfer of
driver, changes to settings must only be "Voice".
the photograph.
done with the vehicle stationary. Or
Press "OK" again to save the
"Ringtone".
settings.
primary page. Press "OK" to save the settings.
or The location for the photograph is
square; the system reshapes the original
photograph if in another format.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Modifying system settings
secondary page.
Press this button to initialise the
Select "Setting of the profiles". Press Settings to display the
profile selected.
primary page.
or
Initialisation of the profile selected
Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3" activates the English language by default.
or "Common profile".
Press this button to enter a name for secondary page.
Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to associate the
the profile using the virtual keypad. "Audio settings" with it. Select "Screen configuration".
Select "Audio settings".

Select "Animation".
Press this button to add Activate or deactivate: "Automatic

Select "Ambience".
a photograph to the profile. scrolling".
Or
Select "Brightness".
"Balance".
30
Move the cursor to adjust the Select the language Press "OK" to confirm.
brightness of the screen and/or of
the instrument panel. Press Settings to display the
Select the display format of the date.
primary page.
or
primary page.
or Adjustment of the time and date is only
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the available if "GPS synchronisation" is
secondary page. deactivated.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the The change between winter and summer
secondary page. Select "Languages" to change the time is done by changing the time zone.
language.
Select "System settings".
Setting the date Setting the time

Select "Units" to change the units of distance, Press Settings to display the
fuel consumption and temperature. primary page.
primary page.
Select "Factory settings" to return to the initial or
or
settings.
Returning the system to factory settings Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
activates the English language by default. secondary page. secondary page.
Select "Setting the time-date". Select "Setting the time-date".
Select "System info" to display the versions of

the different modules installed in the system.
Select "Time".
Select "Date".
Press this button to adjust the time
Press on this button to define the
using the virtual keypad.
.
date.
31
Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Colour schemes".
Press this button to define the time

zone.
Select a colour scheme in the list
then press "OK" to confirm.
Select the display format for the time
(12h/24h).
Activate or deactivate Every time the colour scheme is changed,

synchronisation with GPS (UTC). the system restarts, temporarily displaying
a black screen.
Frequently asked questions

The system does not automatically The following information groups together the
manage the change between winter and answers to the most frequently asked questions
summer time (depending on country). concerning your audio system.
Colour schemes
As a safety measure, the procedure
for changing the colour scheme is only
possible when the vehicle is stationary.

primary page.
or
32
Navigation
The route calculation is not successful. The guidance criteria may be in conflict with Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
the current location (exclusion of toll roads on menu.
a toll road).
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The audible warning of "Danger zones" does The audible warning is not active or the volume Activate the audible warning in the "Navigation"
not work. is too low. menu and check the voice volume in the audio
settings.
The system does not suggest a detour around The guidance criteria do not take account of Select the setting for the "Traffic info" function
an incident on the route. TMC messages. in the list of route settings (Without, Manual or
Automatic).
I receive a "Danger zone" alert which is not on When not navigating, the system announces all Zoom in on the map to see the exact position
my route. "Danger zones" positioned in a cone located in of the "Danger zone". Select "On the route" to
front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for no longer receive alerts other than navigation
"Danger zones" located on nearby or parallel instructions or to reduce the time for the
roads. announcement.
Certain traffic jams along the route are not On starting, it is several minutes before the Wait until the traffic information is being
indicated in real time. system begins to receive the traffic information. received correctly (display of the traffic
information icons on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes This is perfectly normal. The system is
.
(motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic dependent on the traffic information available.
information.
33
The altitude is not displayed. On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may Wait until the system has started up completely
take up to 3 minutes to receive more than so that there is GPS coverage by at least
4 satellites correctly. 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment This behaviour is normal. The system is

(tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of dependent on the GPS signal reception
reception of the GPS signal may vary. conditions.
My navigation is no longer connected. During start-up and in certain geographical Check that the connected services are
areas, the connection may be unavailable. activated (settings, contract).
Radio
The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the short-cut menu to enable the system to check
not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
etc.). the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not
basement car parks, etc.) block reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
34
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio
stations received. name in the list. stations" secondary menu.
The name of the radio station changes. Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
Media
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick.
catalogue time).
The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
not contain audio files or contains audio files of right way up.
a format not recognised by the audio system. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
The CD has been recorded in a format that is be played if it is too badly damaged.
not compatible with the player (udf, etc.). Check the content in the case of a recorded
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system CD: consult the advice in the "AUDIO" section.
not recognised by the audio system. The audio system CD does not read DVDs.
Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not
be read by the audio system.
.
35
There is a long waiting period following the Upon insertion of a new media, the system This is perfectly normal.
insertion of a CD or connection of a USB reads a certain amount of data (directory, title,
memory stick. artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds
to a few minutes.
The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used in scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
unsuitable. selecting an ambience.
Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and
playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device.
launch playback.
Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.
36
Telephone
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth
switched off or the telephone may not be switched on.
visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your
the system. telephone on the Brand's website (services).
The sound of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to
Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
telephone call. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).
Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronising contacts are Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
synchronising the contacts on the SIM card, telephone contacts".
the contacts on the telephone, or both. When
both synchronisations are selected, some
contacts may be duplicated.
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings.
order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts
can be transferred in a specific order.
The system does not receive SMS. The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending
SMS text messages to the system.
.
37
Settings
When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an ambience setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or ambience
the ambience setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. settings to obtain the desired musical
When changing the ambience setting, the ambience.
treble and bass settings are reset.
When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution
distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted to
the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different the sources listened to. It is recommended that
sound sources, which can generate audible the audio settings (Bass:, Treble:, Balance)
differences when changing source. be adjusted to the middle position, select the
"None" musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode
or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Start then vehicle's engine to increase the
after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of charge of the battery.
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available Settings menu/Options/Time-Date setting.
if the synchronisation with the satellites is Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
deactivated. synchronisation" (UTC).
38
Alphabetical index
A B
ABS........................................................ 103-104 Battery............................ 195, 202, 231, 233-234 Central locking..................................... 40, 42-43
Accessories...................................................101 Battery, charging.................................... 232-233 Changing a bulb............................. 220, 223-225
Accessory position........................................ 131 Battery, remote control.............................. 45-47 Changing a fuse.............................226-228, 230
Access to the 3rd row......................................65 Black panel...................................................... 11 Changing a wheel................................... 211-216
Active Safety Brake................. 21, 165-166, 168 Black screen.................................................... 11 Changing a wiper blade................. 100, 195-196
AdBlue ®..................................8, 20, 28, 204-205 Blanking screen (snow shield)...............193, 197 Changing the remote control battery......... 46-47
Additive, Diesel........................................18, 202 Blind, panoramic sunroof.................................89 Checking the engine oil level...........................27
Adjusting head restraints........................... 59-60 Blinds, side........................................... 79-80, 84 Checking the levels................................199, 201
Adjusting seats................................57-59, 62-64 Blind spot detection................................. 24, 174 Checking tyre pressures
Adjusting the air distribution.................72, 74-75 BlueHDi........................................... 28, 204, 236 (using the kit)....................................... 208-210
Adjusting the air flow.............................72, 74-75 Bluetooth (hands-free).................... 13-14, 25-26 Checks........................................... 199, 202-204
Adjusting the date................................39, 18, 31 Bluetooth (telephone)...................... 13-15, 25-27 Checks, routine...................................... 202-204
Adjusting the height and reach of Bonnet............................................................198 Child lock........................................................124
the steering wheel.........................................68 Boot.............................................................47-48 Children................................... 118, 120-121, 123
Adjusting the seat belt height........................106 Boot (fittings)....................................................86 Children (safety).............................................124
Adjusting the temperature....................72-73, 75 Boot (opening)..................................................40 Child seats ............... 108, 112-113, 117-118, 124
Adjusting the time................................ 39, 17, 31 Bottle holder.....................................................79 Child seats, conventional............................... 117
Advice on driving....................................126-127 Brake discs............................................. 203-204 Child seats, ISOFIX........................ 119-121, 123
Airbags................................ 22-23, 109, 111, 113 Brake lamps........................................... 223-225 CITROËN Connect Nav.....................................1
Airbags, curtain....................................... 110-111 Brakes.............................................. 13, 203-204 CITROËN Connect Radio..................................1
Airbags, front...................................110-111, 114 Braking, Closing the boot..........................................47-48
Airbags, lateral........................................ 110-111 automatic emergency............ 21, 165-166, 168 Closing the doors................................. 40, 42-43
Air conditioning............................................6, 73 Braking, dynamic emergency................. 131-134 Collision Risk Alert.................................165-167
Air conditioning, automatic...................71, 75-76 Brightness........................................................16 Configuration, vehicle.....................31-33, 35-36
Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic............. 74 Bulbs (changing)............................ 220, 223-225 Configurations, seats.......................................67
Air conditioning, manual.............................71-72 Connection, Bluetooth.............. 13-15, 19, 25-27
Air intake.............................................. 72, 75-76 Connection, MirrorLink......................... 11-12, 17
Air vents...........................................................70 Connection, Wi-Fi network..............................20
Alarm.......................................................... 53-54 Control, back-up boot release......................... 51
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)............. 103-104 Control, back-up door release................... 45-46
Anti-pinch.........................................................89
Anti-theft/Immobiliser......................................44 C Control, heated seats.......................................61
Control stalk, lighting.................................90, 92
Apple CarPlay connection......................... 12, 16 Cable, audio.................................................9, 23 Control stalk, wipers.................................. 98-99
Armrest, front.............................................62, 79 Cable, Jack..................................................9, 23 Courtesy lamps.......................................... 87-88
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)...................... 103-104 Cap, fuel filler.................................................190 Cruise control........................ 144, 146, 148-150,
Assistance, Capacity, fuel tank.........................................190 157-161, 163, 165
.
emergency braking...................... 103-104, 168 Cartridge, fragrance...................................77-78 Cruise control, adaptive...................146, 151-154
Assistance call........................................102-103 CD.......................................................... 9, 23-24 156-157, 159
Audio streaming (Bluetooth)........................9, 24 CD, MP3................................................. 9, 23-24 Cruise control, adaptive with Stop
function................................. 146, 157-161, 163
305
Alphabetical index
Cruise control by speed limit recognition......146 Electronic brake force distribution Fuel............................................................6, 189
Cup holder........................................................79 (EBFD)................................................. 103-104 Fuel consumption................................... 6, 38-39
Electronic stability control (ESC)........... 103-104 Fuel tank........................................................191
Emergency braking assistance (EBA).... 103-104 Fusebox, dashboard......................226-228, 230
Emergency call.......................................102-103 Fusebox, engine compartment......226-228, 230
Emergency switching off........................128, 130 Fuses..............................................226-228, 230
D
Emissions control system, SCR....................204
Energy economy mode..................................195
Engine, Diesel................. 22, 189, 199, 236, 240
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Engine, petrol.................................189, 199, 238
– Digital radio.............................................8, 22 Engine compartment.....................................199
Date (setting)........................................39, 18, 31
Daytime running lamps.................... 93, 220-222
Deactivating the passenger airbag..110, 113-114
Engines.......................................... 237-238, 240
Environment.................................................6, 47 G
Gauge, fuel....................................................190
Deadlocking................................................41-42 Gearbox, automatic................134, 136-141, 203
Defrosting.........................................................77 Gearbox, manual.............134-135, 140-141, 203
Defrosting, front...............................................77 Gear lever..........................................................6
F
Demisting.........................................................77 Gear lever, manual gearbox..........................135
Demisting, front................................................77 Gear efficiency indicator................................139
Demisting, rear.................................................68 Fatigue detection........................................... 175 Glove box................................................... 79-80
Demisting, rear screen....................................68 Filling the AdBlue ® tank.................................205 G.P.S................................................................12
Dimensions....................................................243 Filling the fuel tank..................................189-191
Dipstick............................................. 27, 199-200 Filter, air.........................................................202
Direction indicators.......................... 92, 220-225 Filter, oil..........................................................202
Display screen, instrument panel..................139 Filter, particle......................................... 201-202
Doors................................................................47 Filter, passenger compartment......................202
H
Driver's attention warning.............................. 175 Fitting a wheel......................................... 217-219
Driving economically.........................................6 Fitting roof bars..............................................196
Driving positions (storing)................................59 Fittings, boot....................................................86 Hands-free access......................................51-52
Dynamic stability control (DSC)........21, 103-105 Fittings, interior................................................79 Hands-free tailgate.................................... 50-52
Fittings, rear.....................................................84 Hazard warning lamps....................101-102, 208
Flap, fuel filler..........................................190-191 Hazard warning lamps,
Floor, concertina........................................ 65-66 automatic operation.....................................102
Foglamp, rear................................... 24, 223-225 Headlamp adjustment......................................96
E Foglamps.......................................................221
Foglamps, front............ 91, 96-97, 220, 222, 225
Foglamps, rear.................................................91
Headlamps, automatic dipping............ 25, 94-96
Headlamps, automatic illumination...........90, 93
Headlamps, dipped beam.......... 25, 90, 220-221
Eco-driving (advice)...........................................6
Economy mode..............................................195 Folding the rear seats................................ 62-66 Headlamps, directional............................ 97, 220
Frequency (radio)........................................21-22 Headlamps, halogen......................................221
306
Alphabetical index
K
Headlamps, main beam.............25, 90, 220-222 Key................................................. 40-42, 44-46 Locking the doors...................................... 42-44
Headlamps, Xenon........................................220 Key, electronic......................................40-43, 45 Low fuel level.................................................190
Headlamp wash.............................................100 Keyless Entry and Starting.......... 41-43, 45, 129 Lumbar.............................................................60
Head restraints, front................................. 59-60 Key not recognised................................128, 130
Head restraints, rear........................................63 Key with remote control.................................127
Heating.........................................................6, 72 Kit, hands-free................................ 13-14, 25-26
Hill start assist.........................................134-135 Kit, temporary puncture repair............... 208-210
M
Hooks...............................................................85
Horn...............................................................102
Maintenance, routine.........................................6
Map reading lamps..........................................88
L Markings, identification..................................244
Massage function ............................................60
I Labels, identification......................................244
Lamps, parking................................................92
Mat............................................................. 82-83
Memorising a speed......................................144
Menu................................................................12
Identification, vehicle.....................................244 Lane Departure Warning System
Ignition...................................................... 131, 28 (LDWS)..........................................23, 169, 175 Menus (audio).........................................4-5, 3-5
Ignition on...................................................... 131 LEDs – Light-emitting diodes........................220 Messages.........................................................28
Immobiliser, electronic.............................45, 127 Leg rest, electric..............................................60 Messages, quick..............................................28
Indicator, AdBlue ® range..................................28 Level, AdBlue ®...............................................201 Mirror, child surveillance..................................69
Indicator, coolant temperature.........................27 Level, brake fluid............................................201 Mirror, rear view...............................................69
Indicator, engine oil level.................................27 Level, Diesel additive............................. 201-202 Mirrors, door............................... 68-69, 173-174
Indicators, direction.........................................92 Level, engine coolant............................... 27, 201 Misfuel prevention..........................................191
Inflating tyres.................................................203 Level, engine oil............................... 27, 199-200 Modularity, seats..............................................67
Inflating tyres (using the kit)................... 208-210 Level, headlamp wash...................................201 Motorised tailgate...................................... 48-51
Instrument panels.......................................... 8-9 Level, screenwash fluid.................................201 Mountings, ISOFIX........................................ 119
Intelligent Traction Control.............................104 Levels and checks.................................199, 201
Internet browser...............................................16 Light-emitting diodes – LEDs........................220
ISOFIX....................................................120-121 Lighting.............................................................88
ISOFIX mountings......................................... 119 Lighting, ambient.............................................88
N
Lighting, directional.................................... 96-97
Lighting, guide-me home.................................93
Lighting, interior......................................... 87-88
Lighting, welcome............................................94 Net.............................................................. 86-87
Loading..............................................................6 Number plate lamps.......................................226
J
.
Load reduction mode.....................................195
Locating your vehicle....................................... 41
Jack...............................................211-216, 9, 23 Locking....................................................... 44-45
Jump starting.................................................231 Locking from the inside.............................. 43-44
307
Alphabetical index
O R
Obstacle detection......................................... 176 Radio..................................................6, 9, 21, 24 Scented air freshener.................................77-78
Oil, engine.............................................. 199-200 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Screen, cold climate......................................197
Oil change.............................................. 199-200 Broadcasting – DAB).................................8, 22 Screen menu map............................................ 12
Oil consumption..................................... 199-200 Range......................................................... 38-39 Screenwash, front..........................................100
Opening the bonnet.......................................198 Range, AdBlue........................................... 28-29 Screenwash, rear.............................................99
Opening the boot............................ 40-41, 47-48 RDS.........................................................7, 21-22 Seat belts..................................15, 106-108, 117
Opening the doors..................................... 41, 47 Reading lamps, rear.........................................84 Seats, electric............................................ 58-59
Opening the panoramic sunroof blind.............89 Rear screen, demisting....................................77 Seats, front................................................. 57-59
Recharging the battery.......................... 232-233 Seats, heated...................................................61
Recirculation, air.................................. 72, 75-76 Seats, rear.................................................. 62-66
Reduction of electrical load...........................195 Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR).............204
Regeneration of the particle filter..................202 Selector, gear..........................................136-139
P
Reinitialisation of the under- Serial number, vehicle...................................244
inflation detection system............................143 Service (warning lamp).................................... 17
Reinitialising the remote control................ 46-47 Service indicator..............................................26
Pads, brake............................................ 203-204 Remote control........................................... 40-45 Servicing..........................................................26
Paint colour code...........................................244 Removing a wheel.................................. 217-219 Settings, equipment........................31-33, 35-36
Panoramic glass roof.......................................89 Removing the mat...................................... 82-83 Settings, system.........................................16, 30
Parcel shelf, rear........................................ 84-85 Replacing bulbs............................. 220, 223-225 Sidelamps..................................90, 92, 220-225
Park Assist......................................181-182, 185 Replacing fuses.............................226-228, 230 Side repeater.................................................222
Parking brake......................................... 203-204 Replacing the air filter....................................202 Snow chains............................................191-192
Parking brake, electric........... 14-17, 21, 131-134 Replacing the oil filter....................................202 Socket, 12 V accessory.......................79, 81, 85
Parking sensors, audible and visual.............. 176 Replacing the passenger Socket, 230 V...................................................81
Parking sensors, front....................................177 compartment filter.......................................202 Socket, auxiliary...........................................9, 23
Parking sensors, rear....................................177 Resetting the service indicator.................. 26-27 Socket, Jack...........................................82, 9, 23
Plates, identification......................................244 Resetting the trip recorder......................... 30-31 Sockets, audio.................................................82
Player, Apple ®............................................10, 24 Reversing camera.......................................... 178 Speed limiter...................................144, 146-148
Player, MP3 CD................................................23 Reversing lamp...................................... 223-225 Speed limit recognition...........................144-145
Player, USB..................................................9, 23 Roof bars........................................................196 Spotlamps, door mirror....................................94
Port, USB...............................................82, 9, 23 Running out of fuel (Diesel)...........................236 Starting a Diesel engine................................189
Pre-heater, Diesel............................................22 Starting the vehicle................ 14-17, 21, 126-130
Pressures, tyres..................... 203, 211, 219, 244 Starting using another battery...............130, 231
Pre-tensioning seat belts...............................108 Station, radio...........................................6, 21-22
Priming the fuel system.................................236 Stay, bonnet...................................................198
Profiles.......................................................16, 30
S
Steering mounted controls, audio.................3, 3
Protecting children.................. 110, 112-114, 118, Steering wheel, adjustment.............................68
120-121, 123-124 STOP (warning lamp).......................................13
Puncture................................................. 208-214 Safety, children....................... 110, 112-114, 118, Stopping the vehicle.............. 14-17, 21, 126-130
120-121, 123-124 Stop & Start..............................23-24, 39, 71, 77,
Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel)..........202 140-141, 190, 198, 202, 234
308
Alphabetical index
U
Storage.............................................................80 Under-inflation (detection)............................. 142 Wipers.................................................. 25, 98-99
Storage boxes............................................ 83-84 Unlocking................................................... 40-41 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive................ 98-99
Storing driving positions..................................59 Unlocking, selective.........................................42
Sun visor.................................................... 79-80 Unlocking from the inside.......................... 43-44
Sun visor flap............................................. 79-80 Unlocking the boot...........................................40
Synchronising the remote control.............. 46-47 Unlocking the doors................................... 43-44
Updating the date.................................39, 18, 31
Updating the time................................. 39, 17, 31
USB........................................................ 9, 23-24
T
Tables of engines...................................238, 240
Tables of fuses...............................226-228, 230
Tailgate........................................................47-50 V
Tank, fuel.................................................190-191 Ventilation...............................................6, 70-71
Technical data........................................238, 240 Visibility............................................................77
Telephone....................................... 13-16, 25-29 Vision 360...............................................179-181
Temperature, coolant.................................14, 27 Voice commands..........................................5-10
Three flashes (direction indicators).................92
Time (setting)....................................... 39, 17, 31
TMC (Traffic info).............................................13
Tools........................................................ 211-216
W
Total distance recorder.............................. 30-31
Touch screen..........................31-33, 35-36, 1, 1
Towing device........................................ 127, 192
Towed loads...................................................237 Warning and indicator lamps...................... 11-12
Towing another vehicle.......................... 234-235 Warning lamp, airbag................................. 22-23
Traction control (ASR)......................21, 103-105 Warning lamp, braking system........................ 13
Traffic information (TMC).................................13 Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater........22
Trailer..................................................... 127, 192 Warning lamp, low fuel level............................23
Triangle, warning...........................................208 Warning lamp, parking brake...........................14
Trip computer............................................. 36-39 Warning lamp, Service.................................... 17
Trip distance recorder................................ 30-31 Warning lamp, STOP.......................................13
Tyres.................................................. 6, 203, 244 Weights..........................................................237
.
Tyre under-inflation Wheel, spare...........................203, 211-216, 244
detection................................. 22, 142-143, 211 Window controls..............................................55
Wiper, rear.......................................................99
Wiper blades (changing)................ 100, 195-196
309
CONDUENT
4Dconcept
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application Xerox
of the provisions of the European legislation
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life
Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by
this legislation and that recycled materials are
used in the manufacture of the products that it
sells.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of

this document is prohibited without written
authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
03-18
*18B78.0040* ANG. 18B78.0040

9999 9999 215 en-GB

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

9999 9999 215 en-GB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

9999 9999 215 en-GB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HANDBOOK

Access to the Handbook

From the appropriate Store, download the Scan Select:

This symbol indicates the latest

If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, Right-hand drive vehicle

Overview . Access Lighting and visibility

Instruments and controls 1 7

Drive smoothly Switch off the demisting and defrosting

Control buttons 1. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm), ("Dials" mode).

and the gear with an automatic gearbox. instrument panel

Display areas Customisation of the 12-inch

As a safety measure, these adjustments should

- "Personal": choice of information to be

Only works when the vehicle lamps are on,

F With the exterior lighting on, press this

When the ignition is switched on

Persistent warning lamp

Where a warning lamp remains lit

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do

(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

List of warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Electric parking Fixed. The electric parking brake is applied.

Fixed, associated with

A door, the boot, the tailgate or

Close the access.

Orange warning/indicator lamps

* Only with digital monochrome instrument panel.

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

One or more minor faults have

Identify the cause of the fault using the message

Fixed, accompanied Automatic release of the electric Use manual release.

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

The remaining driving range is

Top up the AdBlue ®.

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

The engine management system has

There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be destroyed.

Collision Risk Fixed, accompanied The system has been deactivated,

Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3).

Dynamic Flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is activated

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

The passenger airbag system is

Carry out (3).

Lane Departure Fixed. The system has been automatically

Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3).

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Rear foglamp Fixed. The lamp is on.

Green warning/indicator lamps

Flashing temporarily. STOP mode is momentarily

Park Assist Fixed. The function is active.

Blind spot Fixed. The function has been activated.

* Only with digital monochrome instrument panel.

Flashing with audible

The direction indicators are on.

Right-hand Flashing with audible The direction indicators are on.

Sidelamps Fixed. The lamps are on.

Under-inflation initialisation Reinitialisation of the under-inflation system.